MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS /
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
TopAccess
© 2021 - 2024 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of Toshiba Tec
Corporation.
Preface 3
0.Preface
Thank you for purchasing our product. This manual describes remote setup and remote management which operated
from the web based management utility TopAccess. Read this manual before using the functions.
How to read this manual
Symbols in this manual
In this manual, some important items are described with the symbols shown below. Be sure to read these items
before using this equipment.
Target audience for this manual
This is a manual that is aimed at general users and administrators.
Model and series names in this manual
In this manual, each model name is replaced with a series name as shown below.
Optional equipment
For available options, see the reference below:
Information About Equipment - Information About Equipment - Options
Screens in this manual
In this manual, Windows 10 is taken for explanation purposes to describe the screens and operation procedures in
Windows.
The details on the screens may differ depending on your model and how the equipment is used, such as the status of
the installed options, the OS version and the applications.
Operations on some items are restricted depending on the privileges assigned to the TopAccess user.
Also, some items may not be displayed or may not function on some models.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death,
serious injury, or serious damage, or fire in the equipment or surrounding objects.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury, partial damage to the equipment or surrounding objects, or loss of data.
Indicates information to which you should pay attention when operating the equipment.
Describes handy information that is useful to know when operating the equipment.
References describing items related to what you are currently doing. See these references
as required.
Model name Series name
e-STUDIO2020AC/2520AC/2021AC/2521AC e-STUDIO6525AC Series
e-STUDIO2525AC/3025AC/3525AC/4525AC/5525AC/6525AC
e-STUDIO2528A/3028A/3528A/4528A/5528A/6528A e-STUDIO6528A Series
e-STUDIO6526AC/6527AC/7527AC e-STUDIO7527AC Series
e-STUDIO6529A/7529A/9029A e-STUDIO9029A Series
4 Preface
Abbreviations in this manual
In this manual, “Dual Scan Document Feeder” (DSDF) and “Reversing Automatic Document Feeder” (RADF) are
collectively referred to as “Automatic Document Feeder” (ADF).
About the defaults shown in this manual
The defaults shown in this manual are the values in the standard operating environment. The values may have
been changed from these defaults. The defaults for your model may differ from the defaults shown.
The default for the list item is shown underlined.
Trademarks
For trademarks, refer to the Safety Information.
Security Precautions
To prevent the configuration settings from being changed illegally or similar, change the initial administrator
password at the time of shipping before you use this product.
Be sure to log out when leaving your computer while changing TopAccess settings for security purposes.
For security purposes, do not access any other site while you are logged in to TopAccess.
CONTENTS 5
CONTENTS
Preface................................................................................................................................................. 3
How to read this manual ............................................................................................................................................ 3
Chapter 1 Overview
TopAccess Overview............................................................................................................................ 10
TopAccess Conditions .......................................................................................................................... 11
Accessing TopAccess............................................................................................................................ 12
Accessing TopAccess by entering URL...................................................................................................................... 12
TopAccess Screen Descriptions............................................................................................................. 13
Access Policy Mode.............................................................................................................................. 14
Chapter 2 [Device]
[Device] Item List ................................................................................................................................ 18
Displayed Icons ................................................................................................................................... 20
Chapter 3 [Job Status]
[Job Status] Overview ......................................................................................................................... 24
[Print Job] Item list .................................................................................................................................................... 24
[Fax/InternetFax Job] Item list.................................................................................................................................. 27
[Scan Job] Item list .................................................................................................................................................... 28
[Multi Station] Item list .............................................................................................................................................. 29
Chapter 4 [Logs]
[Logs] Overview .................................................................................................................................. 32
[View Logs] Item list................................................................................................................................................... 32
[Export Logs] Item list <access policy mode>........................................................................................................... 40
[Log Settings] Item list <access policy mode>.......................................................................................................... 42
Chapter 5 [Registration]
[Registration] Overview....................................................................................................................... 44
Public Home............................................................................................................................................................... 44
Public Theme Settings............................................................................................................................................... 44
Public Home Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 44
[Address Book] Item list............................................................................................................................................. 44
[Inbound FAX routing] Item list ................................................................................................................................. 55
Chapter 6 [Counter]
[Counter] Overview ............................................................................................................................. 62
[Counter] Item list...................................................................................................................................................... 62
Chapter 7 [User Management]
[User Management] Overview .............................................................................................................. 76
[User Accounts] Item list <access policy mode> ...................................................................................................... 76
[Group Management] Item list <access policy mode>............................................................................................. 84
6 CONTENTS
[Role Management] Item list <access policy mode>................................................................................................ 86
[Department Management] Item list <access policy mode> ................................................................................... 92
[Project Management] Item list <access policy mode> ........................................................................................... 96
[Export/Import] Item list <access policy mode> ...................................................................................................... 97
[Shared Settings] Item list <access policy mode>.................................................................................................... 99
Chapter 8 [Administration]
[Setup] Item List ................................................................................................................................103
General settings ....................................................................................................................................................... 103
Network settings...................................................................................................................................................... 119
Copier settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 172
Fax settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 176
Save as file settings.................................................................................................................................................. 185
Email settings........................................................................................................................................................... 195
InternetFax settings................................................................................................................................................. 202
Printer/e-Filing settings........................................................................................................................................... 207
Printer settings......................................................................................................................................................... 208
Print Service settings ............................................................................................................................................... 215
ICC Profile settings................................................................................................................................................... 223
Print Data Converter settings.................................................................................................................................. 225
MFP Collaboration ................................................................................................................................................... 226
Embedded Web Browser settings ........................................................................................................................... 236
Off Device Customization Architecture settings..................................................................................................... 239
Version...................................................................................................................................................................... 240
[Security] Item List.............................................................................................................................241
Authentication settings ........................................................................................................................................... 241
Certificate Management settings ............................................................................................................................ 260
Password Policy settings......................................................................................................................................... 265
Security Stamp setting ............................................................................................................................................ 268
Configuration settings ............................................................................................................................................. 269
[Maintenance] Item List ......................................................................................................................270
Upload Software settings ........................................................................................................................................ 270
Remove Software settings....................................................................................................................................... 272
Create Clone File settings........................................................................................................................................ 273
Install Clone File settings......................................................................................................................................... 275
Import settings......................................................................................................................................................... 278
Export settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 281
Panel View ................................................................................................................................................................ 284
Idle Screen................................................................................................................................................................ 285
Delete Files settings................................................................................................................................................. 291
Notification settings ................................................................................................................................................ 292
Languages settings .................................................................................................................................................. 295
Remote Command................................................................................................................................................... 298
Data Backup ............................................................................................................................................................. 300
User Paper Type....................................................................................................................................................... 302
System Updates settings......................................................................................................................................... 303
Reboot settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 304
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List ...........................................................................................305
Public Home............................................................................................................................................................. 305
Template settings .................................................................................................................................................... 311
Public Theme Settings............................................................................................................................................. 339
Public Home Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 340
Default Home ........................................................................................................................................................... 341
Default Home Settings............................................................................................................................................. 341
Simple Screen Settings............................................................................................................................................ 342
Image/Icon Management ........................................................................................................................................ 343
Home Data List......................................................................................................................................................... 345
CONTENTS 7
Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received Forward settings..................................................................... 345
Meta Scan ................................................................................................................................................................. 360
XML Format File........................................................................................................................................................ 364
[Application] Item List ........................................................................................................................365
Application List ........................................................................................................................................................ 365
Application Settings................................................................................................................................................. 368
User Extended Information ..................................................................................................................................... 371
Resource Management............................................................................................................................................ 372
[License] Item List ..............................................................................................................................373
License List............................................................................................................................................................... 373
Activate..................................................................................................................................................................... 373
Chapter 9 [My Account]
[My Account] Overview .......................................................................................................................376
[My Account] Item list .............................................................................................................................................. 376
Chapter 10 Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function ............................................................................................................384
Procedure for using Meta Scan ............................................................................................................................... 384
Checking Meta Scan Enabler ................................................................................................................................... 385
Editing XML format file ............................................................................................................................................ 385
Registering XML format file ..................................................................................................................................... 389
Registering Extended Field Definition .................................................................................................................... 389
Registering templates for Meta Scan...................................................................................................................... 392
Meta Scan ................................................................................................................................................................. 395
Checking logs of Meta Scan..................................................................................................................................... 395
Setting Multi Station Print ..................................................................................................................396
Procedure for Multi Station Print ............................................................................................................................ 396
Procedure for Multi Station Print (Only in One Equipment Unit).......................................................................... 397
Checking the Multi Station Print Enabler ............................................................................................................... 397
Setting Home Data Synchronization ....................................................................................................398
Procedure for Home Data Synchronization ........................................................................................................... 398
Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP ..................................................400
Exporting the role information setting file ............................................................................................................. 400
Defining the role information setting file ............................................................................................................... 400
Importing the role information setting file............................................................................................................. 401
Enabling the role base access setting..................................................................................................................... 401
Setting up Email.................................................................................................................................402
Procedure for Email Setting .................................................................................................................................... 402
Installing Certificates .........................................................................................................................403
Installing a device certificate .................................................................................................................................. 403
Creating/Exporting a client certificate.................................................................................................................... 410
Installing CA certificate............................................................................................................................................ 412
INDEX .........................................................................................................................................................415
8 CONTENTS
1.Overview
TopAccess Overview .........................................................................................................10
TopAccess Conditions .......................................................................................................11
Accessing TopAccess.........................................................................................................12
Accessing TopAccess by entering URL................................................................................................................12
TopAccess Screen Descriptions..........................................................................................13
Access Policy Mode ...........................................................................................................14
10 TopAccess Overview
0.TopAccess Overview
TopAccess is a management utility that allows you to check device information of this equipment and job status, and
to carry out device setting and maintenance through a web browser.
TopAccess has an “end-user mode” and a “access policy mode”.
End-user mode
End users can:
Display general device information, including status, drawer/accessory configuration, and paper supply
information.
Display and manage the status of print jobs, fax/Internet Fax transmission jobs, and scan jobs submitted by the
user. (The Fax Unit is required to display and manage the fax transmission jobs)
Display the job logs for print, fax/Internet Fax transmission, fax/Internet Fax reception, and scan. (The Fax Unit is
required to display the fax transmission and fax reception job logs.)
Register and modify templates.
Add or modify contacts and groups in the address book.
Register and modify mailboxes. (The Fax Unit is required.)
Display counter logs.
Download client software.
P.12 “Accessing TopAccess”
Access policy mode
Operation privileges and displayed items vary depending on the user account you used to log in to TopAccess.
Details of operations and displays vary depending on the management on roles and departments to where the user
account is assigned.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
TopAccess Conditions 11
Overview
0.TopAccess Conditions
Your equipment should be connected to the network and TCP/IP is correctly configured to operate TopAccess.
When TCP/IP is correctly configured, you can access TopAccess via a web browser.
Supported browsers
Windows
- Microsoft Edge 89 or later
- Firefox 86 or later
- Chrome 89 or later
macOS
- Safari 14.0 or later
UNIX
- Firefox 86 or later
Because TopAccess uses cookies to store information on the user’s system, these must be enabled in the browser.
If TopAccess does not display the correct information in any page, delete the cookies and try again.
If a proxy server is used, set the IP address of the equipment in use in “Exceptions” of the proxy server.
Make sure you disable your web browser’s pop-up blocker or allow pop-ups from TopAccess.
TopAccess supports special letters of European languages. A note is described in each article if there are any
restrictions in which letters can be entered.
This equipment uses TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3 as communication protocols.
12 Accessing TopAccess
0.Accessing TopAccess
You can access TopAccess by entering its URL in the address box of the web browser.
Accessing TopAccess by entering URL
1
Launch a web browser and enter the following URL in the address box.
http://<IP Address> or http://<Device Name>
For example
When the IP address of your equipment “10.10.70.120” (when IPv4 used):
http://10.10.70.120
When the IP address of your equipment is “3ffe:1:1:10:280:91ff:fe4c:4f54” (when IPv6 used):
3ffe-1-1-10-280-91ff-fe4c-4f54.ipv6-literal.net
or
http://[3ffe:1:1:10:280:91ff:fe4c:4f54]
When your device name is “mfp-04998820”:
http://mfp-04998820
When SSL/TLS for the HTTP network service is enabled, an alert message may appear when you enter the URL in
the address box. In that case, click [Advanced], and then click [Continue to ~ (unsafe)] to proceed.
2
The TopAccess website appears.
The screen shows information, depending on the model and options you use.
You can also access TopAccess using the TopAccessDocMon link. For instructions on accessing TopAccess from
TopAccessDocMon, refer to the Help for TopAccessDocMon.
TopAccess Screen Descriptions 13
Overview
0.TopAccess Screen Descriptions
When the sub or pop-up window appears, do not click [X] of the browser to close it. Be sure to click the operation
button of TopAccess.
Item name Description
1 Header area This area includes the operation buttons and icons.
[Login] button — When you click this button, you can log in to TopAccess
via the user authentication: after log-in, the button changes to [Logout] for
you to log out. After you log in, the log-in user name appears. When you are
in the log-out status or the user authentication is disabled, the user name
does not appear.
— Click this [e-Filing] icon to start up e-Filing.
— Click this [Install Client Software] icon to open the page where you
can download the installer file for the client software from TopAccess.
— Click this [Help] icon to show help.
2 Menu area This area shows the layered menu of categorized functions. An arrowhead
indicates the lower menu items. When you click an arrowhead, the lower
menu opens or closes. When you click an item on the first layered menu, the
second layered menu appears under the selected item. When you click or
move your mouse pointer over an item on the second layered menu, the third
layered menu pops up. The fourth menu, if any, appears in the setting display
area, so that you can click an item to move to the setting concerned.
3 Setting display area This area shows the functions and information according to the selection in
the menu area. Click [Top of Page] to move back to the top of this area.
1
2
3
14 Access Policy Mode
0.Access Policy Mode
The access policy mode enables different operation privileges and displayed items to be applied depending on the
user account you used to log in to TopAccess.
In the access policy mode, the details of operations and displays differ depending on the roles and department
assigned to the given user account.
1
Access TopAccess.
P.12 “Accessing TopAccess by entering URL”
2
Click [Login].
The Login page is displayed.
3
Enter the user name and password and click [Login].
If [User authentication] is enabled, you need to log in according to the [Authentication Type] setting.
[MFP Local Authentication] – Enter your user name and password that are registered are registered in the
equipment.
[Windows Domain Authentication] – Select [Domain Name] that manages users and enter your user name
and password that are registered in the domain.
[LDAP Authentication] – Select [LDAP Server] that manages users and enter your user name and password
that are registered in that the server.
For details, see the reference below:
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
Enter the user name and password that comply with TopAccess access policies.
The Setup page is displayed.
The default log-in settings are “admin” for User Name and “123456” for Password. Depending on the model
and destination, you are required to change the default administrator password for the first login. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
Failing to enter the correct password for a number of times at login will be considered unauthorized access
and you may not be able to log in for a certain period of time. Contact the administrator if you see a message
to inform you that your account is locked, or your user name or password is incorrect, and you are unable to
continue the login operation.
The input password is hidden with symbols.
After login, you will be automatically logged out when the time specified in the [Session Timer] elapses.
Lockout setting for user accounts can be set with [Administration] > [Security] > [Password Policy].
P.265 “Password Policy settings”
The [Session Timer] can be set with [Administration] > [Setup] > [General] > [WEB General Setting].
1.Overview
Access Policy Mode 15
Overview
4
Click the layered menu to display the desired page.
You can log out by clicking the [Logout] link at the top right of the page.
1.Overview
16 Access Policy Mode
18 [Device] Item List
0.[Device] Item List
TopAccess opens the [Device] page which includes a picture indicating the device status. At any time, the end user
may click [REFRESH] to update the TopAccess status information.
This page shows the following information about the device. The screen shows information, depending on the model
and options you use.
Item name Description
1 Device Information The following information is displayed.
Status — Displays the device status.
Name — Displays the name of this equipment.
Location — Displays the equipment’s location.
Copier Model — Displays the model name of this equipment.
Serial Number — Displays the serial number of this equipment.
MAC Address — Displays the MAC address of this equipment.
Main Memory Size (for some models only) — Displays the main memory
size.
Page Memory Size (for some models only) — Displays the page memory
size.
Save as File & e-Filing Space Available (for some models only) —
Displays the total available space in the local folder and e-Filing on your
equipment.
Fax Space Available — Displays the available space for sending and
receive fax data.
Contact Information — Displays the contact name of the person
responsible for managing this device.
Phone Number — Displays the phone number of the person responsible for
managing this device.
Message — Displays administrative messages.
Alerts — Displays alert messages.
1
2
3
4
5
2.[Device]
[Device] Item List 19
[Device]
2 Options The following information is displayed.
Finisher (for some models only)— Displays whether the Finisher is
installed.
Hole Punch Unit (for some models only) — Displays whether the Hole
Punch Unit is installed.
Fax — Displays whether the Fax Unit is installed.
Optional Function kit (for some models only) — Displays whether the
optional function kit is installed.
3 Paper The following information is displayed.
Drawer — Displays a list of the installed drawers.
Size — Displays the paper size set for each drawer.
Thickness — Displays the thickness of the paper set in each drawer.
Attribute — Displays the purpose of the paper set in each drawer.
Capacity — Displays the maximum paper capacity that can be set for each
drawer.
Level — Displays the remaining amount of paper for each drawer.
The paper size for each drawer cannot be set from TopAccess. Set it from
the touch panel of the equipment. For instructions on how to set the paper
size for each drawer, see the reference below:
Preparation of Paper (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series)-
LOADING PAPER - Loading Paper in Drawers
Preparation of Paper (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
LOADING PAPER - Loading Paper in Drawers
4 Toner Displays the estimated amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges in
the equipment.
5 REFRESH Click this to update information.
Item name Description
20 Displayed Icons
0.Displayed Icons
When the equipment requires maintenance or when an error occurs with the equipment, icons indicating the status
information appear near the graphic image of the equipment on the TopAccess [Device] page. The following are the
icons displayed and their descriptions.
Printer Error 1 This icon indicates that a non-recommended toner cartridge is being used, and that
the equipment has stopped printing. For information on resolving the error, see the
reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Printer Error 2 This icon indicates one of the following:
You need to remove paper from the receiving tray.
You need to remove paper from the Finisher tray.
You need to remove the staples jammed in the Finisher. For information on
resolving the error, see the reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Clearing a Staple Jam - Finisher
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Clearing a Staple Jam - Finisher
You need to remove the staples jammed in the Saddle Stitch Unit. For information
on resolving the error, see the reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series)-
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Clearing a Staple Jam - Saddle
Stitch unit
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Clearing a Staple Jam - Saddle
Stitch unit
You need to clear chads from the Hole Punch Unit. For information on resolving
the error, see the reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Cleaning the Hole Punch Dust Bin
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Cleaning the Hole Punch Dust Bin
A non-recommended toner cartridge is being used. For information on resolving
the error, see the reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing a Toner Cartridge
You performed saddle stitch printing with the paper of the different sizes.
The equipment cannot load paper from the Large Capacity Feeder.
The equipment cannot eject the paper to the output tray.
Data in the internal storage device of this equipment is required to be backed up.
Replacing of the internal storage device of this equipment is required.
Cover Open This icon indicates a cover such as the front cover or Automatic Duplexing Unit
Cover is open.
Drawer Open This icon indicates the drawer is open.
2.[Device]
Displayed Icons 21
[Device]
Toner Empty This icon indicates no toner is left. For information on resolving the error, see the
reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Waste Toner Full This icon indicates the waste toner box is full and requires replacing. For
information on resolving the error, see the reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing the Waste Toner Box
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Replacing the Waste Toner Box
Paper Empty This icon indicates no paper is left in a drawer. For information on resolving the
error, see the reference below:
Preparation of Paper (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series)-
LOADING PAPER - Loading Paper in Drawers
Preparation of Paper (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
LOADING PAPER - Loading Paper in Drawers
Paper Misfeed This icon indicates a paper misfeed occurred. It also indicates the location of the
paper misfeed. For information on resolving the error, see the reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Clearing a Paper Misfeed
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Clearing a Paper Misfeed
Staples Empty This icon indicates no staples are left in the Finisher. For information on resolving
the error, see the reference below:
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Refilling With Staples
Troubleshooting (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) -
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR THE HARDWARE - Refilling With Staples
Call for Service Contact your service representative to have the equipment inspected.
2.[Device]
22 Displayed Icons
3.[Job Status]
[Job Status] Overview ......................................................................................................24
[Print Job] Item list ..............................................................................................................................................24
[Fax/InternetFax Job] Item list............................................................................................................................27
[Scan Job] Item list ..............................................................................................................................................28
[Multi Station] Item list ........................................................................................................................................29
24 [Job Status] Overview
0.[Job Status] Overview
You can display and delete print jobs, Fax/InternetFax jobs, and scan jobs. You can also print print jobs immediately.
When user authentication is enabled, you can operate on jobs associated with the user account you used to log in.
However, a user account with administrator privileges can operate on all jobs.
Click [REFRESH] at the upper part of the page to update information.
[Print Job] Item list
The Print Job page is divided into Print Job, Private Print Job, Hold Print Job, and IPP-PIN Print Job. You can select
Private Print Job, Hold Print Job, and IPP-PIN Print Job only when you are logged in with a user account with
administrator privileges in the access policy mode.
[Print Job] screen
[Private Print Job] screen
[Hold Print Job] screen
[IPP-PIN Print Job] screen
Item name Description
1 [Delete] button The selected print job is deleted.
1
2
412111098
765
3
15
13
14
1
2
4111098
765
3
12
1
2
4111098
765
3
12
1
2
4
111098
765
3
12
3.[Job Status]
[Job Status] Overview 25
[Job Status]
Print jobs that have finished being printed are displayed on the [Logs] page.
Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print job list in the specified order.
You cannot use the Print Job page to delete fax/Internet Fax jobs and E-mail reception print jobs.
Private print jobs, hold print jobs, and IPP-PIN print jobs cannot be released from TopAccess.
2 [Delete All] button All print jobs are deleted.
On the [IPP-PIN Print Job] screen, you can use this button only when you are
logged in with a user account with administrator privileges in the access
policy mode.
3 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
4 Document Name Displays the document name of the print job.
Document names are displayed using 10 asterisks (*) when the
Confidentiality Setting is enabled.
P.108 “Setting up Confidentiality Setting”
5 Type Displays the print job set in the printer driver. Possible values of print job are:
[Normal], [Scheduled], [Private], [Proof], [Hold], [MultiStation], and [IPP-
PIN].
6 Paper Displays the paper size of the print jobs.
7 Sets Displays the number of copies set for the print jobs.
8 Pages Displays the number of pages of the print job.
9 Date Time Displays the date and time when the print job was released from the client
computers.
They are displayed using “year, month, day, hour, minute, and second”. For
example: 2016/12/24 12:34:56
10 Status Displays the status of the print job.
Possible values of status are: [Paused], [Wait], [Suspend], [Skipped],
[Process], [Printing], [Receiving], and [Scheduled].
Depending on the type of jobs, some statuses may not be displayed.
11 User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the print job.
12 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who is the
owner of the print job.
13 [Release] button If the selected print job is in the print queue, the job is printed.
14 [Release All] button All print jobs on all pages are printed.
15 [Recovery Information]
button
If the selected print job was skipped while the job skip feature was enabled,
the recovery information screen is displayed.
P.26 “[Recovery Information] screen”
P.106 “Setting up Job Control”
Item name Description
3.[Job Status]
26 [Job Status] Overview
[Recovery Information] screen
The Recovery Information screen displays the conditions for resuming printing.
Item name Description
1 [Close] button Closes the [Recovery Information] screen.
2 Cause Displays the cause of the print interruption.
3 Recovery Condition Displays the procedure for resuming printing.
4 Paper Size Displays the paper size set for the interrupted print job.
5 Paper Type Displays the paper type set for the interrupted print job.
6 Drawer Displays the paper source set for the interrupted print job.
2 3 4 5 6
1
3.[Job Status]
[Job Status] Overview 27
[Job Status]
[Fax/InternetFax Job] Item list
The Fax/InternetFax Job page displays the following information for each fax transmission job.
Transmission jobs that have finished their transmission are displayed on the [Logs] page.
Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print job list in the specified order.
Item name Description
1 [Delete] button The selected fax job is deleted.
2 [Delete All] button All fax jobs are deleted.
3 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
4 File No. Displays the file number (001 to 100) to identify the fax transmission job.
5 TO(Name) Displays the destination name set for the fax transmission job.
6 TO(Fax No./Email) Displays the fax number or E-mail address of the destination.
7 Delay Time Displays the delayed time set for the fax transmission job.
8 Pages Displays the number of pages of the fax transmission job.
9 Date Time Displays the date and time when the fax transmission job is released from the
touch panel or client computer using the N/W-Fax driver.
They are displayed using “year, month, day, hour, minute, and second”. For
example: 2016/12/24 12:34:56
10 Status Displays the status of the fax transmission job.
Possible values of status are: [Delayed], [Wait], [Line1], [Line2], and
[Network].
11 User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the fax transmission job.
12 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who is the
owner of the fax transmission job.
1
2
4111098
765
3
12
3.[Job Status]
28 [Job Status] Overview
[Scan Job] Item list
The Scan Job page displays the following information for each scan job.
Scan jobs that have finished being scanned are displayed on the [Logs] page.
Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print job list in the specified order.
Item name Description
1 [Delete] button The selected scan job is deleted.
2 [Delete All] button All scan jobs are deleted.
3 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
4 TO(Name) Displays the destination (name) to where the scanned document is sent via
an E-mail.
5 TO(Email) Displays the destination (E-mail address) to where the scanned document is
sent via an E-mail.
6 File Name When the job performs the Scan to File or USB or Scan to e-Filing, it displays
the document name to be stored.
File names are displayed using 10 asterisks (*) when the Confidentiality
Setting is enabled.
P.108 “Setting up Confidentiality Setting”
7 Agent Displays the agent of the scan job.
Possible values of agent are: [Email], [Save as file], [Store to e-Filing], and
[Store to USB Media].
8 Pages Displays the number of pages of the scan job.
9 Date Time Displays the date and time when the scan job is released from the touch
panel.
They are displayed using “year, month, day, hour, minute, and second”. For
example: 2016/12/24 12:34:56
10 Status Displays the status of the scan job.
Possible values of status are: [Wait], [Suspended], [Processing], and
[Scanning]
11 User Name Displays the user account name who is the owner of the scan job.
12 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who is the
owner of the scan job.
1
2
4111098
765
3
12
3.[Job Status]
[Job Status] Overview 29
[Job Status]
[Multi Station] Item list
The following two pages show information about print jobs that you process with the Multi Station Print function.
Multi Station Job – Displays information about the jobs that are in the print queue.
Multi Station Printed Job – Displays information about the printed jobs.
You can select these pages only when you are logged in with a user account with administrator privileges in the access
policy mode.
You need the Multi Station Print Enabler option to use the [Multi Station Print] function. For details, contact your
service technician or representative.
Item name Description
1 [Delete] button The selected print job is deleted.
2 [Delete All] button All print jobs are deleted.
3 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
4 Document Name Displays the document name of the print job.
5 Paper Displays the paper size specified on the print job.
6 Sets Displays the number of copies specified on the print job.
7 Pages Displays the total number of pages in the print job.
8 Date Time Displays the date and time when the print job was received from the client
computer.
The date and time are displayed in “YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS” format.
Example: 2016/12/24 12:34:56
9 User Name Displays the owner user account name of the print job.
10 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the owner user account of the
print job.
1
2
41098
765
3
3.[Job Status]
30 [Job Status] Overview
4.[Logs]
[Logs] Overview ...............................................................................................................32
[View Logs] Item list.............................................................................................................................................32
[Export Logs] Item list <access policy mode>.....................................................................................................40
[Log Settings] Item list <access policy mode>....................................................................................................42
32 [Logs] Overview
0.[Logs] Overview
You can check the job history.
Check the logs periodically to ensure that there is no unauthorized access to the equipment as a result of spoofing.
Logs are recorded from the moment the equipment is turned on until it is shut down. Log recording continues also
after entering the Super Sleep mode.
Up to 100 logs are displayed in chronological order with the most recent first. When the number of logs exceeds
101, select the page you want to view. You can check up to 5,000 logs in Print Job Log Export, Fax Transmission
Journal Export, Fax Reception Journal Export, and Scan Log Export, and up to 10,000 logs in Messages Log Export
by exporting them. The oldest logs are deleted when the number of logs exceeds the maximum limit.
The default Administrator and Auditor roles can check all logs. For more information on default roles and
privileges, see the following:
P.87 “Default roles and privileges”
When user authentication is enabled, you can check the logs associated with the user account you used to log in.
Furthermore, a user account to which the default Administrator or Auditor role have been assigned can check all
logs.
Click [REFRESH] at the upper part of the page to update information.
[View Logs] Item list
Print Log
The Print Log page displays the following information for each print job log.
Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print log list in the specified order.
Item name Description
1 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
2 Document Name Displays the document name of the print job.
3 Type Displays the print job type.
4 Paper Displays the paper size of the print jobs.
5 Sets Displays the number of copies set for print jobs.
6 Pages Displays the number of pages of the print job.
7 Date Time Displays the date and time that the print job was released from the client
computers.
8 Status Displays the status of the print log.
9 User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the print job.
10 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the
owner of the print job.
11 Project Code Displays the Project Code of the print job.
34
56 7 8 9 10 11
2
1
4.[Logs]
[Logs] Overview 33
[Logs]
Transmission Journal
The Transmission Journal page displays the following information for each transmission journal.
* The transmission mode is displayed by a combination of a 2-digit letter code, a 3-digit numeric code, and up to a 4-digit supplemental code. For
example: EC 603
Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the transmission journal list in the specified order.
Item name Description
1 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
2 No. Displays the serial number of the journals.
3 File No. Displays the file number to identify the received job.
4 Duration Displays the time length taken for the transmissions. If it takes more than 1
hour, “59:59” is indicated.
5 TO (Name) Displays the destination name set for the transmission job.
6 TO (Fax No./Email) Displays the fax number or E-mail address of the destination for the
transmission job.
7 Dept Displays the department code if department management is enabled.
8 Line Displays the line used.
9 Mode Displays the transmission mode*.
10 Pages Displays the number of pages of the transmission job.
11 Date Time Displays the date and time the transmission job was performed.
12 Status Displays the result of the transmission.
13 User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the transmission job.
14 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the
owner of the transmission job.
2-digit letter
code
(Communication
Mode)
1st numeric
code
(bps)
2nd numeric code
(Resolution)
3rd
numeric
code
(Mode)
Up to 4 digit
supplemental code
EC: ECM
G3: G3
ML: E-mail
0: 2400
1: 4800
2: 7200
3: 9600
4: 12000
5: 14400
6: V.34
0: 8x3.85
1: 8x7.7
2: 8x15.4
4: 16x15.4
8: 300 dpi
B: 600 dpi
D: 150 dpi
0: MH
1: MR
2: MMR
3: JBIG
P: Polling
SB: Mailbox
SR/R: Relay mailbox
SF/F: Forward mailbox
ML: Internet Fax
I: N/W-Fax
O: Offramp Gateway
34 56789101112 13 142
1
4.[Logs]
34 [Logs] Overview
Reception Journal
The Reception Journal page displays the following information for each reception journal.
* The reception mode is displayed by a combination of a 2-digit letter code, a 3-digit numeric code, and up to a 4-digit supplemental code. For
example: EC 603
Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the reception journal list in the specified order.
Item name Description
1 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
2 No. Displays the serial number of the journals.
3 File No. Displays the file number to identify the received job.
4 Duration Displays the time taken for the receptions. If it takes more than 1 hour,
“59:59” is indicated.
5 From (Name) Displays the sender’s name of the received job.
6 From (Fax No./Email) Displays the fax number or E-mail address of the sender for the received job.
7 Dept Displays the department code if the department management is enabled.
8 Line Displays the line used.
9 Mode Displays the reception mode*.
10 Pages Displays the number of pages of the received job.
11 Date Time Displays the date and time of receiving the job.
12 Status Displays the result of the reception.
13 User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the received job.
14 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the
owner of the received job.
2-digit letter
code
(Communication
Mode)
1st numeric
code
(bps)
2nd numeric code
(Resolution)
3rd
numeric
code
(Mode)
Up to 4 digit
supplemental code
EC: ECM
G3: G3
ML: E-mail
0: 2400
1: 4800
2: 7200
3: 9600
4: 12000
5: 14400
6: V.34
0: 8x3.85
1: 8x7.7
2: 8x15.4
4: 16x15.4
8: 300 dpi
B: 600 dpi
D: 150 dpi
0: MH
1: MR
2: MMR
3: JBIG
P: Polling
SB: Mailbox
SR/R: Relay mailbox
SF/F: Forward mailbox
ML: Internet Fax
I: N/W-Fax
O: Onramp Gateway
23 45 6 7891011 12 13 14
1
4.[Logs]
[Logs] Overview 35
[Logs]
Scan Log
The Scan Log page displays the following information for each scan job log.
* Codes are displayed in the following format.
Item name Description
1 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
2 TO (Name) Displays the destination (name) to where the scanned document was sent via
an E-mail.
3 TO (Email) Displays the destination (E-mail address) to where the scanned document
was sent via an E-mail.
4 File Name Displays the file name stored in a shared folder or e-Filing.
This item may not be displayed depending on the access policies.
5 Agent Displays the agent of the scan job.
6 Mode Displays the transmission mode using 6-letter codes*.
7 Pages Displays the number of pages of the scan job.
8 Date Time Displays the date and time when the scan job was released from the touch
panel.
9 Status Displays the detailed result status of the scan job.
10 User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the scan job.
11 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the
owner of the scan job.
23 456789 10 11
1
4.[Logs]
36 [Logs] Overview
Code format: AA B C D E
AA: This describes the job type.
CA Copy and File
Copy and Store to e-Filing
CT Copy to e-Filing (without printing)
FS Relay Mailbox Transmission
FF Fax Received Forward
FE Internet Fax Received Forward
ST Scan to File or USB
Scan to e-Filing
Scan to Email
FA Fax and Save as File
PA Print and e-Filing
PT Print to e-Filing
IA N/W-Fax and Save as File
BE e-Filing to Email
RS Remote Scan or Web Services Scan
MS Meta Scan
EN E-mail notification
WS WS Scan
RI Save Result Report as File
Email Result Report
AT Save in Storage for Applications
B: This describes the transmission type.
0 e-Filing
1Email (SMTP)
2FTP
3SMB
4 Save in a local folder
5 NetWare IPX/SPX
6USB
7NetWare TCP/IP
8FTPS
9 Remote Scan or Web Services Scan
C: This describes the resolution.
0 100 dpi
1 150 dpi
2 200 dpi
3 300 dpi
4 400 dpi
4.[Logs]
[Logs] Overview 37
[Logs]
5 600 dpi
A 8 x 3.85 (line/mm) (203 x 98)
B 8 x 7.7 (line/mm) (203 x 196)
C 8 x 15.4 (line/mm) (203 x 391)
D 16 x 15.4 (line/mm) (400 x 391)
D: This describes the file format.
0 e-Filing
1TIFF (Multi)
2TIFF (Single)
3 PDF (Multi) or Encrypted PDF (Multi)
4JPEG
5 PDF (Single) or Encrypted PDF (Single)
6 Slim PDF (Multi)
7Slim PDF (Single)
8XPS (Multi)
9XPS (Single)
ADIB
B PDF/A (Multi)
CPDF/A (Single)
D Searchable PDF(Multi) or Searchable Encrypted PDF (Multi)
E Searchable PDF(Single) or Searchable Encrypted PDF (Single)
F Searchable Slim PDF (Multi)
G Searchable Slim PDF (Single)
H Searchable PDF/A (Multi)
I Searchable PDF/A (Single)
J DOCX (Multi)
K DOCX (Single)
LXLSX (Multi)
M XLSX (Single)
NPPTX (Multi)
OPPTX (Single)
P Slim PDF/A (Multi)
Q Slim PDF/A (Single)
R Searchable Slim PDF/A (Multi)
S Searchable Slim PDF/A (Single)
4.[Logs]
38 [Logs] Overview
The file format is recorded as DIB in the scan log if the data are scanned in BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or PNG format using the
WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) driver.
Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the scan log list in the specified order.
Application Log
The Application Log page displays the following information for each application log item.
E: This describes the file color mode.
BBlack
GGray Scale
C Color
MMix
Item name Description
1 Application Name Displays the application name where the error occurred.
2 Error Level Displays the error level.
Error — Errors that may not be cleared by some users.
Warning — Errors that may be cleared by the administrator.
Information — Errors that may be cleared by general users, or not errors.
3 Message Displays the message if there is any.
4 Date Time Displays the date and time of the error.
5 User Name Displays the user account name that is related to the message.
6 Domain Name / LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account that is related
to the message.
1 2345 6
4.[Logs]
[Logs] Overview 39
[Logs]
Message Log <access policy mode>
The Message Log page displays errors which have occurred on your model.
Displays only when you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator privileges or display
privilege in the access policy mode.
The default Administrator and Auditor roles can check all message logs. For more information on default roles and
privileges, see the reference below:
P.87 “Default roles and privileges”
For details on error codes and error messages, see the references below:
Frequently Asked Questions - QUESTIONS FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Frequently Asked Questions - QUESTIONS FOR ERROR CODES
Item name Description
1 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
2 Error Level Displays the error level.
Error— Error that user and administrator may not be recoverable.
Warning — Error that administrator is recoverable.
Information — Error that end user is recoverable or that event is not error.
3 Message Displays the message if available.
4 Date Time Displays the date and time of the error.
5 Status Displays the error code.
6 User Name Displays the user account name related to the message.
7 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account related to the
message.
23 456 7
1
4.[Logs]
40 [Logs] Overview
[Export Logs] Item list <access policy mode>
You can erase logs or export them in a file.
Displays only when you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator or display privileges in the
access policy mode.
The exported data file can be either CSV format or XML format. [CSV] is set as the default.
You can export up to 5,000 logs in Print Job Log Export, Fax Transmission Journal Export, Fax Reception Journal
Export, and Scan Log Export, and up to 10,000 logs in Messages Log Export. The oldest logs are deleted when the
number of logs exceeds the maximum limit.
Item name Description
1 Print Job Log Export You can erase print logs or export (download) them in a file.
Create New File & Clear Log — Creates a file according to the file format of
the export data. Erases logs after a file has been created. You can display or
download by clicking the created file.
Clear Log — Erases logs.
Create New File — Creates a file according to the file format of the export
data.
You can display or download by clicking the created file.
2 Fax Transmission Journal
Export
You can erase the transmission journal or export (download) it to a file.
Create New File & Clear Log — Creates a file according to the file format of
the export data. Erases logs after a file has been created. You can display or
download by clicking the created file.
Clear Log — Erases logs.
Create New File — Creates a file according to the file format of the export
data.
You can display or download by clicking the created file.
2
1
3
4
5
6
4.[Logs]
[Logs] Overview 41
[Logs]
3 Fax Reception Journal Export You can erase the reception journal or export (download) it to a file.
Create New File & Clear Log — Creates a file according to the file format of
the export data. Erases logs after a file has been created. You can display or
download by clicking the created file.
Clear Log — Erases logs.
Create New File — Creates a file according to the file format of the export
data.
You can display or download by clicking the created file.
4 Scan Log Export You can erase scan logs or export (download) them in a file.
Create New File & Clear Log — Creates a file according to the file format of
the export data. Erases logs after a file has been created. You can display or
download by clicking the created file.
Clear Log — Erases logs.
Create New File — Creates a file according to the file format of the export
data.
You can display or download by clicking the created file.
5 Application Log Export You can erase application logs or export (download) them in a file.
Create New File & Clear Log — Creates a file according to the file format of
the export data. Erases logs after a file has been created. You can display or
download by clicking the created file.
Clear Log — Erases logs.
Create New File — Creates a file according to the file format of the export
data.
You can display or download by clicking the created file.
6 Messages Log Export You can erase message logs or export (download) them in a file.
Create New File & Clear Log — Creates a file according to the file format of
the export data. Erases logs after a file has been created. You can display or
download by clicking the created file.
Clear Log — Erases logs.
Create New File — Creates a file according to the file format of the export
data.
You can display or download by clicking the created file.
Item name Description
4.[Logs]
42 [Logs] Overview
[Log Settings] Item list <access policy mode>
Displays only when you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator or display privileges in the
access policy mode.
Log Authentication
You can specify whether or not to use log authentication.
Log size
Log size displays the log size.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves log authentication settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Enable Log Authentication Enables log authentication.
When log authentication is enabled, the log display for users will be restricted
according to access policies.
Enable — Enables log authentication. Display will be restricted according
to access policies.
Disable — Disables log authentication. Logs for all users will be displayed.
Item name Description
1 Print Log Displays the log size of print jobs.
2 Transmission Journal Displays the log size of transmission journals.
3 Reception Journal Displays the log size of reception journals.
4 Scan Log Displays the log size of scan jobs.
5 Message Log Displays the log size of message logs.
6 Application Log Displays the log size of Application Logs.
1
3
2
2
1
3
4
5
6
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview....................................................................................................44
Public Home.........................................................................................................................................................44
Public Theme Settings.........................................................................................................................................44
Public Home Settings ..........................................................................................................................................44
[Address Book] Item list.......................................................................................................................................44
[Inbound FAX routing] Item list ...........................................................................................................................55
44 [Registration] Overview
0.[Registration] Overview
You can register templates, the address book, and inbound fax routing.
Public Home
General users can set [Public Home] under [Registration] only if they are allowed at [Home Setting].
P.115 “Home Setting”
For [Public Home], see the reference below:
P.305 “Public Home”
Public Theme Settings
General users can set [Public Theme Settings] under [Registration] only if they are allowed at [Home Setting].
P.115 “Home Setting”
For [Public Theme Settings], see the reference below:
P.339 “Public Theme Settings”
Public Home Settings
General users can set [Public Home Settings] under [Registration] only if they are allowed at [Home Setting].
P.115 “Home Setting”
For [Public Home Settings], see the reference below:
P.340 “Public Home Settings”
[Address Book] Item list
[Address Book] screen
You can manage a contact list to be used in E-mail, Internet Fax, and fax transmissions.
Click [Contacts], [Favorite Contact], [Groups], or [Favorite Groups] to switch the display between the list of
addresses and the list of groups where contacts are assigned.
Address Book can be also managed using the touch panel. For details, see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (User) - Address - Managing contacts in address book
Contacts
Item name Description
1 [Add Address] button Allows you to add a new contact in the address book.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
2 [Search] button Allows you to search a contact from the address book.
P.52 “[Search Contact] screen”
3 Group Select a group to display in the following options or from the group name.
All Groups — Displays all the groups.
Local — Displays the local address book.
Shared — Displays the shared address book.
4 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
1
2
3
4
5 6 7 8 9 10
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 45
[Registration]
Favorite Contact
5 ID Displays the registered ID of the contact.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
6 Name Displays the name registered to the contact.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
7 Email Address Displays the E-mail address registered to the contact.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
8 Favorite This check box is selected when Email Address is set as Favorite.
9 Fax Number Displays the fax number registered to the contact.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
10 Favorite This check box is selected when Fax Number is set as Favorite.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the specified information.
2 [Reset] button Erases the specified information.
3 [Move Up]/[Move Down]
button
Changes the priority order in the list.
4 ID Displays the registered ID of the contact.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
5 Name Displays the name registered to the contact.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
6 Email Address Displays the E-mail address registered to the contact.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
7 Favorite This check box is selected when Email Address is set as Favorite.
8 Fax Number Displays the fax number registered to the contact.
9 Favorite This check box is selected when Fax Number is set as Favorite.
Item name Description
3
2
4 5 6 7 8 9
1
5.[Registration]
46 [Registration] Overview
Group
Favorite Groups
Item name Description
1 [New] button Allows you to add a new group.
P.54 “[Create Group information]/[Edit Group information] screen”
2 ID Displays the registered ID of the group.
P.54 “[Create Group information]/[Edit Group information] screen”
3 Group Name Displays the registered name of the group.
P.54 “[Create Group information]/[Edit Group information] screen”
4 Contacts Displays how many address books are registered in the group.
5 Favorite This check box is selected when Group is set as Favorite.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the specified information.
2 [Reset] button Erases the specified information.
3 [Move Up]/[Move Down]
button
Changes the priority order in the list.
4 ID Displays the registered ID of the group.
P.54 “[Create Group information]/[Edit Group information] screen”
5 Group Name Displays the registered name of the group.
P.54 “[Create Group information]/[Edit Group information] screen”
6 Contacts Displays how many address books are registered in the group.
7 Favorite This check box is selected when Group is set as Favorite.
1
2 3 4 5
2
3
4 5 6 7
1
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 47
[Registration]
Shared Setting
If you have selected [Use Common Settings] on the [MFP Collaboration] > [Shared Address Book] screen, you cannot
add and delete the secondary MFPs on this screen.
P.227 “Shared Address Book”
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Shared Address Book Select whether this equipment should act as a primary or secondary MFP
when managing the Shared Address Book in sync with other MFPs.
Disable — Does not synchronize.
Enable (Primary) — Synchronizes as a primary MFP.
Enable (Secondary) — Synchronizes as a secondary MFP.
Select one MFP from among MFPs and select [Enable (Primary)] on it. Be sure
to select [Enable (Secondary)] on other MFPs. As a result, the Address Book of
the primary MFP can be shared on the secondary MFPs.
4 Connection Timeout Enter the timeout time to stop communicating if you cannot connect to the
primary or secondary MFP. You can set 1 to 180 seconds.
5 [Add] button Adds a new secondary MFP.
Enter the IP address or host name for the target secondary MFP in the input
box below, and then click the [Add] button to register. You can register up to
10 MFPs.
6 [Delete] button Deletes the selected MFP from the list of secondary MFPs.
7 [Sync All] button Synchronizes all the secondary MFPs with the primary MFP to share the
Address Book.
8 Input box Enter the IP address or host name when registering a secondary MFP.
9 Server Address Shows the IP address of the added secondary MFP.
10 [TopAccess] button Starts TopAccess.
11 [Sync] button Synchronizes the secondary MFP with the primary MFP to share the Address
Book.
12 Last Update Displays the previous update time.
3
5
6
7
4
8
1 2
9 10 11 12
5.[Registration]
48 [Registration] Overview
Import
You can import address information exported from an address book on another equipment or a different address
book program in the CSV or XML format.
The importing method of address book data is either adding imported data to the address book already registered in
this equipment or deleting all the address book data already registered and replacing them with the imported data. It
is recommended that you export an address book in the CSV or XML format and edit it when creating address book
data.
You cannot import an address book when it exceeds the number of characters specified for each item or it includes
invalid characters.
Last Name: 32 characters
First Name: 32 characters
Index: 64 characters
Email Address: 192 alphanumerical characters
Phone Number: 128 numbers
Tel Number 2: 128 numbers
Company: 128 characters
Department: 128 characters
Keyword: 256 characters
SUB: 20 characters
SID: 20 characters
SEP: 20 characters
PWD: 20 characters
The group data may not be included depending on the imported address book data.
Item name Description
1 Import Method Specify the import method of the address book.
Addition — Select this to append the imported information to the existing
data.
Overwrite
— Select this to replace the existing data with the imported
information.
2 Address Book Type Specify “Local” or “Shared” as the import target when using the Shared
Address Book function.
3 Favorite Specify whether or not to enable Favorite information. The default is [Enable].
4 File Name Select the address book file to be imported.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the address book file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected address book file.
4
1
2
3
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 49
[Registration]
Export
The group data may not be included depending on the exported address book data.
Item name Description
1 File Name Displays the file name of the created export files.
Click a file name to download.
2 File Size Displays the file size of the created export files.
3 Date Created Displays the created date of the export files.
4 Export Data Format Select the file format of the export file.
CSV
— Select this to create the file in the CSV format.
XML — Select this to create the file in the XML format.
5 Address Book Type Specify “Local” or “Shared” as the export source when using the Shared
Address Book function.
6 Favorite Specify whether or not to enable Favorite information. The default is [Enable].
7 [Create New File] button Creates the export file.
If you previously exported address book data, the exported file link and
information are displayed in the Address Book area. You can click the link to
save the previously exported file.
2
1
3
4
5
7
6
5.[Registration]
50 [Registration] Overview
[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information] screen
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels adding or editing a contract.
3 [Reset] button Erases information entered in the given box.
4 [Delete] button Deletes the displayed contact.
5 [Fax Setting] button Registers the contact for fax transmission.
P.51 “[Fax Setting] screen”
6 Destination Select Local Address Book or Shared Address Book as the registration target
for contact information.
This is only available when [Shared Setting] > [Shared Address Book] is set to
[Enable (Primary)] or [Enable (Secondary)].
7 First Name Enter the first name of the contact. You can enter up to 32 characters. Invalid
characters are replaced with “!”.
8 Last Name Enter the last name of the contact. You can enter up to 32 characters. Invalid
characters are replaced with “!”.
9 Index Enter the characters to be used as the index. You can enter up to 64
characters.
10 Email Address Enter the E-mail address of the contact. You can enter up to 192 characters.
Select [Favorite] to specify the contact as Favorite.
11 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the contact. You can enter up to 128 characters.
Select [Favorite] to specify the contact as Favorite.
12 2nd Fax Number Enter the second fax number of the contact. You can enter up to 128
characters.
13 Company Enter the company name of the contact. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Invalid characters are replaced with “!”.
14 Department Enter the department name of the contact. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Invalid characters are replaced with “!”.
15 Keyword Enter the comments on the contact. You can enter up to 256 characters.
Invalid characters are replaced with “!”.
3
6
8
9
10
7
4
5
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 51
[Registration]
You must specify either the [First Name] or [Last Name] box and either the [Email Address] or [Fax Number] box to
register the contact.
If you enter “-” in the [Fax Number] and [2nd Fax Number], a three-second pause is added for dialing the fax
number.
To perform fax transmission, the Fax Unit is required. If the Fax Unit is not installed, you cannot perform the fax
transmission even if you specify the fax number.
[Fax Setting] screen
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the fax settings.
3 [Reset] button Restores fax settings set for the contact to the default status.
4 SUB Enter the mailbox number if you want to send a fax to the contact’s fax
mailbox. You can enter up to 20 characters using numbers, #, and *.
5 SID Enter the password to send a fax to the contact’s fax mailbox. You can enter
up to 20 characters using numbers, #, and *.
6 SEP Enter the mailbox number if you want to retrieve a document from the
contact’s fax mailbox. You can enter up to 20 characters using numbers, #,
and *.
7 PWD Enter the password to retrieve a document from the contact’s fax mailbox.
You can enter up to 20 characters using numbers, #, and *.
8 ECM Select whether to enable or disable ECM (Error Correction Mode). If [ON] is
selected, it facilitates error free communications by automatically resending
any portion of the document affected by phone line noise or distortion.
9 Line Select Select whether specifying the line to be used. If this is set to [Auto], this
equipment automatically selects the line to be used. However, [Line 2] can be
applicable only when the 2nd Line for Fax Unit is installed.
10 Quality Transmit Select whether to send a document in the Quality TX mode. If [ON] is selected,
this equipment sends documents at a slower speed than normal so that the
transmission will be less affected by line condition.
11 Transmission Type Select whether the document will be sent in [Memory Transmit] mode or
[Direct Transmit] mode.
3
5
6
7
4
8
9
10
11
1
2
5.[Registration]
52 [Registration] Overview
[Search Contact] screen
You can search for contacts in the LDAP server and add them to the address book.
In order to use the LDAP search, the directory service must be set up by a user who has been granted administrator
privileges in the access policy mode. Before operating the LDAP search, ask your administrator if the Directory Service
has been configured.
If you select [MFP LOCAL] at the [Directory Service Name] box, you can search for destinations in the address book
of this equipment.
TopAccess will search for destinations that contain the text entered in each item.
Leaving the box blank allows wild-card searching. However, you must specify at least one.
Item name Description
1 [Search] button Searches contacts with the entered conditions.
P.53 “[Search Address List] screen”
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the contact search.
3 Directory Service Name Select the LDAP server for the search.
4 First Name Enter the search condition.
5 Last Name
6 Email Address
7 Fax Number
8 Company
9 Department
1
2
6
8
9
5
7
3
4
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 53
[Registration]
[Search Address List] screen
Select from the search address list and add to the address book.
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Adds the contact selected in the search address list into the address book.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the search address list display.
3 [Research] button Returns to the [Search Contact] screen to change the search criteria and
execute the search again.
4 Number of Search Result Displays the number of found contacts.
5 Check box Select contacts to be registered to the address book.
6 Name Displays the search result.
7 Email Address
8 Fax Number
1
2
6857
3
4
5.[Registration]
54 [Registration] Overview
[Create Group information]/[Edit Group information] screen
You can create groups that contain multiple recipients.
This enables you to specify a group as the destination when sending an E-mail, Internet Fax, or fax to multiple
recipients.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Registers the selected contacts as a group.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the group registration.
3 [Reset] button Resets the contents.
4 [Delete] button Deletes the displayed group.
5 Group Name Enter the group name. You can enter up to 20 characters.
6 Destination Select Local Address Book or Shared Address Book as the registration target
for Group information.
This is only available when [Shared Setting] > [Shared Address Book] is set to
[Enable (Primary)] or [Enable (Secondary)].
7 ID Displays the registered ID of the contact.
8 Email Select the check box to register E-mail address into the group when the
contact has E-mail information.
9 Fax Select the check box to register fax number into the group when the contact
has fax number information.
10 Name Displays the last name and first name registered to the contact.
11 Email Address Displays the E-mail address registered to the contact.
12 Fax Number Displays the fax number registered to the contact.
13 Favorite Select to set the group as your favorite.
6
5
4
3
113 2
7 8 9 11 1210
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 55
[Registration]
[Inbound FAX routing] Item list
ITU-T communications function between fax devices with ITU-T support and enable fax transmission to and retrieval
from mailboxes.
The type of mailboxes for ITU-T communications must be set in advance to either confidential, bulletin board, or
forward. You can specify a password on any mailbox to secure confidentiality.
Mailboxes can be managed only when the Fax Unit is installed.
The Internet/Fax (Relay) agent cannot be used to forward an inbound fax routed via Inbound FAX Routing.
Mailboxes can be managed using the touch panel. For details, see the reference below:
Fax - USING THE FAX UNIT (USEFUL FUNCTIONS) - Using the Mailbox Function - Creating, modifying, and
deleting a mailbox (mailbox transmission)
[Inbound FAX routing] screen
You can manage mailboxes used for ITU-T communications.
To carry out ITU-T communications, you must first set up an Open Mailbox in the mailbox hub. You can set up a
maximum of 300 mailboxes.
You can also delete mailboxes.
If you want to delete an Open Mailbox, the document must first be retrieved, printed, or canceled from the Open
Mailbox.
Item name Description
1 [New] button Creates a mailbox for F-code communications.
P.56 “[MailBoxes Properties] screen”
2 Box Number Displays the registered mailbox number.
3 User Name Displays the user name of the registered mailbox.
4 Agent Displays the agent assigned to the mailbox.
5 Comment Displays the registered comment.
1
2 3 4 5
5.[Registration]
56 [Registration] Overview
[MailBoxes Properties] screen
You can set a mailbox.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the mailbox.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the mailbox settings.
3 [Select Agent] button Set the agent to apply to the forward mailbox.
4 Confidential Creates a confident mailbox.
The Confidential Box allows a one-time document retrieval from the mailbox.
Once a document is retrieved, it is cleared. If a new document is sent to the
same box number where another document is stored, it is added to the
existing box.
P.57 “MailBox Setting (Mailbox)”
5 Bulletin Board Creates a bulletin board mailbox.
The Bulletin Board Box allows multiple document retrievals from the same
mailbox. Once a document is retrieved, it is not cleared. If a new document is
sent to the same Box, it replaces the existing one.
P.57 “MailBox Setting (Mailbox)”
6 Forward Creates a multiple transmission relay mailbox. When you select this, select
the agent from [Internet/Fax(Relay)], [Save as file], [Email], or [Store to
e-Filing].
Use the forward mailbox when you want to forward a fax document to
specified destinations automatically.
7 Internet/Fax(Relay) Creates a multiple transmission relay mailbox for the Internet Fax or fax. This
agent can be combined with the Save as file agent or Store to e-Filing agent.
P.57 “MailBox Setting (Mailbox)”
P.59 “Destination Setting (Mailbox)”
P.59 “InternetFax Setting (Mailbox)”
P.59 “Relay End Terminal Report (Mailbox)”
The Internet/Fax (Relay) agent cannot be used to forward an inbound fax
routed via Inbound FAX Routing.
8 Save as file Creates a shared folder forwarding mailbox. This agent can be combined with
the Internet/Fax(Relay), Email, or Store to e-Filing agent.
P.57 “MailBox Setting (Mailbox)”
P.60 “Save as file Setting (Mailbox)”
9 Email Creates an E-mail forwarding mailbox. This agent can be combined with the
Save as file agent or Store to e-Filing agent.
P.57 “MailBox Setting (Mailbox)”
P.60 “Email Setting (Mailbox)”
3
1 2
456 78910
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 57
[Registration]
MailBox Setting (Mailbox)
When you create a new mailbox, the setting page appears after you have set the agent. Click [MailBox Setting] to open
the setting window and continue the operation.
You can edit or delete the mailbox later.
You need to enter the password for the operation if you have set it for the mailbox.
In the MailBox Setting page, specify the general information of the mailbox such as the box number, password, owner,
comment, and notification.
The [Notification] and [Document Print] options are not available when creating the Confidential mailbox or
Bulletin Board mailbox.
Mailbox communication is disabled if the settings on this equipment and information registered for the destination
do not match. Check how the box number and the fax number of the destination are registered on the journal
before entering the box number.
10 Store to e-Filing Creates an e-Filing forwarding mailbox. This agent can be combined with the
Internet/Fax(Relay) agent, Save as file agent, or Email agent.
P.57 “MailBox Setting (Mailbox)”
P.60 “Box Setting (Mailbox)”
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings for the mailbox.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the setting operation.
Item name Description
6
8
5
7
3
4
1 2
5.[Registration]
58 [Registration] Overview
3 Box Number Enter the box number of the mailbox. You can enter up to 20 characters
including numbers, sharp marks (#), and asterisks (*).
You can also specify the sender’s fax number to enable the Inbound Fax
routing when registering a Forward mailbox. If you specify the sender’s fax
number here, the faxes that are received from the specified fax number will be
routed according to the mailbox settings.
The Inbound Fax routing is available only for a Forward mailbox. If you
select [Confidential] or [Bulletin Board] as an agent, you cannot specify the
fax number.
When a fax is sent from the specified fax number with a box number (or sub
address), the Inbound Fax routing will not apply to the transmission and it is
processed according to the specified box number (or sub address) settings.
If you create a forward mailbox whose number is the fax number of the
sender, you can use the TSI function. Using this function, this equipment
forwards the original sent from the sender whose fax number is set to the
mailbox number, based on the pre-set agent (Save as File / Email / Store to e-
Filing).
4 Password Enter the box password if you want to protect the mailbox by the password.
You can enter up to 20 characters including numbers, sharp marks (#), and
asterisks (*).
5 User Name Enter the user name of this mailbox. You can enter up to 30 characters.
6 Comment Enter the comment. You can enter up to 30 characters.
7 Notification This specifies how the notification message will be sent if an error occurs.
Send Email when an error occurs — Transmits a notification message to the
specified E-mail address when an error occurs.
Send Email when job is completed — Transmits a notification message to
the specified E-mail address when a job is completed.
Email Address — Enter the E-mail address for the notification messages. You
can enter up to 192 alphanumerical characters.
When you enable the Notification setting, make sure to set up the E-mail
settings in the [Email] submenu of the [Setup] menu in the TopAccess access
policy mode.
P.195 “Email settings”
8 Document Print Select whether to print a document sent to this mailbox.
Always — Always prints documents sent to this mailbox.
ON ERROR — Prints the document if all specified forwarding has failed.
Item name Description
5.[Registration]
[Registration] Overview 59
[Registration]
Destination Setting (Mailbox)
In the Recipient List page, you can specify the destinations of the Internet/Fax (Relay), or Email agent.
When you are setting up the destinations for the Email agent, you can only specify the E-mail addresses for the
destinations.
When you are setting up the destinations for the Internet/Fax (Relay) agent, you can specify both fax numbers and E-
mail addresses for the destinations.
You can specify the destinations by entering their E-mail addresses or fax numbers manually, selecting recipients from
the address book, selecting destination groups from the address book, or searching for destinations in the LDAP
server.
The methods of entering the destinations manually and searching for the destinations in the LDAP server are not
available if you are setting the destination for the Internet/Fax (Relay) agent.
Operations are the same as the following procedure.
P.312 “Destination Setting”
InternetFax Setting (Mailbox)
In the InternetFax Setting page, you can specify the content of the Internet Fax to be sent.
Operations are the same as the following procedure.
P.317 “InternetFax Setting”
Relay End Terminal Report (Mailbox)
On the Relay End Terminal Report page, you can specify a destination to which the transmission result list will be sent.
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Adds settings to transmit the relay end terminal report.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 [Reset] button Resets the settings.
4 Destination Enter the E-mail address or fax number of the recipient.
5 Fax Type When the fax number is entered, select [G3 Fax] in the [Fax Type] box. When
the E-mail address is entered, select [InternetFax] in the [Fax Type] box.
6 Recipient list Displays the registered destinations. Select the E-mail address or fax number
of the destination.
6
5
3
4
1 2
5.[Registration]
60 [Registration] Overview
You cannot specify more than 1 destination for the destination of the Relay End Terminal Report.
Save as file Setting (Mailbox)
In the Save as file Setting page, you can specify how and where a received fax will be stored.
Instructions on how to do the Save as file setting for the mailbox are the same as for the Save as file setting for a
template.
Operations are the same as the following procedure.
P.324 “Save as file Setting”
You cannot specify USB media as the storage in the Save as file Setting Page.
Email Setting (Mailbox)
In the Email Settings page, you can specify the content of E-mail document to be sent.
Instructions on how to do the E-mail setting for the mailbox are the same as for the E-mail setting for a template.
Operations are the same as the following procedure.
P.321 “Email Setting”
Box Setting (Mailbox)
In the Box Setting page, you can specify how a received fax will be stored in the Box.
Operations are the same as the following procedure.
P.329 “Box Setting”
6.[Counter]
[Counter] Overview ..........................................................................................................62
[Counter] Item list................................................................................................................................................62
62 [Counter] Overview
0.[Counter] Overview
You can check the number of pages printed, copied, and scanned on the [Counter] page.
[Counter] Item list
[Total Counter] screen
You can display total counters of the print counter and scan counter, and total counters for small size and large size
paper.
Neither an end user nor an administrator can reset counters from TopAccess. However, users who are granted
administrator privileges in the access policy mode can reset the counter from the touch panel. For details, see the
reference below:
User Functions - MANAGING COUNTERS (COUNTER MENU) - Department Management
Because of paper jam and job cancellation, the total counter value might not be equal to the total number of pages
in the print log.
The total counter value might not be equal to the total number of pages in the print log, depending on the
operating system you use.
The total counter value might not be equal to the total values of other counters, depending on the counter settings.
Color models
1
5
2
3
4
6
6.[Counter]
[Counter] Overview 63
[Counter]
Monochromatic models
Counter type Description
1 Print Counter Displays the total output count value.
2 Detail
Displays details of the total output count value when you click [ ].
3 Scan Counter Displays the total scanned count value.
4 Detail Displays details of the total count value of scanned documents when you click
[].
5 Sheet Counter Displays the number of printed sheets according to the function being used.
Values are displayed according to the paper size set on your equipment. This
counter increments by 1 for either single or dual-sided copying.
6 OCR Counter Displays the number of images to which an OCR process has been performed.
1
2
5
3
4
6
6.[Counter]
64 [Counter] Overview
Print Counter/Print Counter (Detail)
Scan Counter/Scan Counter (Detail)
Counter Description
1 Copy Counter Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations for paper sizes set
on your equipment.
2 Fax Counter Displays the number of pages printed by fax reception for paper sizes set on
your equipment.
3 Printer Counter Displays the number of pages printed by print operations and E-mail
reception (Internet Fax reception) for paper sizes set on your equipment.
4 List Counter Displays the number of pages printed by system page print operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Counter Description
1 Copy Counter Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations for paper sizes set
on your equipment.
2 Fax Counter Displays the number of pages printed by fax reception for paper sizes set on
your equipment.
3 Network Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations for paper sizes set
on your equipment.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
6.[Counter]
[Counter] Overview 65
[Counter]
[Department Counter] screen
Displays 20 items of total counter information for each department per page.
[Department Counter] screen <access policy mode>
Item name Description
1 Department Code Enter the department code which you want to check and click the [Enter]
button.
2 Number Displays the registered department number.
3 Department Name Displays the department name.
Click a department name link to check the information.
P.66 “[Department Information] screen”
4 Dept Code Displays the department code.
5 Total Printing Displays the total output count value of the department.
6 Total Scanning Displays the total scanned count value of the department.
7 Fax Transmission Displays the total number of transmitted fax pages of the department.
8 Fax Reception Displays the total number of received fax pages of the department.
Item name Description
1 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more. Click [All] to
show all department counters on a page.
2 Number Displays the registered department number.
3 Department Name Displays the department name.
Click a department name link to check the information.
P.66 “[Department Information] screen”
4 Dept Code Displays the department code.
5 Total Printing Displays the total output count value of the department.
6 Total Scanning Displays the total scanned count value of the department.
7 Fax Transmission Displays the number of pages transmitted via fax.
8 Fax Reception Displays the number of pages received via fax.
1
23 45 6 7 8
1
23 45678
6.[Counter]
66 [Counter] Overview
[Department Information] screen
Color models
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6.[Counter]
[Counter] Overview 67
[Counter]
Monochromatic models
Item name Description
1 [Close] button Closes the [Department Information] screen.
2 Department Number Displays the registered department number.
3 Department Name Displays the department name.
4 Department Code Displays the department code.
5 Quota Setting
OFF — No output restriction.
ON — Restricts output.
Quota Displays the remaining number for output.
Default Quota Displays the default number assigned for the user.
6 Print Counter Displays the output total count value.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
6.[Counter]
68 [Counter] Overview
7 Detail
Displays details of the total output count value when you click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by fax reception for paper
sizes set on your equipment.
Printer Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by print operations
and E-mail reception (Internet Fax reception) for paper sizes set on your
equipment.
List Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by system page print
operations for paper sizes set on your equipment.
8 Scan Counter Displays the total count value of scanned documents.
9 Detail Displays details of the total count value of scanned documents when you
click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by fax reception for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Network Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations
for paper sizes set on your equipment.
10 Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record.
11 Sheet Counter Displays the number of printed sheets according to the function being used.
Values are displayed according to the paper size set on your equipment. This
counter increments by 1 for either single or dual-sided copying.
12 OCR Counter Displays the number of images to which an OCR process has been performed.
Item name Description
6.[Counter]
[Counter] Overview 69
[Counter]
[User Counter] screen <access policy mode>
This screen displays total counter information for each user who is logged in to TopAccess.
Total counters for all users are displayed when you are logged in as the Administrator.
Item name Description
1 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 20 items or more.
2 Number Displays the registered user number.
3 User Name Displays the user name.
Click a user name to check the information.
P.70 “[User Information] screen <access policy mode>”
4 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account.
5 Total Printing Displays the total output count value.
6 Total Scanning Displays the total scanned count value.
7 Fax Transmission Displays the number of pages transmitted via fax.
8 Fax Reception Displays the number of pages received via fax.
1
23 4 5 6 7
8
6.[Counter]
70 [Counter] Overview
[User Information] screen <access policy mode>
Color models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
12
13
14
16
17
15
18
6.[Counter]
[Counter] Overview 71
[Counter]
Monochromatic models
Item name Description
1 [Close] button Closes the [User Information] screen.
2 User Name Displays the user name.
3 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the registered domain name or LDAP server.
4 Authentication Method Displays the user authentication method.
5 Password You cannot display the password.
Reset the password in the [User Accounts] item when changing the password.
P.79 “[Enter Password] screen”
6 Role Assignment Displays the registered roles.
7 Group Assignment Displays the registered groups.
8 Department Number Displays the registered departments.
9 PanelUI Language Displays the registered display languages of the touch panel.
10 PanelUI Keyboard Layout Displays the registered keyboard patterns for the touch panel.
11 Quota Setting
OFF — No output restriction.
ON — Restricts output.
Quota Displays the remaining number for output.
Default Quota Displays the default number assigned for the user.
12 Print Counter Displays the output total count value.
12
13
14
16
17
15
18
6.[Counter]
72 [Counter] Overview
13 Detail
Displays details of the total output count value when you click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by fax reception for paper
sizes set on your equipment.
Printer Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by print operations
and E-mail reception (Internet Fax reception) for paper sizes set on your
equipment.
List Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by system page print
operations for paper sizes set on your equipment.
14 Scan Counter Displays the total count value of scanned documents.
15 Detail Displays details of the total count value of scanned documents when you
click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by fax reception for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Network Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations
for paper sizes set on your equipment.
16 Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record.
17 Sheet Counter Displays the number of printed sheets according to the function being used.
Values are displayed according to the paper size set on your equipment. This
counter increments by 1 for either single or dual-sided copying.
18 OCR Counter Displays the number of images to which an OCR process has been performed.
Item name Description
6.[Counter]
[Counter] Overview 73
[Counter]
[Quota Setting] screen <access policy mode>
You can make the quota management settings based on either a print count or a job. In job-based quota
management, different weights can be assigned to each job when the number of outputs is counted.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the quota settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Black/Color Quota Performs quota management based on the number of black and color
outputs.
[Black Quota] is displayed in monochrome models, which performs quota management with the number of
black outputs.
4 Job Quota Assigns weights to each job and calculates the sum total quotas of the print
jobs and scan jobs for quota management.
Different weights can be assigned to each of the jobs listed below.
Print
- Small Full Color
- Large Full Color
- Small Twin/Mono Color
- Large Twin/Mono Color
-Small Black
- Large Black
Scan
-Color
-Black
Quota Near Empty Limitation
Sets the threshold to give notice of nearly reaching the quota.
In monochrome models, only the weight assigned to Small Black or Large
Black can be changed.
When assigning the weight to a job, you can enter a value in the range from
0.00 to 99.99. The default value of the print is “1.00” and that of the scan is
“0.00”. For example, assuming that the weight assigned to Small Black in
print is 0.50, if the user makes 2 outputs in Small Black, the quota value
assigned to the user is decremented by 1.00.
1 2
3
4
6.[Counter]
74 [Counter] Overview
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview ...........................................................................................76
[User Accounts] Item list <access policy mode> ................................................................................................76
[Group Management] Item list <access policy mode>.......................................................................................84
[Role Management] Item list <access policy mode>..........................................................................................86
[Department Management] Item list <access policy mode> .............................................................................92
[Project Management] Item list <access policy mode> .....................................................................................96
[Export/Import] Item list <access policy mode> ................................................................................................97
[Shared Settings] Item list <access policy mode>..............................................................................................99
76 [User Management] Overview
0.[User Management] Overview
[User Accounts] Item list <access policy mode>
You can search and set user accounts if you are logged in to the access policy mode.
Item name Description
1 [Search] button Searches registered users.
P.77 “[Search User Account] screen”
2 [New] button Registers new users.
P.77 “[Create User Information] screen”
3 [Delete] button Deletes the user selected in the user account list.
However, you cannot delete the default users.
4 [Delete All] button Deletes all registered users. (Except default users)
5 [Delete All Cache] button Select this to delete all the authentication information to be used when an
authentication server failure occurs.
6 [Unlock] button Unlocks a locked user selected in the user account list.
7 [Reset Password] button Resets the password of the user selected in the user account list.
P.79 “[Enter Password] screen”
8 [Delete Fingerprint] button Contact your service technician for details.
9 [Delete All Fingerprint] button Contact your service technician for details.
10 [Set Registered Quota] button Initializes the registered quota for the user selected in the user account list.
11 [Set Registered All Quotas]
button
Initializes quotas for all users.
12 [Reset Counters] button Resets counters for the user selected in the user account list.
13 [Reset All Counters] button Resets counters for all departments.
14 Number Displays the registration number of the user.
10001 to 10009 are assigned to default users.
15 User Name Displays the user name.
Undefined, Admin, Service, Auditor, Faxope, Guest, Printope, Remote-access-
service, and IdleScreenPrint are default users.
You can check the user information by clicking the user name.
P.80 “[Edit User Information] screen”
16 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server registered in the user information.
17 Department Number Displays the department number registered in the user information.
18 Status Displays the user status.
19 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
1
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14 15 16 17 18
2
19
8
9
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 77
[User Management]
[Search User Account] screen
You can search registered users.
Select items to be searched and enter or select the search conditions.
[Create User Information] screen
You can register new user information.
Item name Description
1 Number Enter the user number you want to search.
The search condition should be in the range from 1 to 10000.
2 Department Number Select the department number you want to search.
3 User Name Enter the user name you want to search.
A prefix search is performed with the entered character string.
4 Domain Name/LDAP Server Enter the domain name or LDAP server you want to search.
5 [Search] button Searches contacts with the entered and selected conditions.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered user information.
1
3
4
5
2
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
7.[User Management]
78 [User Management] Overview
2 [Cancel] button Cancels creating user information.
3 User Name Enter the user name.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols (except the
following: " * + , / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] | space).
4 Local User which is available
in Windows Domain
Authentication/LDAP
Authentication
Select this to register as a local user who can log in with MFP Local
Authentication using the cache information for an MFP managed with
external authentication.
The above setting is available only when the [Local User which is available in
Windows Domain Authentication/LDAP Authentication] checkbox is selected.
P.251 “Windows Domain Authentication”
P.254 “LDAP Authentication”
5 Register as External
Cooperation User
Contact your service technician for details.
6 Domain Name/LDAP Server Select the domain name or LDAP server.
7 Authentication Method Select the user authentication method.
MFP Local Authentication — Use MFP local authentication on your
equipment.
Windows Domain Authentication — Use network authentication
managed by the Windows domain.
LDAP Authentication — Use network authentication managed by LDAP.
8 Password Enter the password. You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and
symbols (! # ( ) * + , - . / : ; = ? @ $ ^ _ ` { | } ~ \ space).
9 PIN Code Enter the PIN code for the user authentication.
The PIN code is up to 32 figures (0 - 9) long. The minimum length is specified
on [User Authentication Setting].
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
If you change any settings, the changes will be reflected from the next time
you log in.
When you use the PIN code for the Windows domain authentication or
LDAP authentication, the unique PIN code should be assigned for all users.
10 Card Information Enter the information necessary for card authentication.
11 Role Assignment This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Select from the registered roles. Click the [Edit] button and select roles from
the displayed screen.
P.83 “[Role Assignment] screen”
12 Group Assignment This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Select from the registered groups. Click the [Edit] button and select groups
from the displayed screen.
P.84 “[Group Assignment] screen”
13 Email Address This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Enter the Email address of the user or select it from the address book. You can
enter up to 192 half-width alphanumerical characters and symbols.
Item name Description
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 79
[User Management]
[Enter Password] screen
You can display the [Enter Password] screen by selecting the check box of the user whose password you want to
change in the [User Accounts] item list and clicking the [Reset Password] button.
14 Home Directory This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Enter the network path to the home directory. You can enter up to 128 half-
width alphanumerical characters and symbols.
For example, enter “\192.168.1.1\users\name” to specify the folder called
“users\name” on the computer whose server address is “192.168.1.1”.
15 Department Number Select from the registered departments.
P.92 “[Department Management] Item list <access policy mode>”
16 PanelUI Language Select the display language for the touch panel.
17 PanelUI Keyboard Display Select whether to display the soft-keyboard when entering characters with
the touch panel.
18 PanelUI Keyboard Layout Select the keyboard pattern displayed on the touch panel.
19 Quota Setting Select this to perform the quota setting of the department according to the
setting specified at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page.
OFF — Not performed
ON — Performed
P.73 “[Quota Setting] screen <access policy mode>”
Quota Displays the quota amount. This value decreases according to the weight set
at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, and output is restricted when the
value becomes 0.00. The quota can be manually modified to any amount.
Default Quota Enter the default amount to assign to the department.
When [Black/Color Quota] or [Black Quota] is set at [Quota Setting] on the
[Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999. When [Job Quota] is set at
[Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999.99.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the entered password.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the password change.
3 Password Enter the new password.
Item name Description
1
3
2
7.[User Management]
80 [User Management] Overview
[Edit User Information] screen
You can update registered user information.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered user information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels changing user information.
4
5
12
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
27
26
25
3
6
7
1 2
28
21
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 81
[User Management]
3 [Reset Counters] button Resets counters.
4 [Delete] button Deletes the displayed user from the user account.
5 User Name Displays the user name.
If you change any settings, the changes will be reflected from the next time
you log in.
6 Local User which is available
in Windows Domain
Authentication/LDAP
Authentication
Select this to register as a local user who can log in with MFP Local
Authentication using the cache information for an MFP managed with
external authentication.
The above setting is available only when the [Local User which is available in
Windows Domain Authentication/LDAP Authentication] checkbox is selected.
P.251 “Windows Domain Authentication”
P.254 “LDAP Authentication”
7 Register as External
Cooperation User
Contact your service technician for details.
8 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the registered domain name or LDAP server. Select this item if you
want to change.
You can select this item only when the authentication method is [Windows
Domain Authentication] or [LDAP Authentication].
9 Authentication Method Displays the user authentication method.
MFP Local Authentication — Use MFP local authentication on your
equipment.
Windows Domain Authentication — Use network authentication
managed by the Windows domain.
LDAP Authentication — Use network authentication managed by LDAP.
10 Password You can change the password only when the authentication method is [MFP
Local Authentication].
If you change any settings, the changes will be reflected from the next time
you log in.
11 PIN Code Displays the PIN code for the user authentication. You can set this item only
when the authentication method is [MFP Local Authentication].
The PIN code is up to 32 figures (0 - 9) long. The minimum length is specified
on [User Authentication Setting].
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
If you change any settings, the changes will be reflected from the next time
you log in.
When you use the PIN code for the Windows domain authentication or
LDAP authentication, the unique PIN code should be assigned for all users.
12 Card Information Enter the information necessary for card authentication.
Item name Description
7.[User Management]
82 [User Management] Overview
13 Role Assignment This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Displays the registered roles. Click the [Edit] button and select roles from the
displayed screen.
P.83 “[Role Assignment] screen”
If you change any settings, the changes will be reflected from the next time
you log in.
14 Group Assignment This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Displays the registered groups. Click the [Edit] button and select groups from
the displayed screen.
P.84 “[Group Assignment] screen”
If you change any settings, the changes will be reflected from the next time
you log in.
15 Email Address This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Enter the Email address of the user or select it from the address book. You can
enter up to 192 half-width alphanumerical characters and symbols.
16 Home Directory This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Enter the network path to the home directory. You can enter up to 128 half-
width alphanumerical characters and symbols.
For example, enter “\192.168.1.1\users\name” to specify the folder called
“users\name” on the computer whose server address is “192.168.1.1”.
17 Department Number Displays the registered departments. Select this item if you want to change.
P.92 “[Department Management] Item list <access policy mode>”
18 PanelUI Language Displays the registered display languages of the touch panel. Select this item
if you want to change.
19 PanelUI Keyboard Display Select whether to display the soft-keyboard when entering characters with
the touch panel.
20 PanelUI Keyboard Layout Displays the registered keyboard patterns for the touch panel. Select this
item if you want to change.
21 Quota Setting Select this to perform the quota setting of the department according to the
setting specified at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page.
OFF — Not performed
ON — Performed
P.73 “[Quota Setting] screen <access policy mode>”
Quota Displays the quota amount. This value decreases according to the weight set
at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, and output is restricted when the
value becomes 0.00. The quota can be manually modified to any amount.
Default Quota Enter the default amount to assign to the department.
When [Black/Color Quota] or [Black Quota] is set at [Quota Setting] on the
[Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999. When [Job Quota] is set at
[Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999.99.
22 Print Counter Displays the output total count value.
Item name Description
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 83
[User Management]
[Role Assignment] screen
You can select roles to be assigned.
23 Detail
Displays details of the total output count value when you click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by fax reception for paper
sizes set on your equipment.
Printer Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by print operations
and E-mail reception (Internet Fax reception) for paper sizes set on your
equipment.
List Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by system page print
operations for paper sizes set on your equipment.
24 Scan Counter Displays the total count value of scanned documents.
25 Detail Displays details of the total count value of scanned documents when you
click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by fax reception for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Network Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations
for paper sizes set on your equipment.
26 Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record.
27 Sheet Counter Displays the number of printed sheets according to the function being used.
Values for the small size and large size are displayed according to the paper
size specified on your equipment. This counter increments by 1 for either
single or dual-sided copying.
28 OCR Counter Displays the number of images to which an OCR process has been performed.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the assigned roles.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels assigning roles.
3 Available Role Displays a list of registered roles.
Select the role to be assigned and click the [Add] button.
4 Assigned Role Displays a list of the assigned roles.
Select the role to be removed from the assignment and click the [Delete]
button.
Item name Description
3
4
1 2
7.[User Management]
84 [User Management] Overview
[Group Assignment] screen
You can select groups to be assigned.
[Group Management] Item list <access policy mode>
You can manage the registered roles as groups if you are logged in to the access policy mode.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the assigned groups.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels assigning groups.
3 Available Group Displays a list of registered groups.
Select the group to be assigned and click the [Add] button.
4 Assigned Group Displays a list of the assigned groups.
Select the group to be removed from the assignment and click the [Delete]
button.
Item name Description
1 [New] button Allows you to add a new group.
P.85 “[Create Group Information] screen”
2 [Delete] button Deletes the group selected in the group list.
3 [Delete All] button Deletes all groups.
4 Group Name Displays the group name.
You check group information by clicking the group name.
P.85 “[Edit Group Information] screen”
3
4
1 2
1
3
4
2
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 85
[User Management]
[Create Group Information] screen
You can register new groups.
[Edit Group Information] screen
You can check roles registered to the group.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered group information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels creating group information.
3 Group Name Enter the group name.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than “, ‘
(back quote), (, ), *, +, /, :, ; (semicolon), <, =, >, ?, [, \, ], ’ (apostrophe), {, |, }, ~,
and , (comma).
4 Role Assignment You can select roles to be assigned to the group. Click the [Edit] button and
select roles from the displayed screen.
P.83 “[Role Assignment] screen”
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered group information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels changing group information.
3 Group Name Displays the group name.
4 Role Assignment Displays the roles assigned to the group. Click the [Edit] button and select
roles from the displayed screen.
P.83 “[Role Assignment] screen”
3
4
1 2
3
4
1 2
7.[User Management]
86 [User Management] Overview
[Role Management] Item list <access policy mode>
You can manage and register roles if you are logged in to the access policy mode.
Item name Description
1 [New] button Allows you to add a new role.
P.89 “[Create New Role] screen”
2 [Delete] button Deletes the role selected in the role list.
However, you cannot delete the default roles.
3 Role Management Displays the role name.
For more information on default roles, see the following:
P.87 “Default roles and privileges”
You can check role information by clicking the role name.
P.91 “[Edit Role] screen”
1
2
3
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 87
[User Management]
Default roles and privileges
The following table describes privileges granted to default roles.
The functions listed in “Privileges” and “Permitted operations (functions)” below are displayed in “6 Function list” on
the [Create Role Information] screen.
P.89 “[Create New Role] screen”
Default role names Privileges Permitted operations (functions)
Administrator EWB Function EWB Access
Scan Function
*1
Store to e-Filing
Output Setting
*2
Color Print
e-Filing e-Filing Access
e-Filing Deletion
Device Setting Device Setting
User/Department Management Create, read, edit, or delete
information for user/department
management
Log Management Read
Export
Job Management Job Operation
Addressbook Management Export/Import Address Book
Create a clone file/install an address
book
AccountManager EWB Function EWB Access
User/Department Management Create, read, edit, or delete
information for user/department
management
CopyOperator Copy Function Copy Job
EWB Function EWB Access
ScanOperator EWB Function EWB Access
Scan Function Store to Local File Share
Store to Remote Server
Send Email
RemoteScan/WSScan(Pull)
Local File Share Store to Local Storage
Store to USB Device
Remote Send Email
Store to Remote Server
WS Scan(Push)
Print
Print Function
*1
Print Job
EWB Function EWB Access
PrintOperator
Print Function
*1
Print Management
EWB Function EWB Access
Output Setting
*2
Color Print
eFilingOperator EWB Function EWB Access
Scan Function
*1
Store to e-Filing
e-Filing e-Filing Access
7.[User Management]
88 [User Management] Overview
*1 Part of operations (functions) is permitted.
*2 Available only for models that support color printing.
*3 For the details of the fax received print function, contact your service technician.
ColorPrintCopyOperator Copy Function Copy Job
Color Copy
Print Function
*1
Print Job
Color Print
EWB Function EWB Access
Output Setting Color Print
FaxOperator EWB Function EWB Access
Fax/iFax Function Internet Fax Transmission
Fax Transmission
Fax Received Print
*3
Auditor EWB Function EWB Access
Log Management
*1
Read
Guest (No privilege settings) (No settings)
User Copy Function Copy Job
Color Copy
*2
Store to Local File Share
Store to Remote Server
Store to e-Filing
Print Function
*1
Print Job
Color Print
*2
Store to e-Filing
EWB Function EWB Access
Scan Function Store to Local File Share
Store to Remote Server
Send Email
Store to e-Filing
RemoteScan/WSScan(Pull)
Fax/iFax Function
*1
Internet Fax Transmission
Fax Transmission
Store to Local File Share
Store to Remote Server
Output Setting
*2
Color Print
Local File Share Store to Local Storage
Store to USB Device
Remote Send Email
Store to Remote Server
WS Scan(Push)
e-Filing e-Filing Access
Fax EWB Function EWB Access
Fax/iFax Function
*1
Internet Fax Transmission
Fax Transmission
AddressBookRemoteOperator Addressbook Management Export/Import Address Book
Create a clone file/install an address
book
Default role names Privileges Permitted operations (functions)
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 89
[User Management]
[Create New Role] screen
You can register a new role.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered role information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels creating the role.
3 Role Name Enter the role name.
You can enter up to 128 characters.
4 Base Role Select a role which is used as a base of the new role.
You can select any registered roles or default roles (CopyOperator,
ScanOperator, Print, PrintOperator, eFilingOperator,
ColorPrintCopyOperator, FaxOperator, Guest, User, Fax) as the base role.
3
4
5
6
1 2
7.[User Management]
90 [User Management] Overview
*1 The External Interface Enabler is required to use the EWB (Embedded Web Browser) function. This setting is available only for some models.
*2 Available only for models that support color printing.
5 MFP Function Allows you to select the privileges to be assigned to the role.
Copy Function Assigns all copy functions.
Copy Job Assigns the copy job function.
Print Function Assigns all print functions.
Print Job Assigns the print job function.
USB Direct Print Assigns the USB direct print function.
Print Management Assigns the print management function.
EWB Function
*1
Assigns all EWB functions.
EWB Access Assigns the EWB access function.
Scan Function Assigns all scan functions.
Remote Scan/
WSScan(Pull)
Assigns the Remote Scan or Web Services Scan function.
FAX/iFAX Function Assigns all fax/ifax functions.
Internet Fax
Transmission
Assigns all Internet Fax transmission functions.
Fax Transmission Assigns the fax transmission function.
Fax Received Print Assigns the fax/Internet Fax received print function.
Output Setting
*2
Assigns all output setting functions.
Color Print Assigns the color print function.
Local File Share Assigns all local file share functions.
Store to Local
Storage
Assigns all local file storage functions.
Store to USB Device Assigns all storage to USB device functions.
Remote Assigns all remote functions.
Send Email Assigns scan to function.
Store to Remote
Server
Assigns all storage to remote server functions.
WS Scan(Push) Assigns the WS scan (push) function.
e-Filing Assigns all e-Filing functions.
e-Filing Access Assigns the e-Filing access functions.
6 Function list Displays operations (functions) enabled/disabled by privileges assigned to the
role selected from “MFP Function”. Even if one item is selected from “MFP
Function”, more than one function may be enabled.
Example: If you select the [Send Email] check box in [Remote] from “MFP
Function”, [Send Email] in [Remote] and that in [Scan Function] on the
“Function list” will be enabled.
Item name Description
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 91
[User Management]
[Edit Role] screen
You can confirm and edit roles.
However, you cannot edit the default roles.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the edited role information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels editing the role.
3 Role Name Enter if changing the role name.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than “, ‘
(backquote), (, ), *, +, /, :, ; (semicolon), <, =, >, ?, [, \, ], ' (apostrophe), {, |, }, ~,
and , (comma).
4 MFP Function Allows you to select the MFP function to be assigned to the group. Select from
the following functions.
See the following for details:
P.89 “[Create New Role] screen”
5 Device Management Displays device management privileges assigned to default roles. (Default
roles only)
P.87 “Default roles and privileges”
6 Function list Displays functions assigned to the role.
See the following for details:
P.89 “[Create New Role] screen”
3
4
5
6
1 2
7.[User Management]
92 [User Management] Overview
[Department Management] Item list <access policy mode>
You can manage departments if you are logged in to the access policy mode.
Item name Description
1 [New] button Allows you to add a new department.
P.93 “[Department Information] screen”
2 [Reset All Department
Counters] button
Resets counters for all departments.
3 [Allocate All Department
Quotas] button
Initializes quotas for all departments.
4 [Delete All] button Deletes the registered department.
5 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 101 items or more.
6 Number Displays the registration number of the department.
7 Department Name Displays the department name.
Click a department name link to check the department management
information.
P.94 “[Edit Department Information] screen”
8 Dept Code Displays the department code.
9 Total Printing Displays the total number of printed pages of the department.
10 Total Scanning Displays the total number of scanned pages of the department.
11 Fax Transmission Displays the total number of transmitted fax pages of the department.
12 Fax Reception Displays the total number of received fax pages of the department.
1
2
3
4
5
67 98101112
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 93
[User Management]
[Department Information] screen
You can register a new department.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered department information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels creating the department information.
3 Department Name Enter the department name.
You can enter up to 20 characters.
4 Department Code Enter the department code.
You can enter up to 63 characters (except the following: ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , / : ;
< = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ~ space).
5 Quota Setting Select this to perform the quota setting of the department according to the
setting specified at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page.
OFF — Not performed
ON — Performed
P.73 “[Quota Setting] screen <access policy mode>”
Quota Displays the quota amount. This value decreases according to the weight set
at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, and output is restricted when the
value becomes 0.00. The quota can be manually modified to any amount.
Default Quota Enter the default amount to assign to the department.
When [Black/Color Quota] or [Black Quota] is set at [Quota Setting] on the
[Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999. When [Job Quota] is set at
[Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999.99.
3
4
5
5
1 2
7.[User Management]
94 [User Management] Overview
[Edit Department Information] screen
You can confirm and edit department information.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the entered department information.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels changing the department information.
3 [Reset Counters] button Resets counters.
4 [Delete] button Deletes the displayed department.
5 Department Number Displays the registration number of the department.
6 Department Name Enter if changing the department name.
You can enter up to 20 characters.
7 Department Code Enter if changing the department code.
You can enter up to 63 characters (except the following: ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , / : ;
< = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ~ space).
5
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
6
3
4
7
15
1 2
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 95
[User Management]
8 Quota Setting Select this to perform the quota setting of the department according to the
setting specified at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page.
OFF — Not performed
ON — Performed
P.73 “[Quota Setting] screen <access policy mode>”
Quota Displays the quota amount. This value decreases according to the weight set
at [Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, and output is restricted when the
value becomes 0.00. The quota can be manually modified to any amount.
Default Quota Enter the default amount to assign to the department.
When [Black/Color Quota] or [Black Quota] is set at [Quota Setting] on the
[Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999. When [Job Quota] is set at
[Quota Setting] on the [Counter] page, you can enter up to 99,999,999.99.
9 Print Counter Displays the output total count value.
10 Detail
Displays details of the total output count value when you click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by fax reception for paper
sizes set on your equipment.
Printer Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by print operations
and E-mail reception (Internet Fax reception) for paper sizes set on your
equipment.
List Counter: Displays the number of pages printed by system page print
operations for paper sizes set on your equipment.
11 Scan Counter Displays the total count value of scanned documents.
12 Detail Displays details of the total count value of scanned documents when you
click [ ].
Copy Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by copy operations for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Fax Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by fax reception for
paper sizes set on your equipment.
Network Counter: Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations
for paper sizes set on your equipment.
13 Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record.
14 Sheet Counter Displays the number of printed sheets according to the function being used.
Values for the small size and large size are displayed according to the paper
size specified on your equipment. This counter increments by 1 for either
single or dual-sided copying.
15 OCR Counter Displays the number of images to which an OCR process has been performed.
Item name Description
7.[User Management]
96 [User Management] Overview
[Project Management] Item list <access policy mode>
You can register project codes that can be assigned to jobs when you are logged in access policy mode.
[Project Management] screen
[Create Project Information]/[Edit Project Information] screen
Item name Description
1 [New] button Allows you to register a new project code.
P.96 “[Create Project Information]/[Edit Project Information] screen”
2 [Delete All] button Deletes all of the registered project codes.
3 Select Page Allows you to select a page when there are 20 items or more.
4 Number Displays the project code number.
5 Project Name Displays the project name.
6 Project Code Displays the project code.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Registers the information of the new project code.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels project code creation.
3 Project Number Enter the project code number.
4 Project Name Enter the project name.
5 Project Code Enter the project code.
1
2
3
45 6
4
5
3
1 2
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 97
[User Management]
[Export/Import] Item list <access policy mode>
You can export and import your device settings if you are logged in to the access policy mode.
Export
The exported user information must be controlled appropriately to prevent illegal access or tampering.
Item name Description
1 Select Export Information
Type
Select the information type to be exported from the following.
User Information (Small/Large Counter)
User Information
User Information(All Counter)
Combined(User Information + Role + Group)
Combined(User Information(All Counter) + Role + Group)
LDAP Role
Department Information(Small/Large Counter)
Department Information
Department Information(All Counters)
Project Code
1
2
7.[User Management]
98 [User Management] Overview
Import
2 [Create New File] button Creates the export file of the selected information type.
Item name Description
1 Select Import Information
Type
Select the information type to be imported from the following.
User Information
Combined(User Information + Role + Group)
LDAP Role
Department Code
Project Code
2 Import method Specify this item when you have selected Department Code or Project Code.
3 File name Displays the name of the import file.
4 [Choose File] button Allows you to find and select the import file.
5 [Import] button Imports the displayed file.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
7.[User Management]
[User Management] Overview 99
[User Management]
[Shared Settings] Item list <access policy mode>
When this printer is set as the primary MFP in [Shared Setting] from [Setting up User Authentication Setting], you can
synchronize the user information on the printer with other secondary MFPs.
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
If you have selected [Use Common Settings] on the [MFP Collaboration] > [Shared User Management] screen, you
cannot add and delete the secondary MFPs on this screen.
P.228 “Shared User Management”
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Adds a new secondary MFP.
Enter the IP address or host name for the secondary MFP for the distribution
destination in the input box below, and then click the [Add] button to register.
You can register up to 10 MFPs.
2 [Delete] button Deletes the selected MFP from the list of secondary MFPs.
3 [Sync All] button Synchronizes all the secondary MFPs with the primary MFP to share the user
information.
The synchronized information is the user information (User Name,
Password, PIN Code, Card Information, Role Assignment, Group
Assignment, PanelUI Language, PanelUI Keyboard Layout, Email Address,
Home Directory, PanelUI Keyboard Display). Settings for Department
Management and Project Management are not synchronized.
Only user information updated since the last sync is synchronized. When a
user has been deleted, the user of the secondary MFP is also deleted during
the synchronization.
During the initial synchronization, if there is user information in a secondary
MFP that is not registered to the printer when the printer is a primary MFP,
the user information for the secondary MFP is deleted.
The Port Number does not synchronize with the primary MFP or different
secondary MFPs.
P.239 “Off Device Customization Architecture settings”
4 Input box Enter the IP address or host name when registering a secondary MFP.
5 Server Address Shows the IP address of the added secondary MFP.
6 [TopAccess] button Starts TopAccess.
7 [Sync] button Synchronizes the secondary MFP with the primary MFP to share the user
information.
8 Last Update Displays the previous update time.
1
2
3
4
5678
7.[User Management]
100 [User Management] Overview
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List ............................................................................................................ 103
General settings .................................................................................................................................................103
Network settings................................................................................................................................................119
Copier settings ...................................................................................................................................................172
Fax settings ........................................................................................................................................................176
Save as file settings............................................................................................................................................185
Email settings.....................................................................................................................................................195
InternetFax settings...........................................................................................................................................202
Printer/e-Filing settings.....................................................................................................................................207
Printer settings...................................................................................................................................................208
Print Service settings .........................................................................................................................................215
ICC Profile settings.............................................................................................................................................223
Print Data Converter settings............................................................................................................................225
MFP Collaboration .............................................................................................................................................226
Embedded Web Browser settings .....................................................................................................................236
Off Device Customization Architecture settings...............................................................................................239
Version................................................................................................................................................................240
[Security] Item List......................................................................................................... 241
Authentication settings .....................................................................................................................................241
Certificate Management settings ......................................................................................................................260
Password Policy settings...................................................................................................................................265
Security Stamp setting ......................................................................................................................................268
Configuration settings .......................................................................................................................................269
[Maintenance] Item List .................................................................................................. 270
Upload Software settings ..................................................................................................................................270
Remove Software settings.................................................................................................................................272
Create Clone File settings..................................................................................................................................273
Install Clone File settings...................................................................................................................................275
Import settings...................................................................................................................................................278
Export settings ...................................................................................................................................................281
Panel View ..........................................................................................................................................................284
Idle Screen..........................................................................................................................................................285
Delete Files settings...........................................................................................................................................291
Notification settings ..........................................................................................................................................292
Languages settings ............................................................................................................................................295
Remote Command.............................................................................................................................................298
Data Backup .......................................................................................................................................................300
User Paper Type.................................................................................................................................................302
System Updates settings...................................................................................................................................303
Reboot settings ..................................................................................................................................................304
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List ....................................................................... 305
Public Home.......................................................................................................................................................305
Template settings ..............................................................................................................................................311
Public Theme Settings.......................................................................................................................................339
Public Home Settings ........................................................................................................................................340
Default Home .....................................................................................................................................................341
Default Home Settings.......................................................................................................................................341
Simple Screen Settings......................................................................................................................................342
Image/Icon Management ..................................................................................................................................343
Home Data List...................................................................................................................................................345
Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received Forward settings...............................................................345
Meta Scan ...........................................................................................................................................................360
XML Format File..................................................................................................................................................364
[Application] Item List .................................................................................................... 365
Application List ..................................................................................................................................................365
Application Settings...........................................................................................................................................368
User Extended Information ...............................................................................................................................371
Resource Management......................................................................................................................................372
[License] Item List .......................................................................................................... 373
License List.........................................................................................................................................................373
Activate...............................................................................................................................................................373
[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 103
0.[Setup] Item List
The paper size for each drawer cannot be set from TopAccess. Set from the touch panel of the equipment. For
instructions on how to set the paper size for each drawer, see the reference below:
Preparation of Paper (e-STUDIO6525AC Series/e-STUDIO6528A Series) - LOADING PAPER - Loading Paper in
Drawers
Preparation of Paper (e-STUDIO7527AC Series/e-STUDIO9029A Series) - LOADING PAPER - Loading Paper in
Drawers
Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the [Setup] menu from the
[Administration] page.
For how to access it, see the reference below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
General settings
You can configure the general settings such as device information, energy save, date and time, and web general
setting.
Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them. The settings will be updated by
pressing the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period.
The [General] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings that you have made at [Setup].
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
1 2
8.[Administration]
104 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Device Information
You can set the device information displayed on the [Device] page.
Item name Description
1 Name Displays the device name of your equipment.
2 Copier Model Displays the model name of your equipment.
3 Serial Number Displays the serial number of your equipment.
4 MAC Address Displays the MAC address of your equipment.
5 Save as File & e-Filing Space
Available
Displays the available space for save as file and e-Filing on your equipment.
6 Fax Space Available Displays the available space for fax transmission and reception for your
equipment.
7 Data Cloning Function Enable this item when migrating settings on your equipment to another
device.
8 User Information Cloning Enable this item when migrating the user information to another device. This
item is available only when [Data Cloning Function] is enabled.
9 Administrator’s Password
Cloning
Enable this item when migrating the password of the default administrator to
another device. This item is available only when [Data Cloning Function] is
enabled.
10 USB Direct Print Select whether the USB Direct Print function is enabled or disabled. USB
Direct Print is available only for some models.
11 Application Data
Transmission with External
Server
Select whether the data collection from the external server is enabled or
disabled.
12 Location Enter the installed location of your equipment. This is displayed on the
[Device] page that appears first when accessing the TopAccess website for
users.
13 Geo Location Enter the latitude and longitude in that order with a comma between them.
Enter the precise values if required. Up to 64 characters can be entered
including ! $ % & ’ ( ) * : + ; [ , - = ] . ~. (e.g. geo:00.00,90.00)
14 Contact Information Enter the name of the person who is responsible for this equipment. This is
displayed on the [Device] page that appears first when accessing the
TopAccess website for users.
15 Service Phone Number Enter the telephone number of the person who is responsible for servicing
this equipment. This is displayed on the [Device] page that appears first when
accessing the TopAccess website for users.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 105
[Administration]
Setting up Functions
Some items may not be changeable depending on the installed options and their settings. For details, contact your
service technician.
16 Administrative Message Enter the message to the users about this equipment. This is displayed on the
[Device] page that appears first when accessing the TopAccess website for
users.
Item name Description
1 Save as Local Storage Device Select whether to enable or disable the function to save on the internal
storage device.
2 e-Filing Select whether to enable or disable the e-Filing function.
3 Email Send Select whether to enable or disable the function to transmit E-mails.
4 Save as FTP Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using FTP.
5 Save as FTPS Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using FTPS.
6 Save to USB Media Select whether to enable or disable the use of USB media.
7 Save as SMB Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using SMB.
8 Save as Netware Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using NetWare.
9 iFax Send Select whether to enable or disable the function to send Internet Faxes.
10 Fax Send Select whether to enable or disable the function to send faxes.
11 Network iFax Select whether to enable or disable the network iFax function.
12 Network Fax Select whether to enable or disable the network fax function.
13 Web Services Scan Select whether to enable or disable the web scanning service function.
14 Twain Scanning Select whether to enable or disable the TWAIN scanning function.
15 Scan to External Controller Select whether to enable or disable the function to scan to an external
controller.
16 Background Copy Select whether to enable or disable the copy function via a smart speaker
that the embedded application supports.
17 Background Scan Select whether to enable or disable the scan function via a smart speaker that
the embedded application supports.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
8.[Administration]
106 [Setup] Item List
Long File Name Setting
The touch panel of this equipment may not be able to fully display a file name when the name is long, for example, in
private print jobs due to its restriction. You can specify how to display file names in Long File Name Setting.
Setting up e-Filing Notification Events
You can set E-mail conditions for notifying you that the expiration date of data in e-Filing boxes is approaching.
Setting up Job Control
Item name Description
1 Long File Name Expression
(Display)
Select how to display file names.
First Portion — The file name is displayed from the beginning and “...” is
used to indicate that part of the name is not displayed.
Last Portion — The file name is displayed in the way where the end of the
name can be seen.
First and Last Portions — The file name is displayed in the way where the
beginning and the end of the file name can be seen.
Non-Abbreviation — The file name is displayed from the beginning up to
the number of displayable characters.
Item name Description
1 Advance automatic delete
notification
Select when an E-mail notifying you of the approaching of the expiration date
of data in e-Filing boxes is to be sent. You can select how many days before the
expiration date from 0 (not notified) to 99 days.
Item name Description
1 Job Skip Control You can select whether to enable or disable the function to skip jobs which do
not match the printing conditions. If you enable this function, you can set [Job
Skip immediately], [Behavior after recovering suspended cause], [Restart only
when owner logs in], and [Auto Delete Timer].
2 Job Skip immediately Select whether to skip jobs immediately.
3 Behavior after recovering
suspended cause
Select the operation after clearing the cause that has suspended jobs.
Resume — Resumes the suspended jobs automatically.
Skipped — Leaves the jobs skipped to cope with them manually.
Auto — Restarts only undefined user’s jobs, for example fax received print
and others.
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 107
[Administration]
Setting up Restriction on Address Book Operation by administrator /
AddressbookRemoteOperator
Restriction of Destination Selection Method
4 Restart only when owner logs
in
Select whether to allow only the log-in job owner to restart the skipped jobs
when the user authentication is enabled.
When the user authentication is disabled, any user can restart skipped jobs
regardless of this setting.
5 Auto Delete Timer Set the time to delete the skipped jobs. [No Limit] does not delete skipped
jobs.
6 Job Interrupt Control You can select whether to turn on or off the function to interrupt print jobs.
When it is turned on, another print job can interrupt and suspend the current
job in printing. After the interrupting job is printed, printing the suspended job
restarts.
Item name Description
1 No Restriction Allows all users to perform operations on the Address Book.
2 Can be operated by
Administrator /
AddressbookRemoteOperator
only
Only users with Administrator access or an AddressbookRemoteOperator can
perform operations on the Address Book.
Item name Description
1 Prohibit Direct Entry Prohibits direct entry of the destination.
2 Prohibit Use Of Local Address
Book
Prohibits selection of the destination from the address book.
Item name Description
1
2
1
2
8.[Administration]
108 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Confidentiality Setting
You can specify whether or not to hide the document name, user name, and destination with asterisks (*) that are
displayed on jobs.
Item name Description
1 Target of Restriction Specify whether or not to apply the confidentiality setting on the job.
None — Does not apply the confidentiality setting.
Only JobStatus — Applies the confidentiality setting only to the job status.
Only Log — Applies the confidentiality setting only to the job log.
JobStatus and Log — Applies the confidentiality setting to both the job
status and job log.
2 Document Name
Enable — Displays 10 asterisks (*) instead of the document name.
Disable — Displays the document name.
3 User Name
Enable — Displays 10 asterisks (*) instead of the user name.
Disable — Displays the user name.
4 TO
Enable — Displays 10 asterisks (*) instead of the destination.
Disable — Displays the destination.
5 FROM
Enable — Displays 10 asterisks (*) instead of the sender.
Disable — Displays the sender.
6 Agent
Enable — Displays 10 asterisks (*) instead of the agent.
Disable — Displays the agent.
7 Log Data Privacy Setting Specify whether to hide user-related information for the protection of privacy
which is recorded in all job logs, message logs, application logs, and fax
transmission/reception journals.
Store — Store user-related information as it is.
Not to Store — Hide user-related information with ten asterisks irrespective
of user authentication and log authentication.
The default setting varies from shipment to shipment. This function is set to
“Not to Store” as a default setting for some districts.
8 SNMP Data Restriction Specify whether to restrict the MIB data reception of SNMP for the protection
of privacy.
Enable — Restricts the reception of the MIB data that contains user-related
information.
Disable — Allows the reception of the MIB data that contains user-related
information.
The default setting varies from shipment to shipment. This function is enabled
as a default setting for some districts.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 109
[Administration]
Setting up Energy Save
You can set Energy Save mode for your equipment.
For information on types of Energy Save mode and how to enter the mode, see the reference below:
Information About Equipment - Information About Equipment - Turning On/Off - Saving energy when not in use
– energy saving modes –
Item name Description
1 Auto Clear Select how long your equipment can remain inactive before the touch panel
automatically returns to the default display.
The changed value is applied to Auto Clear if its setting is altered. The history
of Auto Clear is registered in the log.
2 Auto Power Save Select how long your equipment can remain inactive before entering
Automatic Energy Save mode.
3 Sleep Timer Select how long your equipment can remain inactive before being entering
Sleep mode.
4
Sleep Mode
*1
Select the sleep mode that is activated when a specified period of time has
passed.
Power Off — The equipment enters the Power Off mode.
Auto — The equipment enters the Sleep mode or the Power Off mode
according to the LAN and Fax connections. If the connections are active, it
enters the Sleep mode. If they are not active, it enters the Power Off mode.
Sleep — The equipment enters the Sleep mode.
After you do cloning between the color and monochrome models, the sleep
mode action might be changed. If the equipment is turned off unexpectedly or
the sleep mode does not work as you like, check the Sleep Mode setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
8.[Administration]
110 [Setup] Item List
5
Super Sleep
*1
Select whether this equipment enters the Super Sleep mode when the
specified period has elapsed in the Automatic Energy Save mode or when the
[ENERGY SAVER] button on the control panel is pressed.
When the IPsec feature is enabled, you cannot change the Super Sleep Mode
from [Disable].
If this equipment cannot be found on the network or cannot be connected
via network while in Super Sleep, try searching again.
The equipment may not enter this mode at the set timing depending on its
operational status.
If [Press Button] or [Document Detection] is enabled under [Recovery
Setting], you cannot set [Super Sleep].
6 Expected recovery print
setting during Super Sleep
Select whether to recover the wired equipment from the Super Sleep mode
quickly after it receives a print job. The recovery time can be shorter than the
normal one.
Enable — Enables this expected recovery print function.
Disable — Disables this expected recovery print function.
This setting is effective only for the equipment that is wired to the network
and in the Super Sleep mode.
If this expected recovery occurs frequently but needlessly for some reason
or other, you can disable this function.
This function does not work for private print jobs and hold print jobs.
This function works only for printing with Windows Universal Printer 2 and
Universal PS3 printer drivers.
7 Recovery Setting Set the recovery operation from the sleep mode.
Press Button — Select whether to enable or disable the recovery by
pressing the buttons of the equipment.
Document Detection — Select whether to enable or disable the recovery by
detecting documents on the Automatic Document Feeder.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 111
[Administration]
*1 This function is not available for some models.
*2 These functions are available only for some models with the motion sensor.
8 Wake Up Setting Select the protocol to wake up your equipment from the Super Sleep mode
(or the Sleep mode for the models with no Super Sleep mode function) by a
network search. The number of available protocols varies depending on the
model.
The [Wake Up Setting] setting is enabled when sending an unspecified
number of MFP data through “broadcasting” and sending multiple data
with MFP specified through “multicasting”. The [Wake Up Setting] setting is
disabled when using “unicast” which specifies an address and sends.
The wake up setting is enabled when the super sleep mode is enabled in the
energy save setting.
The protocol selecting list of the Wake Up setting is made to select the
desired protocols regardless of whether the selected protocol is enabled or
disabled on each protocol setting. If the selected protocol is disabled in its
protocol setting, however, the Wake Up setting is disabled too and therefore
this equipment will not be recovered from the Super Sleep mode or the
Sleep mode (for models in which no Super Sleep mode is installed).
When no response is returned from this equipment after you access the
network even if a protocol selected on this setting is used, retry the access.
For “unicast” communication which carries out transmission by specifying a
certain address in the following protocols, the equipment can return from the
Super Sleep mode (or the Sleep mode for the models with no Super Sleep
mode function) even if the Wake Up setting is not applied.
IPP, FTP, HTTP, SMB, SMTP, SNMP, RAW9100, LPD, WebService
9
Motion Sensor
*2
Select whether the motion sensor is enabled or disabled.
Disable — Disables the motion sensor.
Enable (Screen On) — Enables the motion sensor and turns on the screen.
Enable (Screen Off) — Enables the motion sensor and turns off the screen.
10 Card Reader Response Mode
*2
Normal — Click this button when the response of the card reader is slow.
Eco — Click this button to cut down the power consumption although the
response of the card reader might become slow.
11
Standby Margin
*2
Set the time (seconds) to accept the operation of the touch panel.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
112 [Setup] Item List
The following network settings are required for this equipment to enter the Super Sleep mode.
Select other than [Use Stateless Address] in the IPv6 setting.
P.125 “IPv6/ IPv6 (Secondary)”
Select [Disable] for [Enable IPX/SPX] in the IPX/SPX setting.
P.170 “Setting up IPX/SPX”
Specify one of the following in [POP3 Network Service].
- [Disable] for [Enable POP3 Client].
- No entry for [POP3 Server Address].
- No entry for [Account Name].
- 0 for [Scan Rate].
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
Disable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
For the IEEE 802.1X authentication method under the wired LAN environment, see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - 802.1X Settings
See the following for the network access setting in super sleep mode for your equipment.
ARP
Select this to enable address resolution when this equipment is used under IPv4 environment.
SNMP for IPv4
Select this to search for this equipment over the network with SNMP protocol when Client Utilities is used under
IPv4 environment.
SNMP for IPv6
Select this to search for this equipment over the network with SNMP protocol when Client Utilities is used under
IPv6 environment.
SMB
Select this to enable domain name resolution when NetBIOS name is used under IPv4 environment.
Bonjour for IPv4
Select this to search for this equipment over the network with the Bonjour protocol when it is used under IPv4
environment.
Bonjour for IPv6
Select this to search for this equipment over the network with the Bonjour protocol when it is used under IPv6
environment.
Neighbor Discovery (Link Local Address)
Select this to enable address resolution when this equipment is used under IPv6 environment.
Neighbor Discovery (Manual/Stateful Address)
Select this to enable address resolution when this equipment is used under IPv6 environment.
LLMNR
Select this to enable domain name resolution when NetBIOS name is used.
SLP
Select this to enable service discovery when SLP is used.
Web Services for IPv4
Select this to search for this equipment over the network with WSDiscovery under IPv4 environment.
Web Services for IPv6
Select this to search for this equipment over the network with WSDiscovery under IPv6 environment.
Shutdown Setting
Specify whether to display a confirmation screen when shutting down the equipment.
Item name Description
1 Display the shutdown select
screen when choices are one.
Specify whether or not to display the confirmation screen.
1
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 113
[Administration]
Setting up Date & Time
You can set the date, time, time zone, and date format.
[Date & Time] settings are not available if the SNTP function is enabled.
If the date and time is not set correctly, the SSL/TLS communications and Kerberos authentication with the server
might fail.
Setting up SNTP Service
In SNTP Service, you can specify the SNTP server to refresh the time settings of this equipment using SNTP service.
Item name Description
1 Year/Month/Date/Time Select the year and month in designated boxes. Also, enter the date and time
in designated boxes.
2 Time Zone Select the time zone where this equipment is located.
3 Date Format Select the date format.
Item name Description
1 Enable SNTP Select whether to enable or disable SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
When this is enabled, the time settings of this equipment can be adjusted
using the SNTP service.
[Date & Time] settings are not available if enabled.
2 Primary SNTP Address Enter the IP address or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the Primary
SNTP Server Address when [Enable SNTP] is enabled.
3 Secondary SNTP Address Enter the IP address or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the Secondary
SNTP Server Address when [Enable SNTP] is enabled as required.
When the [Obtain a SNTP Server Address automatically] option is enabled in
the TCP/IP settings, the SNTP server address can be obtained using the DHCP
server.
P.120 “Basic Setting”
4 Scan Rate Enter how often this equipment should access the SNTP server to check the
time.
5 Port Number Enter the port number for the SNTP service. Generally “123” is used.
6 NTP Authentication Select whether to enable or disable NTP authentication.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
114 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Daylight Savings Time Setting
Make the required settings for daylight savings time.
If you change the settings during the daylight saving time period, the changes will be reflected to the equipment’s
clock. If you select [Disable] during the applicable period, be sure to confirm that the correct time is displayed since
the equipment’s clock will shift to the current time. When the SNTP Service setting is enabled and if the SNTP
server is synchronized, the correct time will be displayed.
P.113 “Setting up Date & Time”
If the equipment is turned off at the start or end date and time, the equipment will shift the clock the next time it is
turned on.
After the clock shifts, the daylight saving time will also apply to the weekly timers.
Select the Start and the End dates and times based on the time set for the equipment.
P.113 “Setting up Date & Time”
Setting up WEB General Setting
You can set the session timer for TopAccess.
When logged in the access policy mode, you will be automatically logged out if the session timer elapses without
any operation being performed.
Once a logging-in user operates TopAccess, the changed value is applied to Session Timer if its setting is altered.
Item name Description
1 Daylight Savings Time Select [Enable] to shift the clock to the daylight savings time. [Disable] is set as
the default.
2 Offset Select the desired offset (time difference) from the local standard time. You
can select from between -2 and +2 hours, excluding 0 hour, in 30-minute
increments. [+1:00] is set as the default.
3 Dates Select the applicable period for the daylight savings time.
Start — Select or enter the start date and time of daylight savings time.
End — Select or enter the end date and time of daylight savings time.
Item name Description
1 Session Timer Enter how long you want this equipment to preserve the session data of
TopAccess. You can enter any integer between 5 to 999. This setting also
applies to the session data of the e-Filing web utility. “10” is set as the default.
1
2
3
1
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 115
[Administration]
Home Setting
You can set the default screen displayed by pressing the [Home] button on the control panel when user
authentication is enabled. The settings vary, depending on the [Sync Setting] setting.
For the procedure for home data synchronization, see the reference below:
P.398 “Setting Home Data Synchronization”
When [Disable] is selected from [Sync Setting]
When [Use Network Server for Sync] is selected from [Sync Setting]
When [Use MFP for Sync] is selected from [Sync Setting]
If you have selected [Select from Common Settings] on the [MFP Collaboration] > [Shared Home] screen, you cannot
enter the server name on this screen.
P.231 “Shared Home”
Item name Description
1 Public Home Select whether to enable or disable Public Home.
2 Default Home Screen Setting Select the Home to be displayed as the default screen when you press the
[Home] button.
User
: Select this to the User Home screen.
Public: Select this to display the Public Home screen.
1
2
3
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
14
13
1
2
3
9
10
11
12
14
13
8.[Administration]
116 [Setup] Item List
Assignment for Programmable Button
You can assign functions to Programmable Button 1 and Programmable Button 2.
3 Sync Setting Specify whether or not to synchronize the HOME screen with the network
server or other MFPs.
Disable
: Disable the Home sync function.
Use Network Server for Sync: Select this to use the network server for
synchronization.
Use MFP for Sync: Select this to use MFP for synchronization.
4 Server Name Enter the name of the network server.
5 Port Number Enter the port number of the network server.
6 User Name Enter the name of the user who accesses the network server.
7 Password Enter the password of the user who accesses the network server.
8 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether SSL/TLS is enabled or disabled.
9 Assume this MFP is the
Primary Server
Select this check box to synchronize this MFP as the primary server. When you
clear this check box, another MFP can synchronize as the primary server.
If the FTP server is disabled, you cannot set this MFP as the primary server.
P.152 “Setting up FTP Server”
10 Server Name Enter the name of the primary server when you set another MFP other than
this MFP as the primary server.
11 Port Number Enter the port number of the primary server when you set another MFP other
than this MFP as the primary server.
12 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether SSL/TLS is enabled or disabled when you set another MFP
other than this MFP as the primary server.
13 Delete All Shared Data Delete all the shared data stored in the FTP server.
14 Public Home change from
User
Select whether general users can change the Public Home screen.
Enable — Allows general users to change the Public Home screen.
Disable — Forbids general users to change the Public Home screen.
Item name Description
1 Programmable Button 1/
Programmable Button 2
Select the function to assign.
Item name Description
1
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 117
[Administration]
Panel Setting
You can set the default screen on the control panel and the appearance order in the job lists.
OCR Setting
You can specify the OCR function.
Item name Description
1 Default Screen Specify the functions to be displayed on the default screen after this
equipment starts up. Select [Embedded Application] and then press
[Assignment] to specify the applications to be set on the default screen.
2 Sort Order Specify the appearance order of hold (fax) and secure Rx jobs in the job list.
Ascending Order — Shows the jobs in the ascending order by day.
Descending Order — Shows the jobs in the descending order by day.
3 Default Document List Setting Specify the default appearance of the document list on the control panel
respectively for [Hold(Fax) & Secure Rx], [USB Direct Print], and [Private, Hold,
Proof, Multi Station Print].
Document Name — Shows document names in the list.
Thumbnail Image — Shows thumbnail images in the list for PDF and JPEG
files. The fixed icon appears for files of other formats.
A thumbnail just represents the image of a file. The image may differ from
the original, having parts of it cut or blank spaces added.
You need the Multi Station Print Enabler option to use the [Multi Station
Print] function.
Item name Description
1 Language Select the prioritized primary and secondary languages.
2 Auto Rotation Specify whether or not to automatically rotate.
3 XLSX Sheet Composition Specify how to create the XLSX sheet.
1 Page Becomes 1 Sheet — Makes 1 page 1 sheet.
Multi Pages Become 1 Sheet — Combines multiple pages into 1 sheet.
1
2
3
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
118 [Setup] Item List
PDF/A Fileformat Setting
You can set the default level of the PDF/A file format.
When you save searchable PDF/A-2b files with the enabled OCR function, they might not conform to the PDF/A-2b
standard, depending on several OCR languages that you select. It is recommended that you select PDF/A-1b to save
searchable PDF/A files with the OCR function.
PDF with the digital signature might not be created in the PDF/A-1b file format, depending on the certificate
settings.
P.264 “Setting up Certificate Setting”
Status Message
You can set the common message of the status message and icon that appears commonly on every screen of the
control panel.
Item name Description
1 Default Conformance Level Select the default conformance level of PDF/A.
PDF/A-1b
— Selects PDF/A-1b as a default setting.
PDF/A-2b — Selects PDF/A-2b as a default setting.
Item name Description
1 Display Setting Select whether to enable or disable the appearance of the common message.
The [Display Setting] setting on the [Application Details] window of the
application takes priority over this one.
P.365 “Application List”
2 Auto Close Time Specify the time from 1 to 30 seconds (default 5 seconds) to close the common
message automatically. The time specified for each status message takes
priority over this one.
3 Display Position Select where the common message appears on the screen: the default
position is “Bottom Left”. The [Display Position] setting on the [Application
Details] screen of the application takes priority over this one.
P.365 “Application List”
4 Display Level Select the display level of the common message from “All” (default),
“Warning/Error”, or “Error”. Messages out of these levels do not appear on the
screen.
1
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 119
[Administration]
Network settings
You can configure the network settings such as TCP/IP, Filtering, IPX/SPX, Bonjour, LDAP Session, SMB Session,
NetWare Session, HTTP Network Service, SMTP Client, SMTP Server, POP3 Network Service, SNTP Service, FTP Client,
FTP Server, SNMP Network Service, and Security Service.
During the initialization of the network, the network will not be available. A message is displayed to inform you that it
will reconnect to TopAccess after a while. Also, the touch panel on this equipment displays a message to inform you
that the network is not ready. When this message disappears, TopAccess will once again be available.
The [Network] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Item name Description
1 Menu area This area shows the functions that you can set for [Network]. When you click a
function name, the settings for the selected function appear in the setting
display area on the right.
2 Setting display area This area shows the settings for the function selected in the menu area. When
you click an item at the link menu located on the top, you can move directly
to the item. After you change the settings, be sure to click [Save]. To cancel
the setting operation, click [Cancel].
1 2
8.[Administration]
120 [Setup] Item List
Basic Setting
You can set TCP/IP, DNS, and DDNS in the Basic Setting. The TCP/IP must be configured to enable TopAccess, SMB
printing, Raw TCP or LPR printing, IPP printing, Scan to Email, and Internet Fax.
Network Composition
The secondary network can support the following communications:
Network printing (LPR, Raw TCP, IPP, FTP)
Remote scan (by the use of the remote scan driver)
Client applications
TopAccess
SNMP (without trap)
Bonjour
VNC
IP Security
For information about the network adapter for Wired LAN2, contact your service technician or representative.
Item name Description
1 Network Composition Select the network composition of this equipment.
Wired LAN — Select this to use the standard wired LAN as the primary
network.
Wireless LAN — Select this to use the wireless LAN as the primary network.
This setting appears if the wireless LAN module is attached to this
equipment and the wireless LAN communication is configured properly.
Wired LAN + Wired LAN2 — Select this to use two channels at the same
time with the wired LAN as the primary network and the wired LAN2 as the
secondary network. This setting appears if the network adapter dedicated
for the wired LAN2 is connected to this equipment.
Wireless LAN + Wired LAN — Select this to use two channels at the same
time with the wireless LAN as the primary network and the standard wired
LAN as the secondary network. This setting appears if the wireless LAN
module is attached to this equipment and the wireless LAN communication
is configured properly.
Wired LAN + Wireless LAN— Select this to use two channels at the same
time with the wired LAN as the primary network and the wireless LAN as the
secondary network. This setting appears if the wireless LAN module is
attached to this equipment and the wireless LAN communication is
configured properly.
1
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 121
[Administration]
General Setting / General Setting (Secondary)
You need to set [General Setting (Secondary)] for the secondary network when you use the two-channel networks.
Item name Description
1 Ethernet Speed Duplex Mode Select the ethernet speed. [AUTO] is set as the default.
When you select a specific ethernet speed, you must select the same one as
set in the connected network. If you do not know the ethernet speed that
must be used, select [AUTO].
If the network is not stable, power OFF the equipment then ON.
2 Host Name Enter the host name of your equipment. You can enter up to 63
alphanumerical characters including “-” (hyphens).
You cannot use a “-” (hyphen) as the first and last character. The MFP name is
set as the default.
3 IP Conflict Detect Specify whether or not to detect IP address conflicts. Select [Enable] to
display a message on the touch panel when an IP address conflict is detected.
[Enable] is set as the default.
1
2
3
1
3
8.[Administration]
122 [Setup] Item List
IPv4 / IPv4 (Secondary)
You need to set [IPv4 (Secondary)] for the secondary network when you use the two-channel networks.
Item name Description
1 Address Mode Select how to set the IP address.
Static IP — Select this to assign the static IP address manually. When this is
selected, enter the static IP address in the [IP Address] box.
Dynamic — Select this to assign the IP address using the DHCP with Auto-IP
addressing enabled. The IP address, subnet mask, gateway address,
primary WINS server address, secondary WINS server address, POP3 server
address, and SMTP server address can be automatically acquired from the
DHCP server if the network supports DHCP. However, if the network does
not support DHCP, use the AutoIP function to assign an IP address.
No AutoIP — Select this to assign the IP address using the DHCP with Auto-
IP addressing disabled. The IP address, subnet mask, gateway address,
primary WINS server address, secondary WINS server address, POP3 server
address, and SMTP server address can be automatically acquired from the
DHCP server if the network supports DHCP. If the communication with the
DHCP cannot be established, the previous IP address is used.
2 Obtain a Domain Name
automatically
Select [Enable] when you want to obtain a domain name automatically using
the DHCP server. This setting will apply only when [No AutoIP] or [Dynamic] is
selected in the Address Mode option. [Enable] is set as the default.
When the DHCP server does not have a domain name, the data are left blank
in the domain name even if you set the correct domain name manually in the
DDNS Session. In that case, select [Disable] here and set the correct domain
name in the DDNS Session.
P.128 “DDNS”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
3
8
9
10
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 123
[Administration]
3 Obtain a Domain Server
Address automatically
Select [Enable] when you want to obtain a domain server address
automatically using the DHCP server. This setting will apply only when [No
AutoIP] or [Dynamic] is selected in the Address Mode option. [Enable] is set as
the default.
When the DHCP server does not have a primary and secondary DNS server
addresses, the data are left blank in the primary and secondary DNS server
addresses, even if you set the correct primary and secondary DNS server
addresses manually in the DNS Session. In that case, select [Disable] here and
set the correct primary and secondary DNS server address in the DNS Session.
P.127 “DNS / DNS (Secondary)”
4 Obtain a WINS Server Address
automatically
Select [Enable] when you want to obtain a primary or secondary WINS server
address automatically using the DHCP server. This setting will apply only
when [No AutoIP] or [Dynamic] is selected in the Address Mode option.
[Enable] is set as the default.
When the DHCP server does not have a primary and secondary WINS server
addresses, the data are left blank in the primary and secondary WINS server
addresses, even if you set the correct primary and secondary WINS server
addresses manually in the SMB Session. In that case, select [Disable] here and
set the correct primary and secondary WINS server address in the SMB
Session.
P.144 “Setting up SMB”
5 Obtain an SMTP Server
Address automatically
Select [Enable] when you want to obtain a SMTP server address
automatically using the DHCP server. This setting will apply only when [No
AutoIP] or [Dynamic] is selected in the Address Mode option. [Disable] is set
as the default.
When the DHCP server does not have a SMTP server address, the data are left
blank in the SMTP server address even if you set the correct SMTP server
address manually in the SMTP Client. In that case, select [Disable] here and
set the correct SMTP server address in the SMTP Client.
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
6 Obtain a POP3 Server Address
automatically
Select [Enable] when you want to obtain a POP3 server address automatically
using the DHCP server. This setting will apply only when [No AutoIP] or
[Dynamic] is selected in the Address Mode option. [Disable] is set as the
default.
When the DHCP server does not have a POP3 server address, the data are left
blank in the POP3 server address even if you set the correct POP3 server
address manually in the POP3 Network Service. In that case, select [Disable]
here and set the correct POP3 server address in the POP3 Network Service.
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
124 [Setup] Item List
7 Obtain an SNTP Server
Address automatically
Select [Enable] when you want to obtain a SNTP server address automatically
using the DHCP server. This setting will apply only when [No AutoIP] or
[Dynamic] is selected in the Address Mode option. [Disable] is set as the
default.
When the DHCP server does not have a SNTP server address, the data are left
blank in the SNTP server address even if you set the correct SNTP server
address manually in the SNTP Network Service. In that case, select [Disable]
here and set the correct SNTP server address in the SNTP Network Service.
P.113 “Setting up SNTP Service”
8 IP Address Enter the static IP address for your equipment when [Static IP] is selected in
the [Address Mode] box. Specify within the range from 1 to 126 and 128 to 223
for the 1st octet, 0 to 255 for the 2nd to 4th octet.
9 Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask if required when [Static IP] is selected in the [Address
Mode] box. Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255.
However, you cannot set 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
10 Default Gateway Enter the gateway address if required when [Static IP] is selected in the
[Address Mode] box. Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 125
[Administration]
IPv6/ IPv6 (Secondary)
You need to set [IPv6 (Secondary)] for the secondary network when you use the two-channel networks.
Item name Description
1 Enable IPv6 Select whether the IPv6 protocol is enabled or disabled. [Enable] is set as the
default.
2 Link Local Address The automatically generated unique IP Address used for the IPv6 is displayed.
3 Manual You assign the IPv6 address, prefix and default gateway manually. In this
mode, you can assign one IPv6 address to this equipment.
IP Address — Assign the IPv6 address for this equipment. Specify within the
range from 1:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff.
Prefix Length — Assign the prefix length for the IPv6 address. Specify within
the range from 0 to 128. “0” is set as the default.
Gateway — Assign the default gateway address. Specify within the range from
1:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff.
Use DHCPv6 Server for options — Select this check box to use the optional
information (IPv6 address for the DNS server, etc.) which is issued from the
DHCPv6 server.
When [Manual] is selected, a stateful address cannot be set.
If the selected IPv6 address is already assigned, DAD (Duplicate Address
Detection) detects it and notifies you on the touch panel of this equipment.
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
126 [Setup] Item List
4 Use Stateless Address Use the IPv6 addresses (Stateless addresses) issued from routers.
Use DHCPv6 Server for IP Address(M flag) — Use the IPv6 address issued
from the DHCPv6 server in the stateless network environment.
Use DHCPv6 Server for options(O flag) — Use the optional information
(IPv6 address for the DNS server, etc.) issued from the DHCPv6 server in the
stateless network environment.
FQDN Option — The FQDN option is available if Use DHCPv6 Server for IP
Address is selected. Select [Server] or [Client] for [Update Method] if using
the FQDN option. [Server] is set as the default.
IP Address — Stateless Addresses obtained from routers are displayed. Up
to 7 IPv6 addresses can be retained.
When this equipment receives a router advertisement (RA) from a router, of
which M flag configuration is “0”, the DHCPv6 function is disabled. If you
change a router advertisement (RA) M flag configuration from “0” to “1”, it is
necessary to reboot this equipment to enable the DHCPv6 function.
5 Use Stateful Address Use the Stateful address issued from DHCPv6 server.
Use DHCPv6 Server for IP Address — Select whether or not the IPv6
address which is issued from the DHCPv6 server is used for this equipment.
Use DHCPv6 Server for options — Select whether or not the optional
information (IPv6 address for the DNS server, etc.) except the IPv6 address
for this equipment, which is issued from the DHCPv6 server is used on this
equipment.
FQDN Option — The FQDN option is available if Use DHCPv6 Server for IP
Address is selected. Select [Server] or [Client] for [Update Method] if using
the FQDN option. [Server] is set as the default.
IP Address — A stateful address, Prefix Length and Gateway obtained from
DHCPv6 Server are displayed.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 127
[Administration]
DNS / DNS (Secondary)
In DNS Session, you can specify the DNS server to enable the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) rather than the IP
address on specifying each server address such as SMTP server, POP3 server, and LDAP server. You need to set [DNS
(Secondary)] for the secondary network when you use the two-channel networks.
When the DNS service is enabled and the DNS server supports the dynamic DNS service, Set the DDNS Session as well.
P.128 “DDNS”
When the [Obtain a Domain Server Address automatically] option is enabled in the TCP/IP settings, the server address
of the primary and secondary DNS server addresses can be obtained using the DHCP server.
P.120 “Basic Setting”
Item name Description
1 Enable DNS Select whether the DNS server is enabled or not. [Enable] is set as the default.
2 Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server when the DNS service is
enabled. Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255.
3 Secondary DNS Server
Address
Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server when the DNS service is
enabled, as you require. Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255
255.
4 Primary DNS Server
Address(IPv6)
Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server when the DNS service is
enabled in IPv6. Specify within the range from 1:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to
ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff.
5 Secondary DNS Server
Address(IPv6)
Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server when the DNS service is
enabled in IPv6, as required. Specify within the range from 1:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to
ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff.
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
128 [Setup] Item List
DDNS
In DDNS Session, you can enable the Dynamic DNS service if the DNS server supports the dynamic DNS.
When using the security in DDNS, if the difference between the time set in the server, in which Windows DNS record
is to be updated, and the one set in the equipment exceeds the time stated in the account policy of the server, the
DNS update using the security will fail. Check the time set for the DNS server and match it with the one set for the
equipment.
When using DDNS and the IP address is assigned using DHCP, enable “006 DNS Servers” and “015 DNS Domain
Name” in the DHCP Server’s Scope Options or Server Options.
When using DDNS, make sure the “Dynamic updates” option is set to “Nonsecure and secure” or “Secure only” for
the Forward Lookup Zones and Reversed Lookup Zones in the DNS server (in Windows Server).
If the DNS server has been set up with “Secure only”, be sure to set the security at the DDNS settings for the
equipment.
Forward Lookup Zones
(Windows Server 2019)
Reversed Lookup Zones
(Windows Server 2019)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 129
[Administration]
Item name Description
1 Enable DDNS Select whether the dynamic DNS service is enabled or disabled. [Enable] is set
as the default.
2 Domain Name Enter the domain name that will be added to the DNS server using DDNS. You
can enter up to 96 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ;
(semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
When the [Obtain a Domain Name automatically] option is enabled in the
TCP/IP settings, the domain name can be obtained using the DHCP server.
P.120 “Basic Setting”
3 Security Method Enter the security method.
None
Select this to perform a non-secure DDNS update.
GSS-TSIG
Select this to perform a secure DDNS session using GSS-TSIG. You must set a
log-in name and a password. If both are not set, the secure DDNS session
will not be available.
TSIG
Select this to perform a secure DDNS session using TSIG. To select this, you
must upload a key file and a private key file. If any of them is not uploaded,
the security setting will be disabled.
SIG(0)
Select this to perform a secure DDNS session using SIG(0). To select this, you
must upload a key file and a private key file. If any of them is not uploaded,
the security setting will be disabled.
4 Primary Login Name Enter the primary login name if the security method selected in the above
setting is GSS-TSIG. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and
symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
5 Primary Password Enter the primary password if the security method selected in the above
setting is GSS-TSIG. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and
symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
6 Secondary Login Name Enter the secondary login name if the security method selected in the above
setting is GSS-TSIG. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and
symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
7 Secondary Password Enter the secondary password if the security method selected in the above
setting is GSS-TSIG. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and
symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
8 TSIG/SIG(0) Key file Use this setting to upload or delete a key file to be used for TSIG and SIG(0).
To upload it, click [Choose File] and specify a private key file to be uploaded,
and then click [Upload].
To delete it, click [Delete].
9 TSIG/SIG(0) Private Key file Use this setting to upload or delete a private key file to be used for TSIG and
SIG(0).
To upload it, click [Choose File] and specify a private key file to be uploaded,
and then click [Upload].
To delete it, click [Delete].
8.[Administration]
130 [Setup] Item List
LLMNR / LLMNR (Secondary)
You need to set [LLMNR (Secondary)] for the secondary network when you use the two-channel networks.
Setting up Filtering
You can set filtering in order to restrict access from client computers to this equipment. Filtering can be specified with
an IP address or a MAC address. You need to set [Secondary] for the secondary network when you use the two-channel
network.
MAC address filtering is given priority over IP address filtering.
Item name Description
1 LLMNR Select whether LLMNR is enabled or disabled. [Enable] is set as the default.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 131
[Administration]
Item name Description
1 Enable IP Filtering Select [Enable] for IP address filtering. When [Enable] is selected, access from
devices on a network to which the IP address (specified in [IP Filtering]) is set
is restricted under conditions set in [IP Filtering Rule]. [Disable] is set as the
default.
IP filtering is valid only in a network environment implemented with IPv4. It is
not available in an IPv6 network environment. If you need to use IP address
filtering under IPv6 environment, select MAC address filtering.
2 IP Filtering Rule Select IP address filtering rules.
Permit — Select this to permit access from devices on a network to which
the IP address (specified in [IP Filtering]) is set.
Deny — Select this to deny access from devices to which the specified IP
address is set.
3 IP Filtering Enter the start IP address, end IP address, and port number of the clients to
apply IP filtering. Up to 10 addresses can be specified.
Only IPv4 addresses are available. An IPv6 address cannot be specified.
4 Apply the ICMP Filter Specify [Enable] if you want to filter the Internet Control Message Protocol.
The default is [Disable].
5 Enable MAC Address Filtering Select [Enable] for MAC address filtering. When [Enable] is selected, access
from devices on a network to which the MAC address (specified in [MAC
Address Filtering]) is set is restricted under conditions set in [MAC Address
Filtering Rule]. [Disable] is set as the default.
6 MAC Address Filtering Rule Select MAC address filtering rules.
Permit — Select this to permit access from devices on a network to which
the MAC address (specified in [MAC Address Filtering]) is set.
Deny — Select this to deny access from devices to which the specified MAC
address is set.
7 MAC Address Filtering Enter the MAC address of a target client computer for MAC address filtering.
Up to 10 addresses can be specified.
8.[Administration]
132 [Setup] Item List
SSL/TLS Settings
You can set the TLS version and the cipher suites for TLS 1.2 for SSL/TLS communications with the network servers.
Setting up IP Security
With the IP security function, you can enable data encryption communication using IPsec (IP Security Protocol).
Item name Description
1 TLS Versions Select the versions of TLS 1.2 and 1.3.
You cannot deselect both versions at the same time, which causes
impossible communications.
If the different TLS versions are set for devices, it is impossible to
communicate with each other.
2 Key Exchanges Select the key exchange method for the TLS 1.2 cipher suite.
3 Encryption Algorithms Select the encryption algorithm for the TLS 1.2 cipher suite.
4 Hash Algorithms Select the hash algorithm for the TLS 1.2 cipher suite.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the IP Security setting.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the IP Security setting.
3 [Flush Connections] button With the [Flush Connections] button, if the keys for IPsec communication are
leaked or a security violation occurs, you can manually delete (flush) the
current session with the flush connection function and start a new session. If
you want to delete the information of SAD (Security Association Database) for
any reason, you can delete it in the same way.
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
7
1098
1 2
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 133
[Administration]
4 Enable IPsec Specify whether or not to enable IPsec.
Enable — Enables IPsec.
Disable — Disables IPsec.
5 Policy Select a policy to use in IPsec.
To enable data encryption communication using IPsec, you must first create
IPsec policies according to your system environment.
P.143 “[Add Policy] / [Modify Policy] screen”
6 Filter Creates a filter for the IPsec environment.
[Add] button — You can add a filter on the [Add Filter] screen.
P.134 “[Add Filter] / [Modify Filter] screen”
[Delete] button — Select filters to delete and click the [Delete] button to
delete them.
Filter Name — Click a registered filter name to modify its content.
P.134 “[Add Filter] / [Modify Filter] screen”
Filter Action — Displays the action of the registered filter.
7 Manual Key Set the IPsec manual key.
[Add] button — You can add a manual key on the [Add Manual Key] screen.
P.136 “[Add Manual Key] / [Modify Manual Key] screen”
[Delete] button — Select manual keys to delete and click the [Delete] button
to delete them.
Manual Key Name — Click a registered manual key name to modify its
content.
P.136 “[Add Manual Key] / [Modify Manual Key] screen”
Encryption Algorithm — Displays the registered encryption algorithms.
8 IKE Key Set the IPsec IKE key.
[Add] button — You can add an IKE key on the [Add IKE] screen.
P.137 “[Add IKE] / [Modify IKE] screen”
[Delete] button — Select keys to delete and click the [Delete] button to delete
them.
Key Name — Click a registered key name to modify its content.
P.137 “[Add IKE] / [Modify IKE] screen”
IKE Type — Displays the registered IKE types.
9 Profile First create a filter and a manual key or IKE key according to your IPsec
environment, and then create profiles by combining them.
[Add] button — You can add a profile on the [Add Profile] screen.
P.141 “[Add Profile] / [Modify Profile] screen”
[Delete] button — Select profiles to delete and click the [Delete] button to
delete them.
Profile Name — Click a registered profile name to modify its content.
P.141 “[Add Profile] / [Modify Profile] screen”
Profile Mode — Displays the registered profile mode.
10 Policy Create a policy to use in IPsec by combining the registered profiles.
[Add] button — You can add a policy on the [Add Policy] screen.
P.143 “[Add Policy] / [Modify Policy] screen”
[Delete] button — Select policies to delete and click the [Delete] button to
delete them.
Policy Name — Click a registered policy name to modify its content.
P.143 “[Add Policy] / [Modify Policy] screen”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
134 [Setup] Item List
[Add Filter] / [Modify Filter] screen
You can display this screen by clicking the [Add] button for Filter or a registered filter name.
You can create a filter to use in IPsec.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the folder setting.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels registration of the folder.
3 [Reset] button Returns the settings to the defaults.
4 Filter Name Enter a filter name. You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters and
symbols other than #, %, &, +, \ (backslash), ’ (apostrophe), ; (semicolon),
, (comma), ", and =.
5 Internet Protocol Version Select the IP version for IPsec.
IPv4 — Select this to use IPsec under the IPv4 environment.
IPv6 — Select this to use IPsec under the IPv6 environment.
6 Source Address The IP address of this equipment is set as the source address to which the
filter is applied. [My IP Address] is displayed in this box. This item cannot be
changed.
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 2
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 135
[Administration]
7 Destination Address Specify the destination address for the communication to which the filter is
applied.
Specific IP Address — Set a specific IP address. Enter the IP address in the
address input box.
Subnet / Prefix — Set the destination with its IP address and subnet mask.
Enter the IP address and the prefix of the subnet mask directly in the
address input box.
FQDN — Sets FQDN for the destination. Enter FQDN in the address input
box. You can enter up to 255 alphanumerical characters including hyphen (-
) and period (.). However, neither hyphen (-) nor period (.) can be used as
first or last character.
Any IP Address — Set any IP address.
8 Protocol Type Select a protocol for the filter.
Any — Set any protocol.
TCP — Select this to use TCP only.
UDP — Select this to use UDP only.
ICMP — Select this to use ICMP only.
9 Source Port Specify the source port number. This setting is available only if you selected
TCP or UDP in the protocol type setting.
Any — Set any source port.
Port Number — Set the port number of the sender. Enter the port number
in the port number input box.
10 Destination Port Set the destination port number. This setting is available only if you selected
TCP or UDP in the protocol type setting.
Any — Set any destination port.
Port Number — Set the port number of the destination. Enter the port
number in the port number input box.
11 Filter Action Set the operation of the filter.
Permit — Select this to permit access from the specified destination.
Block — Select this to block access from the specified destination.
Negotiate Security — IPsec communication is performed with the
specified destination. When this item is set, you must select the security
protocol type to be used in IPsec communication from the following:
- ESP — Select this to use ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload).
- AH — Select this to use AH (Authentication Header).
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
136 [Setup] Item List
[Add Manual Key] / [Modify Manual Key] screen
You can display this screen by clicking the [Add] button for Manual Key or a registered manual key name.
You can set a manual key to use in IPsec.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the key setting.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels registration of the key.
3 [Reset] button Returns the settings to the defaults.
4 Manual Key Name Enter the name of the manual key. You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical
characters and symbols other than #, %, &, +, \ (backslash), ’
(apostrophe), ; (semicolon), , (comma), “, and =.
5 Encryption Algorithm Select an encryption algorithm.
None — Select this not to perform data encryption.
AES-256-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (256 bits).
AES-192-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (192 bits).
AES-128-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (128 bits).
3DES-CBC — Select this to use 3DES-CBC.
DES-CBC — Select this to use DES-CBC.
6 Hash Algorithm Select a hash algorithm.
SHA1 — Select this to use SHA1.
MD5 — Select this to use MD5.
AES-XCBC-MAC — Select this to use AES-XCBC-MAC.
4
3
5
6
7
8
1 2
4
3
5
6
7
8
1 2
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 137
[Administration]
[Add IKE] / [Modify IKE] screen
You can display this screen by clicking the [Add] button for IKE Key or a registered key name.
You can set an IKE key to use in IPsec.
7 Inbound Key Select a key for the receiving side.
Security Parameter Index Specify a security parameter index (SPI) for identification.
You can enter a value in the range from 256 to 4095.
ESP Encryption Key Enter an ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) encryption key.
ESP Authentication Key Enter an ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) authentication key.
AH Authentication Key Enter an AH (Authentication Header) authentication key.
8 Outbound Key Select a key for the destination.
Security Parameter Index Specify a security parameter index (SPI) for identification.
You can enter a value in the range from 256 to 4095.
ESP Encryption Key Enter an ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) encryption key.
ESP Authentication Key Enter an ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) authentication key.
AH Authentication Key Enter an AH (Authentication Header) authentication key.
Item name Description
4
3
5
6
7
1 2
8.[Administration]
138 [Setup] Item List
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the key setting.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels registration of the key.
3 [Reset] button Returns the settings to the defaults.
4 IKE Key Name Enter the name of the IKE key. You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical
characters and symbols other than #, %, &, +, \ (backslash), ’
(apostrophe), ; (semicolon), , (comma), “, and =.
Up to 30 IKE keys can be created.
4
3
5
6
7
1 2
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 139
[Administration]
5 General Setting
IKEv1 (Main Mode) Select this to use IKEv1.
Certificate — Select this to use an electronic certificate. To select this,
IPsec certificate must be installed in this equipment in advance.
Preshared Key — Select this to perform authentication by sharing key
information with the recipient of the communication in advance. Enter
key information to be shared in the entry box. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than &, <, and “.
If you register more than one Preshared Key for IKEv1, only the one that
you registered last will be valid.
IKEv2 Select this to use IKEv2.
Certificate — Select this to use an electronic certificate. To select this,
IPsec certificate must be installed in this equipment in advance.
Preshared Key — Select this to perform authentication by sharing key
information with the recipient of the communication in advance. Enter
key information to be shared in the entry box. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than &, <, and “.
Local ID — Select among IP Address, FQDN, Email and Key-ID. When
you have selected the Key-ID, enter the value to the corresponding
item. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols
other than &, <, and “.
Remote ID — Select among IP Address, FQDN, Email and Key-ID. When
you selected FQDN, Email or Key-ID, enter a value corresponding to the
item you selected. When you selected Key-ID, enter the corresponding
value. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols
except the following: & < “. When you selected Email, you can enter up
to 192 alphanumerical characters. When you selected FQDN, you can
enter up to 255 alphanumerical characters including hyphen (-) and
period (.). However, neither hyphen (-) nor period (.) can be used as first
or last character.
6 Session Key Settings
Generate a new key after Enter the interval between generating key information for IPsec
communications in seconds. Set the interval period for regenerating key
information for IPsec communication from 60 seconds to 604,800
seconds (7 days).
Enable PFS — Select the check box when using the PFS (Perfect Forward
Secrecy) function in IKE.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
140 [Setup] Item List
7 FilterIKE Transforms
Integrity Select the authentication algorithm to be used in IKE.
SHA1 — Select this to use SHA1.
SHA256 — Select this to use SHA256.
SHA384 — Select this to use SHA384.
AES-XCBC-MAC — Select this to use AES-XCBC-MAC.
Encryption Select the encryption algorithm to be used in IKE.
AES-256-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (256 bits).
AES-192-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (192 bits).
AES-128-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (128 bits).
AES-CTR — Select this to use AES-CTR.
3DES-CBC — Select this to use 3DES-CBC.
Diffie-Hellman algorithm Select the Diffie-Hellman group to be used in IKE.
MODP 768 (Group 1) — Select this to use the MODP group in 768 bits.
MODP 1024 (Group 2) — Select this to use the MODP group in 1024 bits.
MODP 2048 (Group 14) — Select this to use the MODP group 14 in 2048
bits.
MODP 2048 (Group 24) — Select this to use the MODP group 24 in 2048
bits.
Elliptic Curve P-256 (Group 19) — Select this to use Elliptic Curve P-
256.
Elliptic Curve P-384 (Group 20) — Select this to use Elliptic Curve P-
384.
Elliptic Curve P-521 (Group 21) — Select this to use Elliptic Curve P-
521.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 141
[Administration]
[Add Profile] / [Modify Profile] screen
You can display this screen by clicking the [Add] button for Profile or a registered profile name.
You can create a profile for an IPsec environment by combining the registered filter and either a manual key or an IKE
key.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the profile setting.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels registration of the profile.
3 [Reset] button Returns the settings to the defaults.
4
3
5
6
7
8
1 2
4
3
5
6
7
8
1 2
8.[Administration]
142 [Setup] Item List
4 IKE Profile Name Enter the profile name. You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical
characters, including hyphen (-) and underscore (_).
Up to 30 profiles can be created.
5 Tunnel Settings
Tunnel mode Select whether or not to use tunnel mode for IPsec communications.
Yes — Select this to use the tunnel mode.
No — Select this not to use the tunnel mode. (The transport mode will
be used instead.)
IPv4/IPv6 Address Enter the IP address for the gateway which encrypts and decrypts data in
tunnel mode.
6 Key Selection
Key Displays the IKE key settings registered in the equipment. IKE keys
already registered in this equipment are displayed.
7 Proposals
ESP Transforms Specify the transform for ESP.
Integrity — Selects the authentication algorithm to be used in ESP.
- SHA1 — Select this to use SHA1.
- AES-XCBC — Select this to use AES-XCBC.
- AES-128-GCM — Select this to use AES-128-GCM.
- AES-192-GCM — Select this to use AES-192-GCM.
- AES-256-GCM — Select this to use AES-256-GCM.
Encryption — Selects the encryption algorithm to be used in ESP.
- AES-256-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (256 bits).
- AES-192-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (192 bits).
- AES-128-CBC — Select this to use AES-CBC (128 bits).
- AES-128-GCM — Select this to use AES-GCM (128 bits).
- AES-192-GCM — Select this to use AES-192-GCM.
- AES-256-GCM — Select this to use AES-256-GCM.
- AES-CTR — Select this to use AES-CTR.
- 3DES-CBC — Select this to use 3DES-CBC.
- None — Select this not to perform data encryption.
AH Transforms Specify the transform for AH.
Integrity — Selects the authentication algorithm to be used in AH.
- SHA1 — Select this to use SHA1.
- AES-XCBC — Select this to use AES-XCBC.
Session Key Settings Specify the session key for IPsec communications.
Session Key Settings — Sets an interval for regenerating the session
key. The interval can be set in time or the amount of data. Select the
desired check box and then key in the value in the entry box.
- Generate a new key after [ ]/Seconds — Specify the interval between
key generations in seconds. Specify within the range from 180 to
86,400 seconds (24 hours).
- Generate a new key after [ ]/KBytes — Specify the data volume
between key generations in Kbytes. Specify within the range from
20,480 to 214,783,647 Kbytes.
IPCOMP Transform Select if using the IPCOMP transform.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 143
[Administration]
[Add Policy] / [Modify Policy] screen
You can display this screen by clicking the [Add] button for Policy or a registered policy name.
You can create a policy to use in IPsec by combining the registered profiles.
8 IP Filter You can display a list of filter settings registered in this equipment. Select
the check box for the filter to be applied to the profile. If more than one
filter is registered, you can change their order in the list. Click [Move] for
the desired filter, and then click [Move Up] or [Move Down] to move the
filter.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the profile setting.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels registration of the profile.
3 Policy Name Enter the policy name. You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters and
symbols other than #, %, &, +, \ (backslash), ‘ (single quotation), ; (semicolon),
, (comma), “ (double quotation) and =.
Up to 10 policies can be created.
4 Profile Name Select profiles to apply to the policy.
You can select multiple profiles.
Item name Description
4
3
1 2
4
3
1 2
8.[Administration]
144 [Setup] Item List
Setting up SMB
In SMB, you can specify the SMB network properties to access this equipment through a Microsoft Windows Network
and enable SMB printing. When you enable the SMB, users can also browse the local folder in the equipment. You can
also specify the WINS server when the WINS server is used to enable the Windows print sharing and Windows file
sharing services between the different subnets.
Item name Description
1 SMB Server Protocol Select whether the SMB protocol is enabled or disabled.
Enable — Select this to enable SMB.
Disable — Select this to disable SMB.
2 SMB 1.0 Support for Server Select whether to support SMB 1.0 for the server.
Enable — Select this to enable SMB 1.0 for the server.
Disable — Select this to disable SMB 1.0 for the server.
3 SMB 1.0 Support for Client Select whether to support SMB 1.0 for the client.
Enable — Select this to enable SMB 1.0 for the client.
Disable — Select this to disable SMB 1.0 for the client.
4 Restriction Specify restrictions on SMB.
None — Select this to not specify restrictions on SMB.
Print Share — Select this to enable the file sharing service using SMB, but
disable SMB printing.
File Share — Select this to enable SMB printing, but disable the file sharing
service using SMB.
3
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
4
2
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 145
[Administration]
5 NetBIOS Name Enter the NetBIOS name of this equipment. The equipment uses “MFP<NIC
Serial Number>” as the default NetBIOS name.
You can enter only alphanumerical characters and “-” (a hyphen) for NetBIOS
names. If you use any other characters, a warning message will be displayed.
6 Logon Enter the workgroup or domain that this equipment joins.
Workgroup — To include the equipment in the workgroup, enter the
workgroup name. All client computers can access this equipment without a
user name and password.
Domain — Select this and enter the domain name when the equipment will
log on in the domain. Any client computers which are not members of the
domain will need a valid user name and password to access this
equipment. Use this to enhance access security to this equipment.
For workgroup and domain names, you can use only alphanumerical
characters and symbols other than the following:
; : " < > + = \ | ? , * #
If you use any other characters, a warning message will be displayed.
7 Primary Domain Controller Specify the server name or IP address of the primary domain controller when
this equipment will log on the domain network. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \
(backslash).
8 Backup Domain Controller Specify the server name or IP address of the backup domain controller when
this equipment will log on the domain network, if required. If the Primary
Domain Controller is unavailable, the Backup Domain Controller will be used
to log on. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols
other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
If the wrong primary or backup domain controller is specified, the NETWORK
INITIALIZING message will be displayed for up to 4 minutes while the
equipment searches for the primary or backup domain controller. In that
case, correct the primary or backup domain controller setting after the
NETWORK INITIALIZING message disappears.
9 Logon User Name Enter a valid user name to log on to the specified domain. You can enter up to
128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >.
10 Password Enter the password for the specified log on user name to log on the domain
network. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters.
11 Primary WINS Server Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server when the WINS server is
used to provide the NetBIOS name in your local area network. This option
would be more useful to access this equipment using the NetBIOS Name from
a different subnet.
When the [Obtain a WINS Server Address automatically] option is enabled in
the TCP/IP settings, the primary and secondary WINS server address can be
obtained using the DHCP server.
P.120 “Basic Setting”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
146 [Setup] Item List
12 Secondary WINS Server Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server as you require when the
WINS server is used to provide NetBIOS name in your local area network. If
the Primary WINS Server is unavailable, the Secondary WINS Server will be
used.
When the [Obtain a WINS Server Address automatically] option is enabled in
the TCP/IP settings, the primary and secondary WINS server address can be
obtained using the DHCP server.
P.120 “Basic Setting”
If “0.0.0.0” is entered for the Primary WINS Server and Secondary WINS
Server, this equipment will not use the WINS server.
13 Host announcement sending
of super sleep mode
Specify this to display this equipment’s icon in the “Network” folder on the
Windows computer even in super sleep mode.
Disable
: Disables host announcement sending in super sleep mode.
Enable: Even in super sleep mode, the icon for this printer is displayed in
the “Network” folder on Windows computers.
When the printer’s super sleep mode is set to [Disable], the icon for this
printer is displayed in the “Network” folder on Windows computers
regardless of this setting.
14 Guest Logon Select whether a guest user can log on to the SMB server. [Enable] is set as the
default.
15 User Name Enter a name of the user who logs on to the SMB server if [Guest Logon] is set
to [Disable]. You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols
except " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >.
If you connect to the SMB server for this equipment before changing the user
name, qualification information on the user name and the password is
cached in your Windows computer. Restart your Windows computer to clear
qualification information.
16 Password Enter a password of the specified user if [Guest Logon] is set to [Disable]. You
can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
If you connect to the SMB server for this equipment before changing the
password, qualification information on the user name and the password is
cached in your Windows computer. Restart your Windows computer to clear
qualification information.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 147
[Administration]
17 SMB Client Authentication Specify the authentication method for the SMB clients.
Kerberos/NTLMv2
— Specify this when connecting to an SMB server using
Kerberos/NLTMv2 authentication. NTLMv2 authentication is used if
Kerberos authentication has failed.
Kerberos/NTLMv1 — Specify this when connecting to an SMB server using
Kerberos/NTLMv1 authentication. NTLMv1 authentication is used if
Kerberos authentication has failed.
Kerberos — Specify this when connecting to an SMB server using Kerberos
authentication.
NTLMv2 — Specify this when connecting to an SMB server using NTLMv2
authentication.
NTLMv1 — Specify this when connecting to an SMB server using NTLMv1
authentication.
SMB servers running macOS 10.12 or later do not support NTLMv1
authentication.
18 SMB Signing of SMB Server Select whether SMB Signing is enabled or disabled when a client accesses this
equipment using SMB, such as when a client accesses the shared folder in this
equipment.
If client agrees, digital signature is done for the communication. —
Select this to use the digital signature to secure communication only when
a client accesses this equipment with a digital signature. Even if a client
accesses this equipment without a digital signature, the communication is
allowed without the digital signature.
Digital signature is always done for the communication on the server
side. — Select this to allow the communication only when a client accesses
this equipment with a digital signature. When a client accesses this
equipment without a digital signature, the communication is not allowed.
Digital signature isn’t done for the communication for the server. —
Select this to allow the communication only when a client accesses this
equipment without a digital signature. When a client is set to always access
an SMB server with a digital signature, the communication is not allowed.
If you do not know whether the SMB Signing of SMB Client is enabled or
disabled in the client computers, it is recommended to select [If client agrees,
digital signature is done for the communication.]. If this is set incorrectly, the
SMB communication may become unavailable.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
148 [Setup] Item List
Setting up HTTP
In HTTP, you can enable or disable Web-based services such as TopAccess and e-Filing web utility.
19 SMB Signing of SMB Client Select whether SMB Signing is enabled or disabled when this equipment
accesses the clients using SMB, such as when this equipment stores the
scanned data in the network folder using SMB.
If server agrees, digital signature is done for the communication. —
Select this to use the digital signature to secure the communication to an
SMB server only when the SMB Signing of SMB Server that this equipment
accesses is enabled. If the SMB Signing of SMB Server is disabled in an SMB
server, the communication is performed without the digital signature.
Digital signature is always done for the communication on the client
side. — Select this to make this equipment always access an SMB server
with a digital signature. When the SMB Signing of SMB Server is disabled in
an SMB server, the communication is not allowed.
Digital signature isn’t done for the communication for the client. —
Select this to communicate to an SMB server without the digital signature.
If the SMB Signing of SMB Server is always enabled in an SMB server, the
communication is not allowed.
If you do not know whether the SMB Signing of SMB Server is enabled or
disabled in the SMB servers, it is recommended to select [If server agrees,
digital signature is done for the communication.]. If this is set incorrectly,
the SMB communication may become unavailable.
The digital signature is always done for the communication on the server
side as the default on Windows Server. Therefore specify “If server agrees,
digital signature is done for the communication.” or “Digital signature is
always done for the communication on the client side.” for SMB
communications with Windows Server.
Item name Description
1 Enable HTTP Server Select whether the Web-based services such as TopAccess and e-Filing web
utility are enabled or disabled. [Enable] is set as the default.
2 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether the SSL (Secure Socket Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security)
is enabled or disabled. When this is enabled, the data transferred between the
equipment and client computers will be encrypted using a private key when
operating TopAccess and e-Filing web utility. [Disable] is set as the default.
Not all operating systems support SSL/TLS for all protocols.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 149
[Administration]
3 Primary Port Number Enter the port number for the NIC HTTP server. You can enter a value in the
range from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “80” is used.
The same port numbers as the ones for the following settings are not usable.
Change the applicable port number before that for the Primary Port Number is
set.
HTTP Network Service / Secondary Port Number
HTTP Network Service / SSL/TLS Port Number
IPP Print / Port Number
IPP Print / SSL/TLS Port Number
4 Secondary Port Number Enter the port number for TopAccess and the e-Filing web utility. You can
enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “8080”
is used.
The same port numbers as the ones for the following settings are not usable.
Change the applicable port number before that for the Secondary Port
Number is set.
HTTP Network Service / Primary Port Number
HTTP Network Service / SSL/TLS Port Number
IPP Print / Port Number
IPP Print / SSL/TLS Port Number
5 SSL/TLS Port Number Enter the port number for the SSL/TLS. You can enter a value in the range from
1 to 65535. Generally the default value “10443” is used.
The same port numbers as the ones for the following settings are not usable.
Change the applicable port number before that for the SSL/TLS Port Number
is set.
HTTP Network Service / Primary Port Number
HTTP Network Service / Secondary Port Number
IPP Print / Port Number
IPP Print / SSL/TLS Port Number
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
150 [Setup] Item List
Setting up WSD
In WSD, you can set the Web Services Setting. The Web Services Print operations and Web Services Scan operations
are performed on client computers with Windows through a network.
Item name Description
1 Enable SSL/TLS Specify whether or not to use SSL/TLS in Web Service.
Enable — Select this to use SSL/TLS.
Disable — Select this no to use SSL/TLS.
2 Friendly Name Assign the friendly name for this equipment. You can enter up to 127
characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, /, \ (backslash), :, *, ?, “,
>, <, |, !, and , (comma).
3 Web Services Print Select whether the Web Services Print is enabled or disabled.
Enable — Select this to enable the Web Services Print.
Disable — Select this to disable the Web Services Print.
To enable Web Services Print using SSL/TLS, a certificate must be installed in
this equipment or a client computer. For the details, see the reference below:
P.403 “Installing Certificates”
4 Printer Name Assign the printer name for this equipment. You can enter up to 127
characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, /, \ (backslash), :, *, ?, “,
>, <, and |. “MFP model name-Serial number” is set as the default.
5 Printer Information Assign the printer information for this equipment. You can enter up to 127
characters other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
6 Web Services Scan Select whether the Web Services Scan is enabled or disabled.
Enable — Select this to enable the Web Services Scan.
Disable — Select this to disable the Web Services Scan.
7 Scanner Name Assign the scanner name for this equipment. You can enter up to 127
characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, /, \ (backslash), :, *, ?, “,
>, <, and |. “MFP model name-Serial number” is set as the default.
8 Scanner Information Assign the scanner information for this equipment. You can enter up to 127
characters other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
1
2
6
5
7
8
9
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 151
[Administration]
Setting up SMTP Server
In SMTP Server, you can enable or disable SMTP transmission for receiving the Internet Fax and E-mails. This function
is usually set when you want to enable the Offramp Gateway feature.
9 Authentication for PC
Initiated Scan
Specify whether to enable user authentication before accepting a scan from a
client computer.
Do not accept any job — Select this not to accept any jobs regardless of the
result of user authentication.
Accept the job if user name is valid — Select this to accept jobs only after
successful user authentication.
Accept any job — Select this to accept any jobs regardless of the result of
user authentication.
Item name Description
1 Enable SMTP Server Select whether this equipment works as an SMTP server or not. This must be
enabled when you use the Offramp Gateway feature. When this is enabled,
this equipment can receive Internet Faxes or E-mails that are forwarded
through the SMTP to the domain of this equipment. [Enable] is set as the
default.
2 Port Number Enter the port number to transmit an Internet Faxes or E-mails. Generally “25”
is used.
When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting (SSL/
TLS port number when SSL/TLS in the HTTP setting is enabled) is selected,
you cannot access TopAccess or the e-Filing web utility. If you make a mistake,
use the touch panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter
the correct port number.
3 Email Address Enter the E-mail address of this equipment. When this equipment works as an
SMTP server, it can receive all Internet Faxes and E-mails that contain its
domain name. If the E-mail address of the received document matches the
address you set here, this equipment prints it. You can enter up to 192
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \
(backslash).
4 Enable OffRamp Gateway Select whether the OffRamp Gateway transmission is enabled or disabled.
[Disable] is set as the default.
5 OffRamp Security Select whether the Offramp Security is enabled or disabled. When this is
enabled, this equipment cancels the offramp gateway transmissions that are
forwarding to the fax numbers not registered in the Address Book of this
equipment. This can prevent the unauthorized offramp gateway transmission.
[Enable] is set as the default.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
152 [Setup] Item List
Setting up FTP Server
In FTP Server, you can enable or disable the FTP server functions.
6 OffRamp Print Select whether this equipment should print documents sent using the
offramp gateway transmission. When this is enabled, this equipment
automatically prints documents sent using offramp gateway transmission, so
that they can be confirmed. [Enable] is set as the default.
Item name Description
1 Enable FTP Server Select whether the FTP server is enabled or disabled. Select [Enable] to enable
the following functions.
FTP printing
Reading/writing the address book data using the AddressBook Viewer
Backing up/Restoring the e-Filing data using the e-Filing Backup/Restore
Utility
[Enable] is set as the default.
2 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security)
is enabled or disabled for the FTP server. [Disable] is set as the default.
Not all operating systems support SSL/TLS for all protocols.
3 Default Port Number Enter the port number for the FTP server. You can enter a value in the range
from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “21” is used.
When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting (SSL/
TLS port number when SSL/TLS in the HTTP setting is enabled) is selected,
you cannot access TopAccess or the e-Filing web utility. If you set it by
mistake, use the touch panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting
and enter the correct port number.
4 SSL/TLS Port Number Enter the port number that is used to access this equipment using FTP with
SSL/TLS. The port number depends on the port setting in the FTP server. You
can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value
“990” is used.
When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting (SSL/
TLS port number when SSL/TLS in the HTTP setting is enabled) is selected,
you cannot access TopAccess or the e-Filing web utility. If you set it by
mistake, use the touch panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting
and enter the correct port number.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 153
[Administration]
LDAP Client settings
You can register the directory service properties of the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server. When a
new directory service is added, the users can search destinations using the LDAP server.
Item name Description
1 [New] button Registers the LDAP server that provides a directory service.
P.154 “[Create LDAP Information]/[Edit LDAP Information] screen”
2 Directory Service List Displays a list of registered LDAP servers.
You can edit the registered details by clicking a directory service name.
P.154 “[Create LDAP Information]/[Edit LDAP Information] screen”
3 Search Method Select search conditions for LDAP searching.
Partial match — Select this to search information partially matching the
search conditions.
Prefix match — Select this to search information that starts with contents
matching the search conditions.
Suffix match — Select this to search information that ends with contents
matching the search conditions.
Full match — Select this to search information fully matching the search
conditions.
4 [Server Assignment] button Registers the search target server.
P.156 “[Server Assignment] screen”
5 [Move Up]/[Move Down]
button
Moves up and down in the search list.
1
2
3
5
4
8.[Administration]
154 [Setup] Item List
[Create LDAP Information]/[Edit LDAP Information] screen
You can display this screen by clicking a directory service name in the directly service list or the [New] button.
Item name Description
1 [Execute] button Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
2 Directory Service Name Enter the directory service name to identify the directory service. You can
enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ;
(semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
3 Server IP Address Enter the IP address or FQDN of the LDAP server. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols.
4 Port Number Enter the port number to access the LDAP server. You can enter a value in the
range from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “389” is used to access the
LDAP server without SSL/TLS. When the SSL/TLS is required, generally the
“636” port is used to access the LDAP server.
5 Server Type Select the LDAP server you want to use for LDAP authentication.
Windows Server — Select this when LDAP is running on a Windows server.
LDAP Server (Other than Windows Server) — Select this when the LDAP is
running on a server other than a Windows one.
1
2
3
4
5
11
10
9
8
7
6
12
15
14
13
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 155
[Administration]
6 Authentication Select the SASL authentication protocol. If you do not know the
authentication type, select [Auto].
Auto — Select this to access the LDAP server using the appropriate
authentication that this equipment detects.
Kerberos — Select this to access the LDAP server using the Kerberos
authentication.
Digest-MD5 — Select this to access the LDAP server using the Digest-MD5
authentication.
CRAM-MD5 — Select this to access the LDAP server using the CRAM-MD5
authentication.
Login — Select this to access the LDAP server using the login
authentication.
Plain — Select this to access the LDAP server using the plain
authentication.
Simple Bind — Select this to access the LDAP server using the Simple Bind
authentication.
7 Search Base Enter the search base. When you configure the Active Directory in Windows
server, make sure to enter this option. You can enter up to 256
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than ; (semicolon), #, and \
(backslash).
8 User Name Enter the log-in user name if a user name is required to access the directory
service. You can enter up to 256 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
9 Password Enter the password if required to access the directory service. You can enter
up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
10 Search Timeout Select the timeout period for quitting communication when no response is
received from the LDAP server. Specify within the range from 1 to 5. “1” is set
as the default.
11 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security)
is enabled or disabled for communicating the LDAP directory service.
Disable — Select this to disable the SSL/TLS for communicating the LDAP
directory service.
Verify with imported CA certification(s) — Select this to enable the SSL/
TLS using the imported CA certificate.
Accept all certificates without CA — Select this to enable the SSL/TLS
without using imported CA certificate.
When [Verify with imported CA certification(s)] is selected, you must import
the CA certificate in this equipment.
P.412 “Installing CA certificate”
If at least one of the registered LDAP directory services requires the SSL/
TLS, you must enable the [Enable SSL/TLS] option. When the [Enable SSL/
TLS] option is enabled, this equipment will connect the registered LDAP
directory services using SSL/TLS first. Then if the connection fails using
SSL/TLS, this will connect to the registered LDAP directory service without
using SSL/TLS. Therefore, even if you enable the [Enable SSL/TLS] option,
this equipment can also connect to an LDAP directory service that does not
require the SSL/TLS.
Not all operating systems support SSL/TLS for all protocols.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
156 [Setup] Item List
[Server Assignment] screen
12 SSL/TLS Port Number Enter the port number to access the LDAP server using SSL/TLS. You can
enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “636” is
used.
13 Attribute type for Search
Contact
Enter the attribute type to be used for searching contacts using the external
LDAP server. You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols
other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
14 Attribute type for
Authentication
Specify the attribute name for authentication. Enter [Attribute type of 'User
Name'], [Attribute type of 'Server Name'], and either [Attribute type of 'PIN']
or [Attribute type of 'Card information'] for authentication.
You can enter up to 32 half-width alphanumerical characters and symbols
(excluding = ; # \).
Click the [Default Value] button to display the predetermined value.
15 Attribute type for Email
Address Setting
Specify [Attribute type of 'Email Address'] and [Attribute type of 'From Name']
for authentication. You can enter up to 32 half-width alphanumerical
characters and symbols (excluding = ; # \).
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Adds the server from the server list to the assigned servers.
2 [Delete] button Deletes the server from the assigned servers.
Item name Description
1
2
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 157
[Administration]
Setting up SMTP Client
In SMTP Client, you can enable or disable SMTP transmission for sending the Internet Fax and E-mails.
A From Address setting is also required to send Internet Fax and E-mails. For information about the From Address
setting, see the references below:
P.195 “Email settings”
P.202 “InternetFax settings”
The From Address can be also determined automatically when the User Management Setting is enabled. For more
information about User Management Setting, see the reference below:
P.75 “[User Management]”
Item name Description
1 [Execute] button Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
2 Enable SMTP Client When this is enabled, this equipment sends an Internet Fax and an E-mail to
the specified SMTP server for transmission over the Internet. [Enable] is set as
the default.
3 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security)
is enabled or disabled for SMTP transmission.
Disable — Select this to disable the SSL/TLS for SMTP transmission.
Verify with imported CA certification(s) — Select this to enable the SSL/
TLS using the imported CA certificate.
Accept all certificates without CA — Select this to enable the SSL/TLS
without using imported CA certificate.
When [Verify with imported CA certification(s)] is selected, you must import
the CA certificate in this equipment.
P.412 “Installing CA certificate”
Not all operating systems support SSL/TLS for all protocols.
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
9
10
11
12
8.[Administration]
158 [Setup] Item List
4 SSL/TLS Select the protocol for the SSL/TLS when the [Enable SSL/TLS] option is
enabled.
STARTTLS — Select this to send a message in TLS (Transport Layer
Security) using STARTTLS that is the extension command for SMTP
transmission.
Over SSL/TLS — Select this to send a message in SSL (Secure Socket
Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security).
When you select [Over SSL/TLS], make sure to change the port number
correctly. Generally, “465” port is used for the Over SSL/TLS instead of “25”
port.
5 SMTP Server Address Enter the IP address or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the SMTP
server when [Enable SMTP Client] is enabled. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \
(backslash).
If you use FQDN to specify the SMTP server, you must configure the DNS
server and enable the DNS in the DNS Session.
When the [Obtain a SMTP Server Address automatically] option is enabled in
the TCP/IP settings, the SMTP server address can be obtained using the DHCP
server.
P.120 “Basic Setting”
6 POP Before SMTP Select whether the POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled or disabled.
[Disable] is set as the default.
If [Application] has been selected for [Authentication] under [SMTP Client] or
[POP3 Client], this [POP Before SMTP] setting does not work.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 159
[Administration]
7 Authentication Select the type of authentication to access the SMTP server.
Disable — Select this to access the SMTP server using no authentication.
Plain — Select this to access the SMTP server using plain authentication.
Login — Select this to access the SMTP server using the log-in
authentication.
CRAM-MD5 — Select this to access the SMTP server using CRAM-MD5
authentication.
Digest-MD5 — Select this to access the SMTP server using Digest-MD5
authentication.
Kerberos — Select this to access the SMTP server using Kerberos
authentication.
NTLM(IWA) — Select this to access the SMTP server using NTLM (IWA)
authentication.
AUTO — Select this to access the SMTP server using the appropriate
authentication that this equipment detects.
Application — Select this to access the SMTP server using the application
that supports the authentication for the email cloud service. Click
[Assignment] to show the list of the applications with which you can use the
email cloud service. Select an application you want to use from the list and
click [OK] to close the list screen. You can usually select the standard
system application “Cloud Authentication for Email”. When the selected
application name has appeared on the right side of the [Assignment]
button, click [Save] located at the top of the screen. When the message
prompts you to set up the application, click [OK] to close the message
screen and then click the application name to open the setting screen.
Select the email cloud service you want to use from the list and enter the
account name for the email cloud service. Then select [Send Email] and
click [Account Registration] to sign in the service.
If you select [Application], take note of the following points:
The [POP Before SMTP] setting under [SMTP Client] does not work.
The credentials are used between the application and the email cloud
service for the authentication. If they expire, the application cannot log in
to the SMTP server. Install or update the application with the renewed
credentials. For details, contact your service technician or representative.
When an attempt is made to use an address differing from the account
registered in the email cloud service for [From Address] of [Email Settings],
there is a upper limitation in the number of the addresses which can be
sent by the email cloud service. For details, contact your service technician
or representative.
P.195 “Email settings”
[Application] cannot be selected in [Email Authentication].
P.256 “Setting up Email Authentication”
[Single Sign On Setting] will be disabled.
P.259 “Setting up Single Sign On Setting”
When you use different cloud services on the SMTP server and the POP3
server, enter different account names (email addresses) for each.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
160 [Setup] Item List
Authentication (Continued)
If you change or reregister the current account name, click [Delete] to
delete it and then redo the entry and registration.
You can also open the setting screen for [Cloud Authentication for Email]
from [Administration] > [Application] > [Application List] > [System
Application].
P.365 “Application List”
8 Login Name Enter the log-in name to access the SMTP server if the SMTP authentication is
enabled. You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
Enter the account name for accessing a POP3 server when the POP Before
SMTP authentication is enabled.
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
Enter the same account name you have registered on the setting screen of
the application when [Application] is selected in the [Authentication]
option.
9 Password Enter the password to access the SMTP server if the SMTP authentication is
enabled. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
Enter the password for accessing a POP3 server when the POP Before SMTP
authentication is enabled.
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
You cannot enter any passwords, which are not required, when [Application]
is selected in the [Authentication] option.
10 Maximum Email / InternetFax
Size (2-100)
Select the maximum size that this equipment is allowed to send using the
SMTP. Specify within the range from 2 to 100 MB.
The available maximum size includes that for attached files. Approx. 70 MB is
the available maximum size for attached files when 100 MB is set in this
option.
11 Port Number Enter the port number for accessing the SMTP server when [Enable SMTP
Client] is enabled. The port number depends on the port setting in the SMTP
server. You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. Generally the
default value “25” is used.
When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting (SSL/
TLS port number when SSL/TLS in the HTTP setting is enabled) is selected,
you cannot access TopAccess or the e-Filing web utility. If you set it by
mistake, use the touch panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting
and enter the correct port number.
12 SMTP Client Connection
Timeout(1-180)
Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no response is
received from the SMTP server. Specify within the range from 1 to 180
seconds. “30” is set as the default.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 161
[Administration]
Setting up POP3 Client
In POP3 Client, you can specify the POP3 server to receive an Internet Fax and E-mails.
Item name Description
1 [Execute] button Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
2 Enable POP3 Client Select whether retrieving an Internet Fax and an E-mail from the POP3 server
is enabled or disabled. [Enable] is set as the default.
3 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security)
is enabled or disabled for POP3 transmission.
Disable — Select this to disable the SSL/TLS for POP3 transmission.
Verify with imported CA certification(s) — Select this to enable the SSL/
TLS using the imported CA certificate.
Accept all certificates without CA — Select this to enable the SSL/TLS
without using imported CA certificate.
When [Verify with imported CA certification(s)] is selected, you must import
the CA certificate in this equipment.
P.412 “Installing CA certificate”
Not all operating systems support SSL/TLS for all protocols.
4 POP3 Server Address Enter the IP address or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the POP3
server when [Enable POP3 Client] is enabled. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \
(backslash).
If you use FQDN to specify the POP3 server, you must configure the DNS
server and enable the DNS in the DNS Session.
When the [Obtain a POP3 Server Address automatically] option is enabled in
the TCP/IP settings, you can obtain the POP3 server address from the DHCP
server.
P.120 “Basic Setting”
1
2
3
4
5
6
11
7
8
9
12
10
8.[Administration]
162 [Setup] Item List
5 Authentication Enable or disable the authentication for accessing the POP3 server.
Disable — Select this to disable the authentication.
NTLM/SPA — Select this to access the POP3 server using the NTLM/SPA
authentication.
Kerberos — Select this to access the POP3 server using the Kerberos
authentication.
Application — Select this to access the POP3 server using the application
that supports the authentication for the email cloud service. Click
[Assignment] to show the list of the applications with which you can use the
email cloud service. Select an application you want to use from the list and
click [OK] to close the list screen. You can usually select the standard
system application “Cloud Authentication for Email”. When the selected
application name has appeared on the right side of the [Assignment]
button, click [Save] located at the top of the screen. When the message
prompts you to set up the application, click [OK] to close the message
screen and then click the application name to open the setting screen.
Select the email cloud service you want to use from the list and enter the
account name for the email cloud service. Then select [Receive Email] and
click [Account Registration] to sign in the service.
If you select [Application], take note of the following points:
The [POP Before SMTP] setting under [SMTP Client] does not work.
The credentials are used between the application and the email cloud
service for the authentication. If they expire, the application cannot log in
to the POP3 server. Install or update the application with the renewed
credentials. For details, contact your service technician or representative.
When you use different cloud services on the SMTP server and the POP3
server, enter different account names (email addresses) for each.
If you change or reregister the current account name, click [Delete] to
delete it and then redo the entry and registration.
You can also open the setting screen for [Cloud Authentication for Email]
from [Administration] > [Application] > [Application List] > [System
Application].
P.365 “Application List”
6 Type POP3 Login Select the POP3 login type.
AUTO — Select this to automatically designate the POP3 log-in type of the
POP3 server.
POP3 — Select this to use the general POP3 log-in type.
APOP — Select this to use the APOP log-in type. APOP allows users to
access the POP3 server by encrypting the user name and password.
If it is not possible to log in to the mail server using [Auto], manually set the
type of POP3 log in to either [POP3] or [APOP].
Select [AUTO] when [Application] is selected in the [Authentication] option.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 163
[Administration]
Setting up FTP Client
In FTP Client, you can specify the default port number used for the Save as file using the FTP protocol.
7 Account Name Enter the account name for this equipment to access the POP3 server. You
can enter up to 96 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
Enter the account name without the domain name when [NTLM/SPA] or
[Kerberos] is selected in the [Authentication] option.
Enter the same account name you have registered on the setting screen of
the application when [Application] is selected in the [Authentication]
option.
8 Password Enter the password for this equipment to access the POP3 server. You can
enter up to 96 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
You cannot enter any passwords, which are not required, when [Application]
is selected in the [Authentication] option.
9 Scan Rate Enter how often this equipment should access the POP3 server for new
messages. You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 4096. “5” is set as the
default.
10 Port Number Enter the port number to access the POP3 server. The port number depends
on the port setting in the POP3 server. You can enter a value in the range from
1 to 65535. Generally the default value “110” is used.
11 SSL/TLS Port Number Enter the port number to access the POP3 server using SSL/TLS. The SSL/TLS
port number depends on the port setting in the POP3 server. Generally “995”
is used.
12 POP3 Client Connection
Timeout(1-180)
Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no response is
received from the POP3 server. Specify within the range from 1 to 180
seconds. “30” is set as the default.
Item name Description
1 SSL/TLS Setting Specify the certificate used in the SSL/TLS.
Verify with imported CA certification(s) — Select this to use the registered
certificate(s).
Accept all certificates without CA — Select this to use all certificates.
2 Default Port Number Enter the port number to access the FTP site. The port number depends on the
port setting in the FTP site. You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535.
Generally the default value “21” is used.
Item name Description
1
2
8.[Administration]
164 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Bonjour
In Bonjour, you can enable or disable Bonjour (mDNS) that is available for macOS or Windows OS. You need to set
[Secondary] for the secondary network when you use the two-channel networks.
Setting up Mobile Scan(eSCL)
In Mobile Scan(eSCL), you can enable or disable the Mobile Scan settings.
The Mobile Scan(eSCL) settings are linked to the scan settings of the AirPrint function.
Item name Description
1 Enable Bonjour Select whether Bonjour is enabled or disabled. [Enable] is set as the default.
2 Link-Local Host Name Enter the DNS host name of this equipment. You can enter up to 127
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \
(backslash).
3 Service Name Enter the device name of this equipment that will be displayed in the Bonjour
network. You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters and symbols other
than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
4 Chrome OS Print Select whether to enable the Chrome OS print service. It is enabled as a
default.
Item name Description
1 Enable Mobile Scan Select whether Mobile Scan is enabled or disabled.
2 Secure Scan (SSL/TLS) Select whether Secure Scan is enabled or disabled.
3 Authentication Set whether or not to perform Basic Authentication when Secure Scan is
enabled. [Disable] is the default setting.
4 User Name Set a user name which is used for Basic Authentication. You can enter up to
127 alphanumeric characters and symbols (excluding = ; # \).
5 Password Set a password which is used for Basic Authentication. You can enter up to 127
alphanumeric characters and symbols (excluding = ; # \).
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 165
[Administration]
Setting up SNMP
In SNMP Network Service, you can enable or disable the SNMP to monitor the device status using a network
monitoring utility. If an administrator wants to monitor the device status with a monitoring utility, programmed to
match the MIB, you must enable the SNMP and SNMP Traps.
The export operation may be unstable if administrators are accessing this equipment from multiple computers
simultaneously in the access policy mode to export information. Be sure that the administrator accesses this
equipment from only one computer when exporting.
Item name Description
1 Enable SNMP V1/V2 Select whether SNMP V1/V2 monitoring with MIB is enabled or disabled. This
must be enabled to allow users to connect using TopAccessDocMon, TWAIN
driver, File Downloader, or the AddressBook Viewer. [Enable] is set as the
default.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
15
4
1
2
3
17
8.[Administration]
166 [Setup] Item List
2 Read Community Enter the SNMP read community name for the SNMP access. You can enter up
to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #,
and \ (backslash). “public” is set as the default.
It is recommended to change the default Read Community name for
security reasons.
If changing the Read Community name, match the setting with the
applications in use. Otherwise, applications that use MIB (TopAccess,
TWAIN driver, File Downloader, and AddressBook Viewer) will become
unavailable. The SNMP communication of the printer driver also will be
unavailable, so that obtaining the configurations, confirming the
department code, and obtaining the available boxes in e-Filing will be
disabled.
When you leave the [Read Write Community] option blank, the SNMP
communication between the SNMP Browser of the Client computer and
this equipment will be disabled.
3 Read Write Community Enter the SNMP Read Write community name for the SNMP access. You can
enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ;
(semicolon), #, and \ (backslash). “private” is set as the default.
It is recommended to change the default Read Write Community name for
security reasons.
If changing the Read Write Community name, match the setting with the
applications in use. Otherwise, applications that use MIB (TopAccess,
TWAIN driver, File Downloader, and AddressBook Viewer) will become
unavailable. The SNMP communication of the printer driver also will be
unavailable, so that obtaining the configurations, confirming the
department code, and obtaining the available boxes in e-Filing will be
disabled.
4 Enable SNMP V3 Select whether SNMP V3 monitoring with MIB is enabled or disabled. This
must be enabled to allow users to connect using TopAccessDocMon, TWAIN
driver, File Downloader and the AddressBook Viewer.
5 SNMP V3 User Information SNMP V3 user information registered into this equipment is displayed in a list.
SNMP V3 user information can be registered, edited, deleted or exported.
6 Enable SNMP V3 Trap Select whether SNMP V3 Trap is sent or not. [Disable] is set as the default.
7 SNMP V3 Trap User Name Enter an SNMP V3 Trap User Name. You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical
characters and symbols.
8 SNMP V3 Trap Authentication
Protocol
Select an authentication protocol.
HMAC-MD5 — Select this to use HMAC-MD5.
HMAC-SHA — Select this to use HMAC-SHA.
9 SNMP V3 Trap Authentication
Password
Enter an authentication password. You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical
characters and symbols.
10 SNMP V3 Trap Privacy
Protocol
Select a protocol for data encryption.
None — Select this not to encrypt data.
CBC-DES — Select this to use CBC-DES.
CFB-AES-128 — Select this to use AES-128 (CFB mode).
11 SNMP V3 Trap Privacy
Password
Enter a privacy password. You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters
and symbols.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 167
[Administration]
[Create SNMP V3 User Information] screen
You can display this screen by clicking the [New] button in the Create SNMP V3 User Information page.
Clicking [Save] on the [Create SNMP V3 User Information] screen instantly registers the SNMP V3 user information,
enabling the registered user to access this equipment via SNMP over a network.
12 Enable Authentication Trap Select whether to send SNMP Traps when this equipment is accessed using
SNMP V1/V2 from a different read community. [Enable] is set as the default.
13 Enable Alerts Trap Select whether to send SNMP V1/V2 Traps when an alert condition occurs.
[Enable] is set as the default.
14 IP Trap Address 1 to 10 Enter the IP address where the SNMP Traps will be sent. You can specify up to
10 addresses. Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255.
15 IP Trap Community Enter the trap community name for the IP Traps. You can enter up to 31
alphanumerical characters and symbols. “public” is set as the default.
16 IPX Trap Address Enter the IPX address where the SNMP Traps will be sent. You can enter up to
20 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
When you want to use a user name registered in the SNMP V3 User
Information list as an SNMP V3 Trap User Name, you must enter the same
protocols and passwords registered for the authentication protocol,
authentication password (not displayed on the list), privacy protocol and
password (not displayed on the list) into the fields such as [SNMP V3 Trap
Authentication Protocol], [SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Password], [SNMP
V3 Trap Privacy Protocol] and [SNMP V3 Trap Privacy Password].
If they do not match, information registered in the list will be adopted.
17 Enable SNMP The same settings as ones for the primary network are applied to the
secondary network when you use the two-channel networks. But the traps
are not sent.
Item name Description
1 Context Name Displays the context name.
2 User Name Enter the user name. You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and
symbols.
3 Authentication Protocol Select an authentication protocol.
HMAC-MD5 — Select this to use HMAC-MD5.
HMAC-SHA — Select this to use HMAC-SHA.
4 Authentication Password Enter the password when the Authentication option is enabled. You can enter
up to 31 characters.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8.[Administration]
168 [Setup] Item List
Setting up SLP
When SLP is enabled, this equipment becomes a Service Agent that responds to requests from a User Agent for
searching particular services and registers services to a Directory Agent.
The SLP setting only supports the print services shown below.
Raw TCP print, LPD print, IPP print, WSD print, SMB print, FTP print
About the “printer-location” attribute of SLP
SLP has an attribute called “printer-location” as one of the services provided. The information of “printer-location” is
the device setting information on the [General] submenu of the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page, and that
of the [Location] field of [Device Information] on the [Device] page. Turn the equipment off and on if you have changed
[Location] from TopAccess. The change is reflected in “printer-location” of SLP after the equipment is restarted.
5 Privacy Protocol Select a protocol for data encryption.
None — Select this not to encrypt data.
CBC-DES — Select this to use CBC-DES.
CFB-AES-128 — Select this to use AES-128 (CFB mode).
6 Privacy Password Enter the password for the user information. You can enter up to 31
alphanumerical characters and symbols.
7 Permissions Level Select the access permission level of the SNMP V3 user.
General User — Select this to permit only the reading of data.
Administrator — Select this to permit both the reading and writing of data.
Item name Description
1 Enable SLP Select whether SLP service is enabled or disabled. [Disable] is set as the
default.
2 TTL Set TTL (Time To Live, a scope in the network that provides SLP service).
This is to enable the communication among User Agents and Directory Agents
located on different networks.
3 Scope Set this for specifying the scope of groups that provide SLP services. The
default value is “DEFAULT”.
More than one group can be entered for [Scope] by separating them with a
comma.
Characters ( ) \ ! < = > ~ ; * + cannot be entered in the scope.
Do not leave this field blank or the SLP setting will be disabled.
You can search a particular service using Konqueror (SUSE Linux) or
SLPSNOOP utility (Novell client) which is a User Agent (UA).
Item name Description
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 169
[Administration]
Syslog Setting
Specify these items when sending message logs to a syslog server using syslog.
Be sure to confirm that message logs are sent to a Syslog server regularly.
Item name Description
1 Enable Syslog Specify whether or not to enable Syslog transmission.
2 Server IP Address/Host Name Specify the IP address or host name of the Syslog server. You can enter up to
128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #,
and \ (backslash).
3 Port Number Specify the port number to communicate with the Syslog server. You can
enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “514” is
used.
4 Protocol Specify the communications protocol.
TCP
— Select this to use TCP only.
UDP — Select this to use UDP only.
5 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security)
is enabled or disabled for the Syslog server.
Disable — Select this to disable the SSL/TLS for POP3 transmission.
Verify with imported CA certification(s) — Select this to enable the SSL/TLS
using the imported CA certificate.
Accept all certificates without CA — Select this to enable the SSL/TLS
without using imported CA certificate.
When [Verify with imported CA certification(s)] is selected, you must import
the CA certificate in this equipment.
P.412 “Installing CA certificate”
Not all operating systems support SSL/TLS for all protocols.
6 Severity Specify the log type to be notified.
Error — Notifies when an error occurs.
Warning — Notifies when a warning occurs.
Information — Notifies information.
7 Facility Specify the log content to be notified.
Security/Authorization — Security/Authorization log.
Local Use0 — Log that is other than the above.
Local Use1 (Job Log) — Job log
Specify both if you want to specify “Severity” and “Facility”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
170 [Setup] Item List
Setting up IPX/SPX
You can set the IPX/SPX protocol to enable the communication over IPX/SPX. The IPX/SPX must be configured to
enable Novell printing as well as the IPX/SPX “Save as File” function with NetWare server over IPX/SPX.
Setting up NetWare
In NetWare Session, you can set the NetWare Bindery or NDS service. This must be set when configuring a Novell
printing environment.
Item name Description
1 Enable IPX/SPX Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol is enabled or disabled. Enable this when
configuring Novell printing over the IPX/SPX network.
[Disable] is set as the default.
2 Frame Type Select the desired frame type for IPX/SPX.
Auto Sense — Select this to use an appropriate frame type that the
equipment found first.
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II/IEEE 802.3 Snap/IEEE 802.2 — Instead of [Auto
Sense], select the frame types to be used from these options.
3 Actual Frame Displays the actual frame type of the equipment.
Item name Description
1 Enable NetWare Select whether NetWare is enabled or disabled.
Enable — Enables NetWare.
Disable — Disables NetWare.
2 Enable Bindery Select whether the NetWare Bindery mode for Novell printing is enabled or
disabled. When you configure a Novell printing environment with the NetWare
server in the bindery mode, you must enable this.
3 Enable NDS Select whether the NetWare NDS mode for Novell printing is enabled or
disabled. When you configure a Novell printing environment with the NetWare
server in NDS mode, you must enable this. When this is enabled, you should
also specify the context and tree for the NDS.
4 Context Enter the NDS context where the NetWare print server for this equipment is
located.
5 Tree Enter the NDS tree.
6 Preferred File Server Enter the NetWare server name in which this equipment preferentially
searches for the queues.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 171
[Administration]
VNC Setting
You can use a computer or a mobile terminal such as a tablet and a smartphone to check and operate the control
panel.
The default password for this VNC function is “d9kvgn”. Be sure to change it before using this function. Specify a
password with six or more and eight or less alphanumeric letters.
You can use only one computer or mobile terminal for the VNC function.
It is recommended that you use UltraVNC (client software) on Windows 10 or later for the VNC function.
When this VNC function is enabled, the equipment does not enter the Super Sleep mode.
“Your Screen is currently being monitored.” is displayed on the bottom left of the touch panel of an MFP in which a
remote operation is being performed.
Item name Description
1 Enable VNC Function Select whether the VNC function is enabled or disabled.
Enable — Enables the VNC function.
Disable — Disables the VNC function.
2 Old Password Enter the old password for the VNC function.
3 New Password Enter a new password for the VNC function.
4 Retype Password Retype the new password for the VNC function.
5 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)/TLS (Transport Layer Security)
is enabled or disabled for the VNC function.
Enable — Enables the VNC function.
Disable — Disables the VNC function.
6 Enable Remote Panel
Operation
Select whether the remote panel operation function is enabled or disabled.
Enable — Select this to enable the remote panel operation function.
Disable — Select this to disable the remote panel operation function.
For the details about [Enable Remote Panel Operation], contact your service
technician or representative.
7 Open Range Select the disclosure range of the remote panel operation function.
Admin
— Permits the administrator.
User — Permits general users.
8 Intermediate Server Address Enter an IP address and port number of the relay server used for the remote
panel operation.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8.[Administration]
172 [Setup] Item List
Copier settings
You can specify copier settings.
The [Copier] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Setting up Default setting
In Default setting, you can set the default copier settings that apply for copy operation from the touch panel.
Item name Description
1
Color Mode
*1
Select the default color mode for copying.
Auto Color — The equipment automatically judges the type of each color
on originals. Colored originals are copied in full color and black and white
originals are copied in black and white.
Full Color — All originals are copied in full color.
Black — All originals are copied in black and white.
Only [Black] can be selected when the No Limit Black function is enabled. For
the details of the No Limit Black function, see the reference below:
User Functions - MANAGING COUNTERS (COUNTER MENU) - Department
Management - Setting the No Limit Black function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 173
[Administration]
2
Original Mode for Color
*1
Select the default original mode for color originals.
Text/Photo — Originals with text and photographs mixed.
Text — Originals with text (or text and line art) only.
Photo — Originals with general photographs on photographic printing
paper.
Printed Image — Originals with photogravure (e.g. magazine, brochure).
Map — Originals with fine illustrations or text.
3
Original Mode for Black
*1
/
Original Mode
Select the default original mode for black and white originals.
Text/Photo — Originals with text and photographs mixed.
Text — Originals with text (or text and line art) only.
Photo — Originals with photographs.
Image Smoothing
*2
— Originals with text and photographs mixed
(especially originals requiring higher reproducibility on photos).
4
Exposure for Color
*1
Select the type of image density for color copies.
Auto — Select this to set the Auto mode as the default exposure for color
copy. The Auto mode automatically detects the density of the original to
make copies at the optimum exposure.
Manual — Select this to set the Manual mode as the default exposure for
color copy. The manual mode allows you to manually specify the density of
the original.
5
Exposure for Black
*1
/
Exposure
Select the type of image density for black and white copies.
Auto — Select this to set the Auto mode as the default exposure for black
and white copies. The Auto mode automatically detects the density of the
original to make copies at the optimum exposure.
Manual — Select this to set the Manual mode as the default exposure for
black and white copies. The manual mode allows you to manually specify
the density of the original.
6 Bypass feed Select the default paper type for the Bypass Tray.
7
BOOK > 2
*2
Select the default page arrangement of the book-type originals for Book to 2-
sided copies. Available only when the Automatic Duplexing Unit is installed.
Open from left — Select this to copy the booklet originals that can be read
from the left page.
Open from right — Select this to copy the booklet originals that can be
read from the right page.
8
Magazine Sort
*2
Select the default page arrangement for magazine sort copies. Available only
when the Automatic Duplexing Unit is installed.
Open from left — Select this to create a booklet that can be read from the
left page.
Open from right — Select this to create a booklet that can be read from the
right page.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
174 [Setup] Item List
*1 Available only for models that support color printing.
*2 This function is not available for some models.
9 2in1 / 4in1 Select the default page arrangement for 2in1/4in1 copies.
Write Laterally — Select this to copy two pages or four pages from left to
right or from top to bottom. When the portrait originals are copied using
2in1 or 4in1, this equipment copies them from left to right. When the
landscape originals are copied using 2in1 or 4in1, this equipment copies
them from top to bottom.
Write Vertically — Select this to copy each two pages or four pages from
right to left or from top to bottom. When the portrait originals are copied
using 2in1 or 4in1, this equipment copies them from right to left. When the
landscape originals are copied using 2in1 or 4in1, this equipment copies
them from top to bottom.
10 Maximum Copies Select the maximum numbers of pages that users can specify for copying. You
can select from [9999]*2, [999], [99] or [9].
11 Auto 2-sided Mode Select how the 2-sided mode initially applies to copy settings when originals
are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder. Available only when the
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder and the Automatic Duplexing Unit are
installed.
OFF — Select this to initially apply [1->1 SIMPLEX] when originals are set in
the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder.
One-sided/Double-sided — Select this to initially apply [1->2 DUPLEX]
when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder.
Double-sided/Double-sided — Select this to initially apply [2->2 DUPLEX]
when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder.
User Selection — Select this to initially display the screen to select the 2-
sided mode when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder.
12 Sort Mode Priority Select the default sort mode for copying.
Non-Sort — Copies exit without sorting.
Staple
*2
— Copies exit with their corner stapled.
Sort — Copies exit in the same page order as the originals one set after
another.
Group — Copies grouped by page exit.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 175
[Administration]
Setting up Copy Job Enforcement Continue
*1 This function is not available for some models.
Item name Description
1 Automatic Change Of Paper
Source
Specify whether or not to change the paper source automatically when the
size of the original and the paper in the paper source do not match.
ON — Select this to change the paper source and continue processing the
job.
OFF — Select this to stop the job.
2
Paper Of Different Direction
*1
Specify whether or not to copy on paper which is loaded in the paper source in
a different orientation from the original.
ON — Select this to continue processing the job by copying on paper in a
different orientation.
OFF — Select this to stop the job.
3 Auto Exit Tray Change
(Cascade Print)
*1
Specify whether or not to switch the receiving tray automatically.
ON — Select this to continue processing the job by switching the receiving
tray.
OFF — Select this to stop the job.
4 Suspend Printing if Stapler
Empty
*1
Specify whether to stop printing when staples run out.
ON — Select this to stop printing when staples run out.
OFF — Select this not to stop printing when staples run out.
5 Continue Printing when
Punch Dust is full
*1
Specify whether to continue printing when the punch dust bin is full.
ON — Select this to continue printing even when the punch dust bin is full.
OFF — Select this to stop printing when the punch dust bin is full.
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
176 [Setup] Item List
Fax settings
You can specify fax settings.
The [Fax] submenu in the [Setup] menu is available only when the Fax Unit is installed.
The [Fax] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Setting up Fax Setting
In Fax Setting, you can set the default fax settings that apply to fax operations from the touch panel.
Some items may not be displayed or may not function on some models.
Item name Description
1 Terminal ID Enter the terminal ID name (company name) with up to 54 characters to
identify this equipment. The name will be printed at the leading edge of all
documents transmitted.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 177
[Administration]
2
Terminal ID (Line2)
*1
Enter the terminal ID name (company name) to identify this equipment on
Line 2, if installed. The name will be printed at the leading edge of all
documents transmitted via Line 2 of this equipment.
3 Fax Number Enter the fax number of this equipment. This fax number will be printed at the
leading edge of all documents transmitted from Line 1.
4
Line2 Number
*1
Enter the fax number for Line 2 of this equipment, if installed. This fax
number will be printed at the leading edge of all documents transmitted from
Line 2.
5 Monitor Volume Select the volume of the line monitor during transmission.
6 Completion Tone Volume Select the volume of the line monitor when completing the printing of a
received fax.
7 Reception Mode Select how this equipment activates when a fax is received.
Auto — Select this to automatically receive incoming originals when the
bell rings. Select this when the line is being used exclusively by the fax
transmission.
Manual — Select this to manually receive incoming originals after pressing
the [Start] button on the control panel.
8 Dial Type Select the dial type for Line 1.
DP — Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for Line 1.
MF — Select this to use Multi-frequency type for Line 1.
The following items are displayed for some models.
10 PPS — Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for 10 PPS.
20 PPS — Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for 20 PPS.
PB — Select this to use a tone type push phone line.
9
Dial Type(Line 2)
*1
Select the dial type for Line 2, if installed.
DP — Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for Line 2.
MF — Select this to use Multi-frequency type for Line 2.
The following items are displayed for some models.
10 PPS — Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for 10 PPS.
20 PPS — Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for 20 PPS.
PB — Select this to use a tone type push phone line.
10
Line-2 Mode
*1
Select how Line 2 is used, if installed.
Tx / Rx — Select this to use Line 2 for sending and receiving a fax.
Rx Only (24 Hour) — Select this to use Line 2 only for receiving a fax.
Rx Only (Timer) — Select this to use Line 2 only for receiving a fax during
specified time. When this is selected, enter the start time and end time that
Line 2 is used for only receiving a fax.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
178 [Setup] Item List
11 Resolution Select the default resolution for sending faxes.
Standard — Select this to use the standard mode as the default resolution.
This mode is suitable when you are frequently transmitting text documents
with normal size characters.
Fine — Select this to use the fine mode as the default resolution. This mode
is suitable when you are transmitting documents with small size characters
or fine drawings.
Ultra Fine — Select this to use the ultra fine mode as the default resolution.
This mode is suitable when you are transmitting documents with very small
size characters or detailed drawings.
12 Original Mode Select the default image quality mode for sending faxes.
Text — Select this to set the Text mode as the default image quality mode
appropriate for sending text originals.
Text/Photo — Select this to set the Text/Photo mode as the default image
quality mode appropriate for sending originals containing both text and
photos.
Photo — Select this to set the Photo mode as the default image quality
mode appropriate for sending photo originals.
13 Exposure Select the default exposure for sending faxes.
Select [Auto] to automatically apply the ideal contrast according to the
original or select the contrast manually in 11 stages.
14 TTI Select whether to print a transmission header (TTI) on received faxes to
identify the sender of received faxes.
The printed time is the transmission time of each page.
15 RTI Select whether to print a reception header (RTI) on received faxes to clearly
identify the time, date, and page count of received faxes.
16 ECM Select whether to enable or disable the ECM (Error Correction Mode) to
automatically re-send any portion of the document affected by phone line
noise or distortion.
17 Discard Select whether to discard the lower portion of the received fax image if it is
larger than the recording paper.
18 Reduction Select whether to reduce the received fax image if it is larger than the
effective printing area of the recording paper.
19 Duplex Print Select whether to print the received fax images on both sides of the recording
paper. Available only when the Automatic Duplexing Unit is installed.
20
Rotate Sort
*1
Select whether to rotate the output direction in the tray for each reception.
21 Recovery Transmit Select whether to re-transmit a fax after failing the initially specified number
of redial attempts. When this is enabled, select the stored time length from 1
to 24 hours.
22 Journal Auto Print Select whether to automatically print a transmission and reception journal
after every transmission completed.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 179
[Administration]
23 Memory Transmission Report Select how to print a result report after a memory transmission.
OFF — Select this to not print a memory transmission report.
Always — Select this to print a memory transmission report with all page
images for each memory transmission completed.
ON ERROR — Select this to print a memory transmission report with all
page images only when the memory transmission is not successfully
completed.
Always (Print 1st Page Image)
— Select this to print a memory
transmission report with the 1st page image for each memory transmission
completed.
ON ERROR (Print 1st Page Image) — Select this to print a memory
transmission report with the 1st page image only when the memory
transmission is not successful.
24 Multi Transmission Report Select how to print a result report after a multi-address transmission.
OFF — Select this to not print a multi-address transmission report.
Always — Select this to print a multi-address transmission report with all
page images for each multi-address transmission completed.
ON ERROR — Select this to print a multi-address transmission report with
all page images only when the multi-address transmission is not
successfully completed.
Always (Print 1st Page Image)
— Select this to print a multi-address
transmission report with the 1st page image for each multi-address
transmission completed.
ON ERROR (Print 1st Page Image) — Select this to print a multi-address
transmission report with the 1st page image only when the multi-address
transmission is not successful.
25 Polling Report Select how to print a result report after a multi-polling reception.
OFF — Select this to not print a multi-polling report.
Always
— Select this to print a multi-polling report for each multi-polling
reception.
ON ERROR — Select this to print a multi-polling report only when the multi-
polling reception is not successful.
26 Relay Originator Select how to print a result report after a relay transmission.
OFF — Select this to not print a relay station report.
Always — Select this to print a relay station report with all page images for
each relay transmission completed.
ON ERROR — Select this to print a relay station report with all page images
only when the relay transmission is not successful.
Always (Print 1st Page Image) — Select this to print a relay station report
with the 1st page image for each relay transmission completed.
ON ERROR (Print 1st Page Image) — Select this to print a relay station
report with the 1st page image only when the relay transmission is not
successful.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
180 [Setup] Item List
*1 This function is not available for some models.
27 RX End Tone Select how to sound the RX end tone after the completion of reception.
OFF — The RX end tone does not sound.
Print End
— The RX end tone sounds at the completion of printing.
Receive End — The RX end tone sounds at the completion of reception.
28 TX End Tone Select how to sound the TX end tone after the completion of transmission.
OFF
— The TX end tone does not sound.
Always — The TX end tone sounds at the completion of transmission.
ON ERROR — Sounds in the case of a transmission failure.
Normal End — Sounds at the normal completion of transmission.
29 Line Monitor Select this to check the connection with the remote fax by confirming Line
Monitor.
OFF — Line Monitor not confirmed
ON
— Line Monitor confirmed
30 Secure Receive You can set the Secure Receive function to store received fax jobs in the
equipment without printing them.
With this function, you can prevent the leaking of confidential information in
a fax received when no people are present in your office, such as nighttime or
holidays, or when an unspecified number of people visit your office.
Enable — Enables the Secure Receive function.
To print the fax jobs the Secure Receive function received, you must set
[Line1 : Password] and [Retype Password] or [Line2 : Password]
*1
and
[Retype Password]
*1
. For the password, you can enter up to 20
alphanumerical characters and symbols (! # ( ) * + , - . / : ; = ? @ $ ^ _ ` { | } ~ \
space).
Disable — Disables the Secure Receive function.
Weekly Schedule — Sets whether the Secure Receive function is enabled
or disabled for each day of the week. You can set the time to enable and
disable the Secure Receive function (24-hour display).
- For a day on which you want to enable the Secure Receive function all
day, specify “00:00” for “Disable” and “00:00” for Enable.
- For a day on which you want to disable the Secure Receive function all
day, specify “00:00” for “Disable” and “24:00” for Enable.
To print the fax jobs the Secure Receive function received, you must set
[Line1 : Password] and [Retype Password] or [Line2 : Password]
*1
and
[Retype Password]
*1
. For the password, you can enter up to 20
alphanumerical characters and symbols (! # ( ) * + , - . / : ; = ? @ $ ^ _ ` { | } ~ \
space).
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 181
[Administration]
From Name Registration
You can register up to 20 names of the fax senders. The registered sender name can be selected when saving the
InternetFax and Fax settings for the templates.
P.317 “InternetFax Setting”
P.318 “Fax Setting”
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Adds a new name of the fax sender. When the entry window appears, you can
enter up to 54 characters for a name. Click [Save] to register the name. To stop
the setting operation, click the [Cancel] button to close the window.
2 [Delete] button Deletes the name selected in the list.
3 [Move Up] button Moves up the name selected in the list.
4 [Move Down] button Moves down the name selected in the list.
5 From Name Shows the registered names of the fax senders. You can scroll up or down the
list to see up to 20 names.
1
2 3 4
5
8.[Administration]
182 [Setup] Item List
Report Setting
You can select how to report fax results.
Item name Description
1 [Select Agent] button You can make detailed settings by selecting one of the following items, and
then clicking [Select Agent].
Print — Select this to print. There are no settings available in [Select Agent].
Save as file — Select this to save as a file. Click [Select Agent] to make settings
for [Save as file Setting] and [Common Setting].
Email — Select this to send an email. Click [Select Agent] to make address
settings, and settings for [Email Setting] and [Common Setting].
2 Use login user address (User
authentication)
Set whether or not to use the E-mail address for a login user as the destination
for E-mail transmission during user authentication. You can set the following
items when you select this check box.
Use Email Address which was registered Local User: The E-mail address for
a user set in MFP Local Authentication is used as the destination for E-mail
transmission.
Use Email Address which was LDAP registered: The E-mail address for a
server registered in LDAP Client is used as the destination for E-mail
transmission. Click [Server Assignment]. Up to 4 LDAP servers can be assigned.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
3 [1st Destination] /[2nd
Destination] button
This is enabled when you select [Email] from Report Settings, and then click
the [Select Agent] button.
Click to display the address list where you can set addresses.
P.312 “Destination Setting”
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 183
[Administration]
Received Forward Setting for Application
You can set whether or not to save received data (meta data) which can be used for the activation of the received
document (image file received by fax) and an application in its storage area. For details about the application, contact
your service technician or representative.
This cannot be used if an application which uses the received document is not installed in the equipment or the
execution permission of the application is disabled.
4 [Email Setting] button This is enabled when you select [Email] from Report Settings, and then click
the [Select Agent] button.
Click to set the following items on the agent settings page for the Email
settings.
Subject
From Address
From Name
Body
File Name
P.321 “Email Setting”
5 [Save as file Setting] button This is enabled when you select [Save as file] from Report Settings, and then
click the [Select Agent] button.
Click to set the following items on the agent settings page for the Save as file
settings.
Destination
File Name
P.324 “Save as file Setting”
6 [Common Setting] button This is enabled when you select [Email] or [Save as file] from Report Settings,
and then click the [Select Agent] button.
You can set the following items on the agent settings page.
File Format
Encryption
Digital Signature
P.321 “Email Setting”
P.324 “Save as file Setting”
Item name Description
1 Enable Received Forward Select [Enable] to save the received document in the storage area of the
application. [Disable] is the default setting.
When [Enable] is selected for [Enable Received Forward], the Received
Forward to Applications setting is taken as the top priority even if other
forward settings are also enabled.
Item name Description
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
184 [Setup] Item List
Box Setting (Received Forward Setting for Application)
You can set the destination to back up the received document.
Up to 400 documents can be stored in a box or folder, and up to 200 pages can be contained in a document. If an
attempt is made to store documents exceeding the available numbers, storing to e-Filing will fail. Delete unnecessary
documents in a box or e-Filing periodically. Alternatively, specify the document storage period after which
unnecessary documents are automatically deleted.
2 Backup Setting Select [Enable] to save the received document in the specified box as a
backup file. [Enable] is the default setting.
This will be displayed when [Enable] is selected for [Enable Received
Forward].
3 [Box Setting] button Click this to change the box for saving the received document or to modify the
folder name. When you click this button, the [Box Setting] screen will appear.
You can change the settings when [Enable] is selected for [Backup Setting].
Item name Description
1 Destination Set the box to save the received document.
Box Number — Select the box number to save the received document. “000:
Public Box” is set as the default.
Password — Enter the password if it is set for the specified box.
Retype Password — Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
2 Folder Name Enter the folder name in the box where the received document is saved. You
can enter up to 64 characters.
3 Document Name A job ID applied automatically by means of the equipment is displayed. This
cannot be changed.
Item name Description
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 185
[Administration]
Save as file settings
You can configure the Save as file settings that apply to the Save as file operations.
The [Save as file] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Setting up Local Storage Path
You can see the folder path where files are stored by the Save as file to local folder. You can open the local folder by
browsing this equipment from a Windows network.
Setting up Storage Maintenance
In Storage Maintenance, you can select how to delete files stored in the local folder.
The folder created when storing the files in the local folder will be deleted automatically when all files in the folder are
deleted.
Item name Description
1 Storage Path Displays the local storage path where files are stored when files are saved to
the local folder by the Save as file functions.
2 Send scanned documents to a
sub folder in the storage path.
Select this to save the files in the sub folder that is named as “Folder Number-
Folder Name-Template Number-Template Name”.
When you recall the template button registered outside the folder, the sub
folder is named as “Template Number-Template Name”.
3 Send scanned documents
directly to the storage path.
Select this to save the files directly in the storage path.
Item name Description
1 Do not delete documents
automatically
Select this to delete files stored in the local folder manually. If you select this
option, files saved in the shared folder will not be deleted automatically.
2 Delete documents after [ ]
day(s)
Select this to automatically delete files stored in the local folder after a
specified number of days. When this is selected, enter the number of days that
the files are to remain. [30days] is set as the default.
1
2
3
1
2
8.[Administration]
186 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Destination
You can specify whether a network folder can be used for Save as file.
Setting up Folder Name
You can select whether to add information related to this equipment or users to the name of a folder created
automatically when you save files.
Item name Description
1 Do not allow any network
folder to be used as a
destination
You can specify that a network folder cannot be used for Save as file. When
this is selected, users can only save a file in the local folder or USB media.
2 Use Network Folder
Destination
You can specify that a network folder can be used for Save as file. When this is
selected, set the Remote 1 and Remote 2 Settings to specify how users can
select the network folders for Save as file destinations.
3 Default file path Select the destination that will be set as the default destination when
performing Save as file from the touch panel.
Use local folder — Select this to save in a local folder.
Remote 1 — Select this to save in the folder set in Remote 1.
Remote 2 — Select this to save in the folder set in Remote 2.
Item name Description
1 Folder Name Setting Select additional information of the name of a folder created when you save
files.
Disable — Select this not to add any information.
Add MachineName — Select this to add the NetBIOS name of this
equipment.
Add UserName — Select this to add a user name set in user authentication.
1
2
3
1
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 187
[Administration]
Setting up Format
You can set how to name files of the scanned images when you save them into the “FILE_SHARE” folder of this
equipment or USB.
Item name Description
1 File Name Format Select the format of the file name. Information such as file name, date and
time or page number is added according to the selected format. The added
information will also be applied to file names attached to E-mails.
[FileName]-[Date]-[Page]
[FileName]-[Page]-[Date]
[Date]-[FileName]-[Page]
[Date]-[Page]-[Filename]
[Page]-[FileName]-[Date]
[Page]-[Date]-[FileName]
[FileName]_[Date]-[Page]
2 Date Format Select how you add “date and time” of the file name selected in [File Name
Format]. The added information will also be applied to file names attached to
E-mails.
[YYYY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS] — Year (4 digits), month, day, hour, minute
and second are added.
[YY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS] — Year (2 digits), month, day, hour, minute
and second are added.
[YYYY][MM][DD] — Year (4 digits), month, and day are added.
[YY][MM][DD] — Year (2 digits), month, and day are added.
[HH][mm][SS] — Hour, minute and second are added.
[YYYY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS][mm0] — Year (4 digits), month, day, hour,
minute, second and random number (2 digits and “0”) are added.
3 Page Number Format Select the number of digits of a page number applied to “Page” of the file
name selected in [File Name Format] from 3 to 6. The added information will
also be applied to file names attached to E-mails. [4digits] is set as the default.
4 Sub ID Format This equipment automatically adds a sub ID (identification number) to the
name of a file that you are saving the same file name exists. You can select the
number of digits of this sub ID from 4 to 6 or [AUTO]. [AUTO] is selected by
default. If [AUTO] is selected, a sub ID (4 to 6 digits, selected randomly) is
added according to the status of the file name.
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
188 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Single Page Data Saving Directory
If [SINGLE] is selected in [MULTI/SINGLE PAGE] on the scan menu of this equipment, the scanned data are saved as a
single-page file. This setting is to select whether a subfolder is created or not when you are saving a single-page file.
Setting up File Composition
If [SINGLE] is selected in [MULTI/SINGLE PAGE] on the scan menu of this equipment, the scanned data are saved as a
single-page file. This setting is to select a page configuration of a single-page file to be saved. The added information
will also be applied to file names attached to E-mails.
Setting up User Name and Password at User Authentication for Save as File
If user authentication is enabled, you can select whether a user name and a password used for user authentication are
automatically applied to [LOGIN USER NAME] and [PASSWORD] to be used for saving files into a network folder
(specified in REMOTE 1/2) or not. This setting is applied only when [Use Network Folder Destination] of the Destination
setting for the Remote 1 or the Remote 2 is checked.
Item name Description
1 Save under a subfolder A subfolder is created in a specified directory and you can save the file into it.
2 Save without creating a
subfolder
A subfolder is not created and the file is saved in a specified directory.
Item name Description
1 Scanning 1 page makes 1 file.
(2-sided originals become 2
files.)
When 1 page of an original is scanned, the scanned data are saved as 1 file.
When you scan 1 sheet of a 2-sided original, for example, the data of its front
side are saved as 1 file and those of its back side are also saved as 1 file.
2 Make to the file like a scanned
manuscript. (2-sided originals
become 1 files.)
When 1 page of an original is scanned, the scanned data are saved as 1 file.
When you scan 1 sheet of a 2-sided original, for example, the data of both the
front and back sides (= 2 pages) are saved as 1 file.
Item name Description
1 User name and password of
the device
User names and passwords being logged in will not be applied. Enter [LOGIN
USER NAME] and [PASSWORD] as required when scanning originals.
2 Login User Name and
Password (Template
registration User Name and
Password is prioritized to
expand template)
A user name and a password being logged in will be automatically applied.
When a template is used, a user name and a password registered there will be
automatically applied.
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 189
[Administration]
Setting up Searching Interval
Select the interval for searching expired files in the “FILE_SHARE” folder. The content of this setting will also be
applied to files in e-Filing boxes.
Setting up Remote 1 and Remote 2 Settings
In Remote 1 and Remote 2, you can specify how users can select the network folders for Save as file destination when
you select [Use Network Folder Destination] in the Destination setting. You can specify two network folders; Remote 1
and Remote 2. The setting items are the same for both Remote 1 and Remote 2.
The network folder as a destination must be set to be shared by all users.
3 Login User Name and
Password (Login User Name
and Password is prioritized to
expand template)
A user name and a password being logged in will be automatically applied.
When a template is used, the user name and password being logged in will be
applied.
Item name Description
1 Deleting Expired File This equipment searches expired files every time a specified period of time
has passed. The period can be selected from 1 to 24 hours. 12 hours is set by
default.
You can set the expiration date of each file in the “FILE_SHARE” folder or
whether to delete expired files or not using the items below.
P.185 “Setting up Storage Maintenance”
Item name Description
1 Allow user to register remote
server details from panel
Select whether to allow users to register the remote servers from the control
panel.
Item name Description
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
12 11
8.[Administration]
190 [Setup] Item List
2 [Remote 1]/[Remote 2] Select the remote network folder you want to use.
3 Allow the following network
folder to be used as a
destination
Select this to restrict users to select only the network folder that you have
specified. Otherwise, select [Allow user to select network folder to be used as
a destination].
[Remote Setting List] button — Sets a list of network folders for Save as file
destination, which can be selected from Remote 1 and Remote 2. To select
the specified setting list from the touch panel, you must select [Allow user to
select network folder to be used as a destination].
P.191 “[Remote Setting List] screen”
4 Allow user to select network
folder to be used as a
destination
Select this to allow users to specify a network folder as a destination. When
the list of Save as file destinations has been set in [Remote Setting List], you
can select a network folder from the list. Otherwise, select [Allow the
following network folder to be used as a destination].
If you want to allow users to specify either Remote 1 or Remote 2, select the
one that is not set for the network folder as a destination and select [Allow
user to select network folder to be used as a destination] of the selected
folder.
5 Protocol Select the protocol to be used for uploading a file to the network folder.
SMB — Select this to send a file to the network folder using the SMB
protocol.
FTP — Select this to send a file to the FTP server.
FTPS — Select this to send a file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL/TLS.
NetWare IPX/SPX — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the IPX/SPX protocol.
NetWare TCP/IP — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the TCP/IP protocol.
6 Server Name When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the FTP server name or IP
address where a scanned file will be sent. For example, to send a scanned file
to the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP folder in the FTP server, enter
“192.168.1.1” in this box.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] as the protocol, enter the NetWare file
server name or Tree/Context name (when NDS is available).
When you select [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol, enter the IP address of the
NetWare file server.
You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
7 Port Number(Command) Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select [FTP] as the
protocol. Generally “-” is entered for the control port. When “-” is entered, the
default port number, that is set for FTP Client by an administrator, will be
used. If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client, ask your
administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number.
You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 65535 using numbers and
hyphens (-). “-” is set as the default.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 191
[Administration]
[Remote Setting List] screen
In this screen, you can set a list of network folders for Save as file destination, which can be selected from Remote 1
and Remote 2. You can register up to 30 items in the Remote Setting List.
8 Network Path When you select [SMB] as the protocol, enter the network path to the network
folder. For example, to specify the “users\scanned” folder in the computer
named “Client01”, enter “\\Client01\users\scanned”.
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the directory in the specified FTP
server. For example, to specify the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP
folder in the FTP server, enter “user/scanned”.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] or [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol,
enter the folder path in the NetWare file server. For example, to specify the
“sys\scan” folder in the NetWare file server, enter “\sys\scan”.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
9 Login User Name Enter the log-in user name to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a
NetWare file server, if required. When you select [FTP] as the protocol, an
anonymous log-in is assumed if you leave this box blank.
You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than <,
>, “ (double quotation), : (colon) and ; (semicolon). A user name with only a
single space is not possible.
10 Password Enter the password to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a NetWare file
server, if required. You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters,
symbols, and spaces. A single space only can also be entered.
11 Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
12 [Execute] button Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Registers the remote setting list.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the registration of the remote setting list.
3 [New] button Sets a new remote setting.
P.192 “[Remote Setting] screen”
4 [Edit] button Edits the item selected in the remote setting list.
P.192 “[Remote Setting] screen”
5 [Delete] button Deletes the item selected in the remote setting list.
6 Name Displays the name of the remote setting.
7 Protocol Displays the protocol of the remote setting.
8 Network Path Displays the network path of the remote setting.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
6 7 8
8.[Administration]
192 [Setup] Item List
[Remote Setting] screen
In this screen, you can set the network folders for Save as file destination that are to be registered in the list.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the specified network folder for Save as file destination.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 [Execute] button Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
4 Name Enter the name of the network folder for Save as file destination.
5 Protocol Select the protocol to be used for uploading a file to the network folder.
SMB — Select this to send a file to the network folder using the SMB
protocol.
FTP — Select this to send a file to the FTP server.
FTPS — Select this to send a file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL/TLS.
NetWare IPX/SPX — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the IPX/SPX protocol.
NetWare TCP/IP — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the TCP/IP protocol.
6 Server Name When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the FTP server name or IP
address where a scanned file will be sent. For example, to send a scanned file
to the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP folder in the FTP server, enter
“192.168.1.1” in this box.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] as the protocol, enter the NetWare file
server name or Tree/Context name (when NDS is available).
When you select [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol, enter the IP address of the
NetWare file server.
You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
7 Port Number(Command) Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select [FTP] as the
protocol. Generally “-” is entered for the control port. When “-” is entered, the
default port number, that is set for FTP Client by an administrator, will be
used. If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client, ask your
administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number.
You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 65535 using numbers and
hyphens (-). “-” is set as the default.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 193
[Administration]
Setting up N/W-Fax Destination
You can configure a network folder to store documents that are sent using the N/W-Fax driver with the Save as file
option enabled.
Setting up N/W-Fax Folder
In the N/W-Fax Folder, you can specify in which network folder N/W-Fax documents are saved.
8 Network Path When you select [SMB] as the protocol, enter the network path to the network
folder. For example, to specify the “users\scanned” folder in the computer
named “Client01”, enter “\\Client01\users\scanned”.
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the directory in the specified FTP
server. For example, to specify the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP
folder in the FTP server, enter “user/scanned”.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] or [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol,
enter the folder path in the NetWare file server. For example, to specify the
“sys\scan” folder in the NetWare file server, enter “\sys\scan”.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
9 Login User Name Enter the log-in user name to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a
NetWare file server, if required. When you select [FTP] as the protocol, an
anonymous log-in is assumed if you leave this box blank.
You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than <,
>, “ (double quotation), : (colon) and ; (semicolon). A user name with only a
single space is not possible.
10 Password Enter the password to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a NetWare file
server, if required. You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters,
symbols, and spaces. A single space only can also be entered.
11 Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
Item name Description
1 Do not allow any network
folder to be used as a
destination
Select this to not allow any network folders to be used as Save as file
destinations for N/W-Faxes documents. When selected, users can only save an
N/W-Fax document with the Save as file option enabled to local storage.
2 Use Network Folder
Destination
Select this to allow network folders to be used as Save as file destinations for
N/W-Fax documents. When selected, set the N/W-Fax Folder settings to
specify which network folder to use.
Item name Description
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8.[Administration]
194 [Setup] Item List
Item name Description
1 Check box Select the check box so that the popup prompts you to enter the network path
or the server name if you try to save the settings without it.
2 Protocol Select the protocol for uploading an N/W-Fax document to a network folder.
SMB — Select this to send an N/W-Fax document to the network folder using
the SMB protocol.
FTP — Select this to send a file to the FTP server.
FTPS — Select this to send a file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL/TLS.
NetWare IPX/SPX — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the IPX/SPX protocol.
NetWare TCP/IP — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the TCP/IP protocol.
3 Server Name When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the FTP server name or IP
address where an N/W-Fax document will be sent. For example, to send an N/
W-Fax document to the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP folder in the FTP
server, enter “192.168.1.1” in this box.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] as the protocol, enter the NetWare file
server name or Tree/Context name (when NDS is available).
When you select [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol, enter the IP address of the
NetWare file server.
4 Port Number(Command) Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select [FTP] as the
protocol. Generally “-” is entered for the control port. When “-” is entered, the
default port number, that is set for FTP Client by an administrator, will be
used. If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client, ask your
administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number.
5 Network Path When you select [SMB] as the protocol, enter the network path to the network
folder. For example, to specify the “users\scanned” folder in the computer
named “Client01”, enter “\\Client01\users\scanned”.
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the directory in the specified FTP
server. For example, to specify the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP
folder in the FTP server, enter “user/scanned”.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] or [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol, enter
the folder path in the NetWare file server. For example, to specify the
“sys\scan” folder in the NetWare file server, enter “\sys\scan”.
6 Login User Name Enter the login user name to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a
NetWare file server, if required. When you select [FTP] as the protocol, an
anonymous login is assumed if you leave this box blank. You can enter up to
32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than <, >, “ (double
quotation), : (colon) and ; (semicolon). A user name with only a single space is
not possible.
7 Password Enter the password to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a NetWare file
server, if required. The space can be entered.
8 Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
9 [Execute] button Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 195
[Administration]
Email settings
You can configure the E-mail settings that are needed for Scan to Email operations. This section describes necessary
settings for E-mail transmissions.
The [Email Setting] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them. The settings will be updated by
pressing the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period.
Setting up Email Setting
You can specify the file format, fragment message size, and default body strings that apply to the Scan to Email
documents.
Item name Description
1 SMTP Client Specify SMTP transmission for e-mails.
For how to set SMTP Client, see the reference below:
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
8.[Administration]
196 [Setup] Item List
2 POP3 Client Specify the POP3 server that receives e-mail print jobs.
For how to set POP3 Client, see the reference below:
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
3 From Address Enter the E-mail address of this equipment.
Email addresses are displayed on the transmission/reception history (log).
The operation using easy-to-understand addresses is recommended.
The [From Address] must be entered to enable E-mail transmission. However,
the E-mail address of the user who is logged in to this equipment will be
automatically set if any user management settings apart from MFP local
authentication are enabled. For more information about User Management
Setting, see the reference below:
P.75 “[User Management]”
4 From Name Enter the name of this equipment.
5 Message Header (Inbound
FAX Routing)
Select TTI to be used as a subject when the received Internet Fax is
forwarded.
6 Recipient Domain Name Enable or disable automatic addition of a domain name while a destination is
being entered.
Enable — Select this to add a domain name.
Disable
— Select this not to add a domain name.
Enter the domain name to be added in the text box. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), # and
\(backslash).
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 197
[Administration]
7 File Format(Black) Select the file format of files to be sent when scanning in black mode.
TIFF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page TIFF file.
TIFF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page TIFF files.
PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF file.
PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF files.
XPS(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page XPS file.
XPS(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page XPS files.
PDF/A(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF/A
file.
PDF/A(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF/A files.
DOCX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Word file
(DOCX) after OCR processing.
DOCX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Word
file (DOCX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Excel file
(XLSX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Excel
file (XLSX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
You can select whether to enable OCR by [Enable OCR].
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
198 [Setup] Item List
8 File Format(Color) Select the file format of files to be sent when scanning in color mode.
TIFF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page TIFF file.
TIFF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page TIFF files.
PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF file.
PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF files.
Slim PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as Multi-page slim
PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over
quality of image.
Slim PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as
Single-page slim PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing
the file size over quality of image.
XPS(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page XPS file.
XPS(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page XPS files.
JPEG — Select this to save scanned images as JPEG files.
PDF/A(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF/A
file.
PDF/A(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF/A files.
DOCX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Word file
(DOCX) after OCR processing.
DOCX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Word
file (DOCX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Excel file
(XLSX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Excel
file (XLSX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
You can select whether to enable OCR by [Enable OCR].
9 Number of Retry Enter the number of times to try sending scanned images when it fails. “3” is
set as the default.
10 Retry interval Enter the interval to try sending scanned images when it fails. [1minutes] is
set as the default.
When the [Number of Retry] and [Retry interval] options are changed, the
[Number of Retry] and [Retry interval] options in the Internet Fax settings are
also changed.
P.202 “Setting up InternetFax Setting”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 199
[Administration]
11 Mail Fragmentation Select whether to fragment E-mail for transmission and select how to
fragment it when sending E-mail with attached scanned files.
No Fragmentation — Select this to send E-mail without fragmentation.
Size Split — Select this to send an E-mail as splitting it by the size selected
from [Split Size]. The fragmented E-mails are combined as one at reception.
Page Split — Select this to send an E-mail as splitting the attached files by
the page according to the limit size specified in [Split Size]. The receiver
receives the fragmented E-mails with the attached files split. The fragment
number/the total number of the E-mails is added to the end of the subject
of each E-mail and the fragment number is added to the end of the name of
each attached file. All the fragmented E-mails contain the same body text.
E-mails with the XPS, DOCX, XLSX, and PPTX format files cannot be
fragmented.
12 Default Subject Select whether to set the E-mail subject to the factory default or a desired
string.
Factory Default
— Select this to display the BCC address entry column.
<Entry box> — Enter the desired subject.
13 Add the date and time to the
Subject
Select whether to append or not date and time to the E-mail subject. This is
set as a default.
Enable
— Select this to append date and time to the subject.
Disable — Select this to not append date and time to the subject.
14 Editing of Subject Select whether to allow or not editing of the E-mail subject.
Enable
— Select this to allow the user to edit the E-mail subject.
Disable — Select this to not allow the user to edit the E-mail subject.
15 Default Body Strings Enter the body text that will be automatically entered in the [Body] box when
users operate Scan to Email from the touch panel. This sets only the default
body text, so that it can be changed on each operation by users.
16 Body Strings Transmission Select whether the body strings will be sent or not.
17 BCC Address Display on Job
Log, Job Status
Select the display form of the destination of the BCC address displayed in the
scan log and the scan job.
ON — Select this to display [Bcc Address], instead of the destination of the
BCC address.
OFF
— Select this to display the destination of the BCC address.
18 From Address cannot be
edited in Scan to Email.
Select this item to prohibit modification of the From Address.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
200 [Setup] Item List
Setting up URL Transmission Settings
You can set to provide a URL (link) to the saving directory of the file instead of attaching it before sending a scanned
image by email.
Item name Description
1 URL Transmission Select whether to enable or disable the function to provide a URL to the saving
directory of the scanned data.
Enable — Provides a URL to the saving directory.
Disable — Sends the data as attachments.
The scanned data is stored in MFP Local.
If a URL to the saving directory is provided, its link and the preservation
period are stated in the email.
2 Threshold to Send Attached
File
(1-100)
Select the maximum size of an attached file. The allowable range is between 1
MB and 100 MB. Select [Send Email with URL at any time] if you want to
provide a URL to the saving directory of the file, regardless of the file size. If a
maximum size is specified, any file whose size is smaller than the specified one
is attached to an email message. On the other hand, if a file exceeds the
specified maximum size, a URL to the saving directory is provided.
3 Preservation Period for
Download File
Select the preservation period of the file if a URL to the saving directory is
provided. If you do not want to impose any limits on the preservation period,
select [Unlimited]. If you prefer to automatically delete download files
regularly, select a period until the data is deleted.
If the data cannot be stored in MFP Local because it is full, this results in an
error. Delete the stored files regularly. If you want to delete them manually, all
scanned data in the shared folder is deleted.
4 Search Interval to delete the
Expired Download File
Selects the interval of monitoring the expiration of the specified preservation
period.
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 201
[Administration]
5 Host Name Format in URL Selects the host name of the format.
IP Address
: Select this to use the IP address set in the equipment.
Host Name (FQDN): Select this to use the FQDN configured with the
combination of the host and domain names set in the equipment.
NetBIOS Name: Select this to use the NetBIOS name set in the equipment.
Be sure to set the domain name of DDNS when [Host Name (FQDN)] is
selected. If it has not been set, the IP Address is used for the format of the
host name. Perform the name resolution for FQDN in the DNS server so that
connection to a URL from a client computer becomes possible.
P.128 “DDNS”
[NetBIOS Name] means “[NetBIOS Name] of SMB” set in this equipment. If
[Disable] is selected for [SMB Server Protocol] of SMB, the IP Address is used
for the format of the host name.
P.144 “Setting up SMB”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
202 [Setup] Item List
InternetFax settings
You can specify Internet Fax settings. This section describes necessary settings for Internet Fax transmissions.
The [InternetFax] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them. The settings will be updated by
pressing the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period.
Setting up InternetFax Setting
You can specify the fragment page size and default body strings that apply to the Internet Faxes.
Item name Description
1 SMTP Client Specify SMTP transmission for InternetFax.
For how to set SMTP Client, see the reference below:
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
2 POP3 Client Specify the POP3 server that receives InternetFax print jobs.
For how to set POP3 Client, see the reference below:
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
3 SMTP Server Specify SMTP reception for InternetFax.
For how to set SMTP Server, see the reference below:
P.151 “Setting up SMTP Server”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 203
[Administration]
4 From Address Enter the E-mail address of this equipment.
The [From Address] must be entered to enable Internet Fax transmission.
5 From Name Enter the name of this equipment.
6 Message Header (Inbound
FAX Routing)
Select TTI to be used as a subject when the received Internet Fax is forwarded.
7 Recipient Domain Name Enable or disable automatic addition of a domain name while a destination is
being entered.
Enable: Select this to add a domain name.
Disable: Select this not to add a domain name.
Enter the domain name to be added in the text box. You can enter up to 128
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), # and
\(backslash).
8 Number of Retry Enter the number of times to try sending the Internet Faxes when it fails. “3” is
set as the default.
9 Retry interval Enter the interval to try sending the Internet Faxes when it fails. [1minutes] is
set as the default.
When the [Number of Retry] and [Retry interval] options are changed, the
[Number of Retry] and [Retry interval] options in the E-mail settings are also
changed.
P.195 “Email settings”
10 Fragment Page Size Select the size of the message fragmentation.
11 Default Body Strings Enter the body text that will be automatically entered in the [Body] box when
users operate Scan to Internet Fax from the touch panel. This sets only the
default body text, so that it can be changed on each operation by users.
12 Body String Transmission Select whether the body strings will be sent or not.
13 TTI Specify whether or not to add the sender information in the header.
14 RTI Specify whether or not to add the sender information in the footer.
15 To/Bcc Destination You can set the destination of the internet fax to be sent only to To or Bcc.
When Bcc is set as the destination, To becomes blank and the transmitted
internet fax may be treated as spam depending on the settings of the mail
server, mailer or security software. Check the settings for spam.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
204 [Setup] Item List
From Name Registration
You can register up to 20 names of the fax senders. The registered sender name can be selected when saving the
InternetFax and Fax settings for the templates.
P.317 “InternetFax Setting”
P.318 “Fax Setting”
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Adds a new name of the fax sender. When the entry window appears, you can
enter up to 20 characters for a name. Click [Save] to register the name. To stop
the setting operation, click the [Cancel] button to close the window.
2 [Delete] button Deletes the name selected in the list.
3 [Move Up] button Moves up the name selected in the list.
4 [Move Down] button Moves down the name selected in the list.
5 From Name Shows the registered names of the fax senders. You can scroll up or down the
list to see up to 20 names.
1
2 3 4
5
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 205
[Administration]
Report Setting
You can select how to report internet fax results.
Item name Description
1 [Select Agent] button You can make detailed settings by selecting one of the following items, and
then clicking [Select Agent].
Print — Select this to print. There are no settings available in [Select Agent].
Save as file — Select this to save as a file. Click [Select Agent] to make settings
for [Save as file Setting] and [Common Setting].
Email — Select this to send an email. Click [Select Agent] to make address
settings, and settings for [Email Setting] and [Common Setting].
2 Use login user address (User
Authentication)
Set whether or not to use the E-mail address for a login user as the destination
for E-mail transmission during user authentication. You can set the following
items when you select this check box.
Use Email Address which was registered Local User: The E-mail address for
a user set in MFP Local Authentication is used as the destination for E-mail
transmission.
Use Email Address which was LDAP registered: The E-mail address for a
server registered in LDAP Client is used as the destination for E-mail
transmission. Click [Server Assignment]. Up to 4 LDAP servers can be assigned.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
3 [1st: Destination] /[2nd:
Destination] button
This is enabled when you select [Email] from Report Settings, and then click
the [Select Agent] button.
Click to display the address list where you can set addresses.
P.312 “Destination Setting”
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
206 [Setup] Item List
4 [Email Setting] button This is enabled when you select [Email] from Report Settings, and then click
the [Select Agent] button.
Click to set the following items on the agent settings page for the Email
settings.
Subject
From Address
From Name
Body
File Name
P.321 “Email Setting”
5 [Save as file Setting] button This is enabled when you select [Save as file] from Report Settings, and then
click the [Select Agent] button.
Click to set the following items on the agent settings page for the Save as file
settings.
Destination
File Name
P.324 “Save as file Setting”
6 [Common Setting] button This is enabled when you select [Email] or [Save as file] from Report Settings,
and then click the [Select Agent] button.
You can set the following items on the agent settings page.
File Format
Encryption
Digital Signature
P.321 “Email Setting”
P.324 “Save as file Setting”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 207
[Administration]
Printer/e-Filing settings
The [Printer/e-Filing] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Setting up Printer/e-Filing Job Enforcement Continue
*1 This function is not available for some models.
Item name Description
1 Automatic Change Of Paper
Source
Specify whether or not to change the paper source automatically when the
size of the original and the paper in the paper source do not match.
ON — Select this to change the paper source and continue processing the
job.
OFF — Select this to stop the job.
2
Paper Of Different Direction
*1
Specify whether or not to copy on paper which is loaded in the paper source in
a different orientation from the original.
ON — Select this to continue processing the job by copying on paper in a
different orientation.
OFF — Select this to stop the job.
3 Enforcement Continue (Illegal
Paper)
*1
Specify whether or not to continue processing the job forcibly when the
specified output tray is incorrect.
ON — Select this to print to the specified output tray.
OFF — Select this to stop the job.
4 Auto Exit Tray Change
(Cascade Print)
*1
Specify whether or not to switch the receiving tray automatically.
ON — Select this to continue processing the job by switching the receiving
tray.
OFF — Select this to stop the job.
5 Suspend Printing if Stapler
Empty
*1
Specify whether to stop printing when staples run out.
ON — Select this to stop printing when staples run out.
OFF — Select this not to stop printing when staples run out.
6 Continue Printing when
Punch Dust is full
*1
Specify whether to continue printing when the punch dust bin is full.
ON — Select this to continue printing even when the punch dust bin is full.
OFF — Select this to stop printing when the punch dust bin is full.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
208 [Setup] Item List
Printer settings
You can configure how the printer works and the printer options needed for the raw print jobs.
The [Printer] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Setting up General Setting
In General Setting, you can specify the printer related options.
*1 The [LD <--> A3] function is not available for some models.
Item name Description
1 Period of time to save
Private,Hold,Proof,IPP-PIN
and invalid Jobs
Select how long the private, hold, test and IPP-PIN print jobs are kept. You can
select in the range from 1 to 12 hours, or from 1 to 30 days. Select [Indefinite]
to retain all jobs in the queues until a user manually deletes them. [14 Days] is
set as the default.
2
LT<-->A4 / LD <-->A3
*1
Select whether to print a document intended for one paper size can be printed
on paper of a different size. For example, you can print a document set up for
Letter size on A4 paper. When disabled, this equipment will prompt users for
the correct paper size. [Enable] is set as the default.
3 Wide A4 Mode (for PCL) Select whether the width of the printable area of copy paper is widened or not
when you are printing a PCL print job on A4 paper. Select [Enable] to widen it
for approx. 3.5 mm / 0.14 inch (when in a portrait direction) and approx. 1.5
mm / 0.06 inch (when in a landscape direction). Thus more data can be printed
for each line. [Disable] is set as the default.
This item is available only for some models.
4 Restriction for Print Job Select whether or not to restrict printing certain print jobs.
None — Select this to print all data.
Only Private — Select this to print private print jobs only.
Only Hold — Select this to print hold print jobs only.
Only Private/Hold — Select this to print private and hold print jobs only.
1
2
4
3
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 209
[Administration]
Setting up Default Direct Print Setting
You can set the default settings for USB Direct Print and E-mail Direct Print.
Some print settings do not work on printouts according to file formats.
The [PDF Overprint], [PDF Prioritize Original Size], and [PDF Size Options] settings can work only on PDF printouts.
The [Enable Print Header] and [Enable Print Message Body] settings can work only on the E-mail Direct Print
function.
E-mails with encrypted PDF (secure PDF) files attached cannot be printed by the E-mail Direct Print function.
Color models
Monochromatic models
Item name Description
1 Color Mode Select the default color mode setting for direct print. This item is available
only for color models.
Auto Color
— Select this to enable auto color print.
Full Color — Select this to enable full color print.
Black — Select this to enable monochrome print.
2 2-Sided Select the default setting to print one side or both sides of paper for direct
print. This item is available only when Automatic Document Feeder has been
installed.
1Side
— Select this to enable one-side print.
Book — Select this to enable duplex book print.
Tablet — Select this to enable duplex tablet print.
3 Size Select the default paper size for direct print.
4
Finishing
*1
Select the default setting as to whether to staple paper or not.
NON-Staple
— Select this to disable stapling paper.
Upper Left — Select this to staple paper on the upper left corner.
Upper Right — Select this to staple paper on the upper right corner.
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
8.[Administration]
210 [Setup] Item List
*1 This function is not available for some models.
Setting up Driver Customization Packages Setting
You can set the function to download the customization packages for the printer driver.
5 PDF Overprint Select the default setting as to whether to overprint colors in PDF files or not.
OFF — Select this to disable overprint.
ON — Select this to enable overprint.
ON (PDF/X only)
— Select this to enable overprint only for PDF/X files.
6 PDF Prioritize Original Size Select the default setting as to whether to prioritize the PDF original size or
not.
OFF — Select this to prioritize the selected paper size over the original size.
ON
— Select this to prioritize the original size over the selected paper size,
which prints PDF files without enlargement or reduction.
7 PDF Size Options Select the default setting as to how to print PDF files when [PDF Prioritize
Original Size] is set to [OFF].
Fit
— Select this to enlarge or reduce pages by fitting the original size to the
paper size.
Shrink Oversized Pages — Select this to reduce pages if the original size is
larger than the paper size. Pages are printed without enlargement if the
original size is equal to or smaller than the paper size.
8 Email Direct Print Select the default setting as to whether to print E-mails with PDF, JPEG, and
XPS files attached by the Email Direct Print function.
Disable
— Select this to disable Email Direct Print.
Auto — Select this to process Email Direct Print automatically.
9 Enable Print Header Select whether to print the E-mail header when receiving E-mail print jobs.
[Disable] is set as the default.
10 Enable Print Message Body Select whether to print the body message when receiving E-mail print jobs.
[Enable] is set as the default.
Item name Description
1 Enable Download Select whether the function is enabled or disabled to download
customization packages for the printer driver.
Enable
— Select this to enable this download function.
Disable — Select this to disable this download function.
Item name Description
1
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 211
[Administration]
Setting up Default Raw Job Setting
In Default Raw Job Setting, you can specify the default raw job setting, which applies to a raw job for which no queue
name is specified or for which a specified queue name does not exist.
This setting is available only for some models.
You can also add LPR queue names and specify the raw job setting for each queue.
P.212 “Setting up Raw Job Setting”
Item name Description
1 Raw Jobs - Duplex Printing Select whether a raw job will be printed on both sides of the paper.
2 Raw Jobs - Default Paper Size Select the default paper size that applies to a raw job.
3 Raw Jobs - Default Paper
Type
Select the default paper type that applies to a raw job.
4 Raw Jobs - Default
Orientation
Select the default orientation that applies to a raw job.
5
Raw Jobs - Default Stapling
*1
Select whether a raw job will be stapled.
6 Raw Jobs - Default Output
Tray
*1
Select the default output tray that applies to a raw job. A banner page that is
created by NetWare, UNIX, and Windows operating systems also will be
outputted to the tray set here.
7 PCL Form Line Enter the point size of line spacing. (12.00 makes 6 lines/inch)
8 PCL Font Pitch Enter the font pitch when the selected font number represents a fixed pitch
scalable font. The font pitch indicates the number of ANK characters per inch.
10 pitch prints 10 ANK characters within an inch.
9 PCL Font Point Size Enter the font size when the selected font number represents a
proportionally spaced scalable font. The Font Size option allows you to
determine the point size (height) of the default font.
10 PCL Font Number Enter the font number of the internal PCL font to be used as the default font
for printing. You can check the font numbers and internal PCL fonts in the
Internal PCL Font List. For the internal PCL fonts, see the reference below:
Specifications - SPECIFICATIONS OF EQUIPMENT - List of Internal Fonts -
Internal PCL fonts list
11 PCL Line Termination Select the type of the line termination.
12 Symbol set Select the symbol set that applies to a raw job.
13 Paper Source Select the paper source that applies to a raw job.
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3
8.[Administration]
212 [Setup] Item List
*1 This function is not available for some models.
Setting up Raw Job Setting
In Raw Job Setting, you can add up to 16 LPR queue names and specify the raw job setting for each queue. These
queue names can be used when printing without a printer driver, such as printing from UNIX workstation.
This setting is available only for some models.
14 Do not Print Blank Pages Select whether blank pages are printed or not.
When printing is performed using the UNIX filters or CUPS, this setting is not
reflected. If you do not want to print blank pages in these printings, enable
[Do not Print Blank Pages] in the UNIX filter command or CUPS setting. For
the setting instructions, see the references below:
Installation - INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS FOR UNIX/Linux - Setting Up
the CUPS - Configuring UNIX/Linux printing using CUPS
Print - OTHER PRINTING METHODS - Printing From UNIX/Linux - General
options
15 Letterhead Print Mode Select whether the last page (odd page number) is printed on the same side
as the other odd-number pages when printing both sides of a Raw print job
whose total page number is odd. Select [ON] to print the last page on the
same side (back) as the other odd-number pages. Select [OFF] to print it on
the same side (front) as even-number pages.
This item is available only for some models.
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Select this to add a LPR queue.
P.213 “[Add New LPR Queue] screen”
2 [Edit] button Select this to edit the LPR queue selected in the LPR queue list.
P.213 “[Add New LPR Queue] screen”
3 [Delete] button Select this to delete the LPR queue selected in the LPR queue list.
4 LPR queue list Select this to display the list of registered LPR queues.
Item name Description
1
2
4
3
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 213
[Administration]
[Add New LPR Queue] screen
Item name Description
1 Queue Name Enter the queue name with up to 31 alphanumerical characters. The queue
name is case sensitive so that “Queue1” and “queue1” will be added as
different queues.
2 Duplex Printing Select whether a raw job will be printed on both sides of the paper.
3 Paper Size Select the default paper size that applies to a raw job.
4 Paper Type Select the default paper type that applies to a raw job.
5 Orientation Select the default orientation that applies to a raw job.
6
Stapling
*1
Select whether a raw job will be stapled.
7
Output Tray
*1
Select the default output tray that applies to a raw job. A banner page that is
created by NetWare, UNIX, and Windows operating systems also will be
outputted to the tray set here.
8 PCL Form Line Enter the number of lines printed per page.
9 PCL Font Pitch Enter the font pitch when the selected font number represents a fixed pitch
scalable font. The font pitch indicates the number of ANK characters per inch.
10 pitch prints 10 ANK characters within an inch.
10 PCL Font Point Size Enter the font size when the selected font number represents a
proportionally spaced scalable font. The Font Size option allows you to
determine the point size (height) of the default font.
11 PCL Font Number Enter the font number of the internal PCL font to be used as the default font
for printing. You can check the font numbers and internal PCL fonts in the
Internal PCL Font List. For the internal PCL fonts, see the reference below:
Specifications - SPECIFICATIONS OF EQUIPMENT - List of Internal Fonts -
Internal PCL fonts list
12 PCL Line Termination Select the type of the line termination.
13 Symbol set Select the symbol set that applies to a raw job.
14 Paper Source Select the paper source that applies to a raw job.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
8.[Administration]
214 [Setup] Item List
*1 This function is not available for some models.
15 Do not Print Blank Pages Select whether blank pages are printed or not.
When printing is performed using the UNIX filters or CUPS, this setting is not
reflected. If you do not want to print blank pages in these printings, enable
[Do not Print Blank Pages] in the UNIX filter command or CUPS setting. For
the setting instructions, see the references below:
Installation - INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS FOR UNIX/Linux - Setting Up
the CUPS - Configuring UNIX/Linux printing using CUPS
Print - OTHER PRINTING METHODS - Printing From UNIX/Linux - General
options
16 Letterhead Print Mode Select whether the last page (odd page number) is printed on the same side
as the other odd-number pages when printing both sides of a Raw print job
whose total page number is odd. Select [ON] to print the last page on the
same side (back) as the other odd-number pages. Select [OFF] to print it on
the same side (front) as even-number pages.
This item is available only for some models.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 215
[Administration]
Print Service settings
You can configure such print services as Raw TCP Print, LPD Print, IPP Print, FTP Print, NetWare Print, Email Print, and
Multi Station Print.
The [Print Service] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them. The settings will be updated by
pressing the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period.
Setting up Raw TCP Print
In Raw TCP Print, you can enable or disable the Raw TCP print service.
Setting up LPD Print
In LPD Print, you can set the LPD print options to enable the LPD/LPR print service.
Item name Description
1 Enable Raw TCP Enable or disable Raw TCP print service. [Enable] is set as the default.
2 Port Number If enabling the Raw TCP, enter the Raw TCP port number for the Raw TCP
print. You can enter a value in the range from 1024 to 32767. Generally the
default value “9100” is used.
When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting (SSL/
TLS port number when SSL/TLS in the HTTP setting is enabled) is selected,
you cannot access TopAccess or the e-Filing web utility. If you set it by
mistake, use the touch panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting
and enter the correct port number.
3 Enable Raw bi-directional Enable or disable Raw bi-directional communication. [Disable] is set as the
default.
This item is available only for some models.
Item name Description
1 Enable LPD Enable or disable LPD print service. [Enable] is set as the default.
1
2
3
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
216 [Setup] Item List
Setting up IPP Print
In IPP Print, you can set the IPP Print options to enable the IPP print service.
2 Port Number Enter the port number for LPR printing. You can enter a value in the range
from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “515” is used.
When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting (SSL/
TLS port number when SSL/TLS in the HTTP setting is enabled) is selected,
you cannot access TopAccess or the e-Filing web utility. If you set it by
mistake, use the touch panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting
and enter the correct port number.
3 Banners Select whether to print a banner page for each print job using LPR printing.
[OFF] is set as the default.
This item is available only for some models.
Item name Description
1 Enable IPP Enable or disable the IPP print service. [Enable] is set as the default.
2 Port80 Enable Enable or disable Port80 for IPP printing. Port631 is usually used for IPP
access so users must specify the IPP port to the URL, i.e. “http://<IP address
or DNS name>:631/Print”, for the IPP port. When this is enabled, this
equipment allows IPP access through the Port80, which is the default port for
the HTTP access so users do not have to specify the port number in the IPP
port, i.e. “http://<IP address or DNS name>/Print”. [Disable] is set as the
default.
3 Port Number If enabling the IPP, enter the IPP port number. You can enter a value in the
range from 1 to 65535. Generally the default value “631” is used.
The same port numbers as the ones for the following settings are not usable.
Change the applicable port number before that for the Port Number is set.
HTTP Network Service / Primary Port Number
HTTP Network Service / Secondary Port Number
HTTP Network Service / SSL/TLS Port Number
4 URL Display the URL for IPP printing. You cannot change the URL for IPP printing.
This URL should be set as the print port when users set up the printer driver
for IPP printing.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 217
[Administration]
5 Enable SSL/TLS Enable or disable SSL/TLS for IPP printing. [Enable] is set as the default.
When the SSL/TLS is enabled, users can print to the IPP print port using the
SSL/TLS. To print to the IPP print port using the SSL/TLS, specify the
following URL for the IPP print port.
https://<IP Address>:<SSL/TLS Port Number>/Print
Example: https://192.168.53.204:631/Print
Not all operating systems support SSL/TLS for all protocols.
6 SSL/TLS Port Number Enter the port number for SSL/TLS. You can enter a value in the range from 1
to 65535. Generally the default value “631” is used.
The same port numbers as the ones for the following settings are not usable.
Change the applicable port number before that for the SSL/TLS Port Number
is set.
HTTP Network Service / Primary Port Number
HTTP Network Service / Secondary Port Number
HTTP Network Service / SSL/TLS Port Number
7 SSL/TLS URL Display the SSL/TLS URL for IPP printing. You cannot change the SSL/TLS URL
for IPP printing. This SSL/TLS URL should be set as the print port when users
set up the printer driver for IPP printing if the SSL/TLS for IPP printing is
enabled.
8 Printer Name Enter the printer name for IPP printing. You can enter up to 127
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \
(backslash). The MFP name is set as the default.
9 Authentication Enable or disable the authentication for creating the IPP queue on the client
computers. When this is enabled, the dialog box to enter a user name and
password will be displayed when a user creates the IPP print port.
Disable — Select this to disable the authentication.
Basic — Select this to enable the authentication.
When IPP printing is used for printing from the macOS printer driver (PPD),
do not enable the authentication. The macOS printer driver (PPD) does not
support the authentication for IPP printing.
If you select [Enable] for [PIN Print], this setting cannot be changed from
[Disable].
10 User Name Enter the user name when the Authentication option is enabled. Users must
enter this user name to create an IPP queue on the client computers. You can
enter up to 127 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ;
(semicolon), #, @, and \ (backslash).
11 Password Enter the password when the Authentication option is enabled. Users must
enter this password to create an IPP queue on the client computers. You can
enter up to 127 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ;
(semicolon), #, and \ (backslash). “password” is set as the default.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
218 [Setup] Item List
Setting up FTP Print
In FTP Print, you can set the FTP Print options to enable the FTP print service.
Setting up NetWare Print
In NetWare Print, you can set the NetWare print options to enable the Novell print service.
12 PIN Print Enable or disable the PIN Print. [Disable] is set as the default.
If you select [Basic] for [Authentication], this setting cannot be changed
from [Disable].
If you leave print jobs unattended, the number of jobs in the printing queue
of this equipment reaches the maximum and printing may become
unavailable. In such cases, print or manually remove jobs in the printing
queue of this equipment. If IPP-PIN printing is used frequently, in order to
prevent the above problem, set the time as short as possible for [Period of
time to save Private,Hold,Proof,IPP-PIN and invalid Jobs]. (Less than 1 hour
is recommended.)
P.208 “Printer settings”
Item name Description
1 Enable FTP Printing Enable or disable FTP print service. [Disable] is set as the default.
2 Print User Name Enter the user name if you want to request the log-in user name from
someone who attempts FTP printing. You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical
characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash). If you
leave this box blank, the default user name “Print” is used.
3 Print Password Enter the password if you want to request the log-in password of users who
attempt FTP printing. You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and
symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #, and \ (backslash).
Item name Description
1 Print Server Name Enter the print server name that is created in the NetWare file server. You can
enter up to 47 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ;
(semicolon), #, and \ (backslash). The MFP name is set as the default.
2 Password Enter the password that is set to the print server, if required. You can enter up
to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon), #,
and \ (backslash).
3 Print Queue Scan Rate Enter how frequently to scan the print queues for print jobs. This should be
entered in seconds. You can enter between 1 to 255. “30” is set as the default.
Item name Description
1
2
3
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 219
[Administration]
Setting up Email Print
In Email Print, you can set how the E-mail print jobs are printed.
Setting up USB Cable Print
Item name Description
1 Enable Print Header Select whether to print the E-mail header when receiving E-mail print jobs.
[Disable] is set as the default.
2 Enable Print Message Body Select whether to print the body message when receiving E-mail print jobs.
[Enable] is set as the default.
3 Maximum Email Body Print Enter the maximum number of pages to print the body strings of the received
E-mail print job. You can enter between 1 to 99. “5” is set as the default.
4 Enable Print Email Error Select whether to print the report when an error occurs for E-mail printing.
[Enable] is set as the default.
5 Enable Email Error Forward Select whether to send an error message to an administrative E-mail address
when E-mail printing cannot be completed. [Disable] is set as the default.
6 Email Error Transfer Address If enabling the Email Error Forward, enter an administrative E-mail address
where the error message is sent. You can enter up to 192 alphanumerical
characters and symbols other than =, ; (semicolon) , #, and \ (backslash).
7 Enable Partial Email Select whether to print E-mail jobs that are partially received. [Enable] is set
as the default.
8 Partial Wait time Enter how long this equipment should wait before printing a partial E-mail
job. Specify within the range from 1 to 168 hours. “24” is set as the default.
9 MDN Reply Select whether to send an MDN message reply or not when the equipment
receives an E-mail print job with an MDN request. [Disable] is set as the
default.
Item name Description
1 USB Printing Set whether to enable or disable USB cable printing.
2 USB Cable Print Mode Select the mode used for printing via a USB connection.
IPP Over USB — Normally use this mode.
Legacy USB (Win) — Use this mode when you are already using our MFPs and
want to grant priority to the compatibility with them.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
8.[Administration]
220 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Multi Station Print
For the operation of the setting, see the reference below:
P.396 “Setting Multi Station Print”
You need the Multi Station Print Enabler option to use the [Multi Station Print] function. For details, contact your
service technician or representative.
If you have selected [Use Common Settings] on the [MFP Collaboration] > [Multi Station Print] screen, you cannot
add and delete the MFPs on this screen.
P.233 “Multi Station Print”
Use this service in an environment where the number of PCs to connect to 1 MFP is 30 or less.
You can connect up to 10 MFPs in a group and connect up to 5 groups including a group to which this MFP belongs:
you can add 4 groups for the connection.
Item name Description
1 Enable Multi Station Print Specify whether to enable or disable the Multi Station Print service.
2 Document Expired Time Specify the retention period of the printed document.
3 Number of Display Job Specify the number of jobs to be displayed.
4 Sort Order Specify the display order.
5 Thumbnail List Select whether to display thumbnail images of the multi station print files in
the document list on the control panel. Thumbnail images appear for PDF and
JPEG files and the fixed icon appears for files of other formats.
A thumbnail just represents the image of a file. The image may differ from the
original, having parts of it cut or blank spaces added.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19 20 21
22
14
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 221
[Administration]
6 Print Order Specify the print order.
When you select [Indication Order] from [Print Order], documents are printed
according to the [Sort Order] setting at the item 4.
7 Enable Printed Jobs Specify whether to enable or disable reprinting.
8 Connection MFP Specify the following communication settings for the multi station print.
Port Number — Enter the port number.
Enable SSL/TLS — Select the SSL/TLS setting for the multi station print.
- Disable
— Select this to disable SSL/TLS.
- Verify with imported CA certification(s) — Select this to use CA
certificates for connection. You need to export the certificate from each
MFP and import it into all MFPs.
- Accept all certificates without CA — Select this to accept all certificates
without CA. There is no need to import the certificate of each MFP.
Authentication — Select [Disable] or [Basic] for authentication. [Disable] is
set as the default.
User Name — Enter the user name. You can enter up to 127 alphanumerical
characters and symbols except = ; # @ \.
Password — Enter the password of the user. You can enter up to 127
alphanumerical characters and symbols except = ; # \.
All MFPs should have the same settings for the connection.
Although the multi station print is available even if the user authentication is
disabled, this MFP cannot be connected to other MFPs: the job list is not
shared.
9 [Add] button Allows you to add the device to connect.
10 [Delete] button Allows you to delete the selected device.
11 Connection MFP entry field Enter the IP address or host name of the MFP you want to register.
If the user authentication is disabled with more than one address registered in
the [Connection MFP] list, the [Connection MFP] settings are not displayed.
12 IP Address / Host Name Shows the IP address or host name of the registered MFP.
13 [Connect] button Tests the connection with the specified MFP to check if the communications
can be established.
Be sure to save the Multi Station Print settings with the [Save] button before
you test the MFP connection with the [Connect] button.
14 [TopAccess] button Starts TopAccess.
15 Group Connection Enable Select whether to connect the MFP groups. [Disable] is set as the default.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
222 [Setup] Item List
16 Own Group Name Enter a group name to which this MFP belongs. You can enter up to 12
characters.
All groups should share the same name of each group for the connection.
17 [Add] button Allows you to add a group. Click this button to show the [Add Connection
Group Information] screen. Set the following information and click [Save] to
save the settings. To edit the information, click the name of the group added
in the list.
Group Name — Enter the name of the connection group. You can enter up
to 12 characters.
Primary IP Address / Host Name — Enter the IP address or host name of the
primary device which represents the connection group. You can enter up to
256 characters. This device accesses the specified primary device first to
retrieve the job list.
Secondary IP Address / Host Name — Enter the IP address or host name of
the secondary device which represents the connection group. You can enter
up to 256 characters. If the access to the primary device fails, this device
accesses the specified secondary device next to retrieve the job list.
18 [Delete] button Allows you to delete the selected group.
19 Group Name Shows the name of the added connection group.
20 Primary IP Address / Host
Name
Shows the IP address or host name of the primary device which represents the
added connection group.
21 Secondary IP Address / Host
Name
Shows the IP address or host name of the secondary device which represents
the added connection group.
22 [Delete All] button Deletes all of the multi station print jobs.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 223
[Administration]
ICC Profile settings
You can set up profiles used in printing functions.
This setting is available only for some models.
The [ICC Profile] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Setting up RGB Source Profile
Select an input profile to be used for RGB color space conversion when you print RGB data.
Item name Description
1 Restore to Factory Default Click this to restore all the ICC profile settings to the factory defaults.
Item name Description
1 Default Profile Select an RGB source profile to be displayed as a default setting of the color
profile setting of a printer driver. You can select among the RGB source
profiles already registered in this equipment.
2 [Maintenance] button Click this to perform maintenance of RGB source profiles. The Maintenance
RGB Source Profile page is displayed as you click this. You can import profiles
into this equipment, or export or delete the registered profiles.
Profiles registered as a factory default cannot be deleted.
1
1
2
8.[Administration]
224 [Setup] Item List
Setting up CMYK Source Profile
Select an input profile to be used for CMYK color space conversion when you print CMYK data.
Setting up Destination Profile
Select an output profile to be used for color space conversion when you print color data.
Item name Description
1 Default Profile Select an CMYK source profile to be displayed as a default setting of the color
profile setting of a printer driver. You can select among CMYK source profiles
already registered in this equipment.
2 [Maintenance] button Click this to perform maintenance of CMYK source profiles. The Maintenance
CMYK Source Profile page is displayed as you click this. You can import
profiles into this equipment, or export or delete the registered profiles.
Profiles registered as a factory default cannot be deleted.
Item name Description
1 Default Profile Select a destination profile to be displayed as a default setting of the color
profile setting of a printer driver. You can select among destination profiles
already registered in this equipment.
2 [Maintenance] button Click this to perform maintenance of destination profiles. The Maintenance
Destination Profile page is displayed as you click this. You can import profiles
into this equipment, or export or delete the registered profiles.
Profiles registered as a factory default cannot be deleted.
3 Rendering Intent Select from [Perceptual], [Relative Colorimetric], [Saturation], and [Absolute
Colorimetric] for the Rendering Intent of the Destination Profile.
1
2
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 225
[Administration]
Setting up Customized RGB Profile
Contact your service technician for details on Customized RGB Profile.
Print Data Converter settings
For the details of the print data converter, contact your service technician.
The [Print Data Converter] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Item name Description
1 Default Profile Specify the Customized RGB Profile to be displayed as the default for the color
profile setting of the printer driver when printing. You can select from the
Customized RGB Profiles registered in this equipment.
2 [Maintenance] button Click this button when maintaining the Customized RGB Profile. When you
click, the Customized RGB Profile maintenance page is displayed that allows
you to import the profile into this equipment, or delete the registered profiles.
Profiles registered as a factory default cannot be deleted.
Item name Description
1 Print Data Converter Select whether the print data converter function is enabled or disabled.
You cannot enable the function if the converter setting file has not been
imported.
2 Import New Converter Import the converter setting file.
Click the [Choose File] button to select the file to import and click [Open].
Check the file name and click the [Import] button.
3 Current Converter Display the imported converter setting file.
1
2
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
226 [Setup] Item List
MFP Collaboration
You can make the necessary settings all at one screen for registration and collaboration of MFPs.
The [General] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Common Settings
You can register MFPs all at once on this screen to set up them for collaboration.
Be sure to register this equipment as a collaborating MFP.
You do not need to click the [Save] button on the [Common Settings] screen.
Item name Description
1 Menu area Click a function name for the MFPs collaboration.
2 Setting area Set the function that you have selected in the menu area.
You need the Multi Station Print Enabler option to use the [Multi Station Print]
function. For details, contact your service technician or representative.
Item name Description
1 [Cancel] button Cancel the settings.
2 [Add] button Registers an MFP for collaboration.
Enter the IP address or host name of the collaborating MFP in the input box
below and then click the [Add] button to register it. You can register up to 10
MFPs.
1 2
1
5 6
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 227
[Administration]
Shared Address Book
You can set the address book that is shared on the collaborating MFPs. The settings are applied to the MFPs registered
in the list.
Register MFPs on the [Common Settings] screen in advance to select the [Use Common Settings] setting.
P.226 “Common Settings”
The [Shared Address Book] settings are linked to the settings on the [Registration] > [Address Book] > [Shared Setting]
screen.
P.47 “Shared Setting”
3 [Delete] button Deletes the MFP that you have selected in the list below.
4 Input box Enter the IP address or host name of an MFP that you want to register.
5 Server Address Shows the IP address of the registered MFP.
6 [TopAccess] button Starts TopAccess of the MFP concerned.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Shared Address Book Select whether this equipment should act as a primary or secondary MFP
when managing the Shared Address Book in sync with other MFPs.
Disable — Does not synchronize.
Enable (Primary) — Synchronizes as a primary MFP.
Enable (Secondary) — Synchronizes as a secondary MFP.
Select one MFP from among MFPs and select [Enable (Primary)] on it. Be sure
to select [Enable (Secondary)] on other MFPs. As a result, the Address Book of
the primary MFP can be shared on the secondary MFPs.
4 Connection Timeout Enter the timeout time to stop communicating if you cannot connect to the
primary or secondary MFP. You can set 1 to 180 seconds.
Item name Description
11
10
141312
1 2
4
5
6
7
8
3
9
8.[Administration]
228 [Setup] Item List
Shared User Management
You can set the management of user information that is shared on the collaborating MFPs. The settings are applied to
the MFPs registered in the list.
Register MFPs on the [Common Settings] screen in advance to select the [Use Common Settings] setting.
P.226 “Common Settings”
Although information can be synchronized and managed for up to 10,000 users, it is recommended that the
maximum number of users should be 2,000 for the practical synchronized management.
User information cannot be registered, updated, and deleted on the user management screen of the secondary
MFPs.
Information on the collaborating MFPs is linked to the MFP information on the [User Management] > [Shared
Setting] screen.
P.99 “[Shared Settings] Item list <access policy mode>”
The [Shared User Management] and [Connection Timeout] settings are linked to the settings at [Administration] >
[Security] > [Authentication] > [User Authentication Setting] > [Shared Setting].
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
5 Use Common Settings Uses information of the MFPs registered on the [Common Settings] screen to
update the following list automatically: you cannot change the list. The
[TopAccess] and [Sync] buttons are not available for your own MFP.
6 Use Separate Settings Uses information of the MFPs registered in the following list.
7 [Add] button Adds a new secondary MFP.
Enter the IP address or host name for the target secondary MFP in the input
box below, and then click the [Add] button to register. You can register up to
10 MFPs.
8 [Delete] button Deletes the selected MFP from the list of secondary MFPs.
9 [Sync All] button Synchronizes all the secondary MFPs with the primary MFP to share the
Address Book.
10 Input box Enter the IP address or host name when registering a secondary MFP.
11 Server Address Shows the IP address of the added secondary MFP.
12 [TopAccess] button Starts TopAccess.
13 [Sync] button Synchronizes the secondary MFP with the primary MFP to share the Address
Book.
14 Last Update Displays the previous update time.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 229
[Administration]
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Shared User Management Select whether this equipment should act as a primary or secondary MFP
when managing user information in sync with other MFPs.
Disable — Does not synchronize.
Enable(Primary) — Synchronizes as a primary MFP.
Enable(Secondary) — Synchronizes as a secondary MFP.
Select one MFP from among MFPs and select [Enable (Primary)] on it. Be sure
to select [Enable (Secondary)] on other MFPs. As a result, the user information
of the primary MFP can be shared on the secondary MFPs.
4 Connection Timeout Enter the timeout period before stopping communication if the primary MFP
cannot connect to the secondary MFPs. You can set 1 to 180 seconds.
5 Use Common Settings Uses information of the MFPs registered on the [Common Settings] screen to
update the following list automatically: you cannot change the list. The
[TopAccess] and [Sync] buttons are not available for your own MFP.
6 Use Separate Settings Uses information of the MFPs registered in the following list.
7 [Add] button Adds a new secondary MFP.
Enter the IP address or host name for the secondary MFP for the distribution
destination in the input box below, and then click the [Add] button to register.
You can register up to 10 MFPs.
8 [Delete] button Deletes the selected MFP from the list of secondary MFPs.
11
10
141312
1 2
3
5
6
7
8
4
9
8.[Administration]
230 [Setup] Item List
9 [Sync All] button Synchronizes all the secondary MFPs with the primary MFP to share the user
information.
The synchronized information is the user information (User Name,
Password, PIN Code, Card Information, Role Assignment, Group
Assignment, PanelUI Language, PanelUI Keyboard Layout, Email Address,
Home Directory, PanelUI Keyboard Display). Settings for Department
Management and Project Management are not synchronized.
Only user information updated since the last sync is synchronized. When a
user has been deleted, the user of the secondary MFP is also deleted during
the synchronization.
During the initial synchronization, if there is user information in a secondary
MFP that is not registered to the printer when the printer is a primary MFP,
the user information for the secondary MFP is deleted.
The Port Number does not synchronize with the primary MFP or different
secondary MFPs.
P.239 “Off Device Customization Architecture settings”
10 Input box Enter the IP address or host name when registering a secondary MFP.
11 Server Address Shows the IP address of the added secondary MFP.
12 [TopAccess] button Starts TopAccess.
13 [Sync] button Synchronizes the secondary MFP with the primary MFP to share the user
information.
14 Last Update Displays the previous update time.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 231
[Administration]
Shared Home
You can set the shared home for the collaborating MFPs. For the procedure for home data synchronization, see the
reference below:
P.398 “Setting Home Data Synchronization”
Register MFPs on the [Common Settings] screen in advance to select the [Select from Common Settings] setting.
P.226 “Common Settings”
The [Shared Home] settings are linked to the settings on the [Administration] > [Setup] > [General] > [Home Setting]
screen.
P.115 “Home Setting”
When [Disable] is selected from [Sync Setting]
When [Use Network Server for Sync] is selected from [Sync Setting]
When [Use MFP for Sync] is selected from [Sync Setting]
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
1 2
3
1 2
3
14
5
6
7
8
4
1 2
3
14
10
11
12
13
9
8.[Administration]
232 [Setup] Item List
3 Sync Setting Specify whether or not to synchronize the HOME screen with the network
server or other MFPs.
Disable
: Disable the Home sync function.
Use Network Server for Sync: Select this to use the network server for
synchronization.
Use MFP for Sync: Select this to use MFP for synchronization.
4 Server Name Enter the name of the network server.
5 Port Number Enter the port number of the network server.
6 User Name Enter the name of the user who accesses the network server.
7 Password Enter the password of the user who accesses the network server.
8 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether SSL/TLS is enabled or disabled.
9 Assume this MFP is the
Primary Server
Select this check box to synchronize this MFP as the primary server. When you
clear this check box, another MFP can synchronize as the primary server.
If the FTP server is disabled, you cannot set this MFP as the primary server.
P.152 “Setting up FTP Server”
10 Select from Common Settings Select the primary MFP from among the MFPs registered on the [Common
Settings] screen when you set another MFP other than this MFP as the primary
server.
11 Use Separate Settings Enter the IP address of the primary MFP when you set another MFP other than
this MFP as the primary server.
12 Port Number Enter the port number of the primary server when you set another MFP other
than this MFP as the primary server.
13 Enable SSL/TLS Select whether SSL/TLS is enabled or disabled when you set another MFP
other than this MFP as the primary server.
14 Delete All Shared Data Delete all the shared data stored in the FTP server.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 233
[Administration]
Multi Station Print
You can set the multi station print function that is used on the collaborating MFPs. The settings are applied to the
MFPs registered in the list. For the operation of the setting, see the following.
P.396 “Setting Multi Station Print”
You need the Multi Station Print Enabler option to use the [Multi Station Print] function. For details, contact your
service technician or representative.
Register MFPs on the [Common Settings] screen in advance to select the [Select from Common Settings] setting.
P.226 “Common Settings”
The [Multi Station Print] settings are linked to the settings on the [Administration] > [Setup] > [Print Service] > [Multi
Station Print] screen.
P.220 “Setting up Multi Station Print”
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Enable Multi Station Print Specify whether to enable or disable the Multi Station Print service.
4 Document Expired Time Specify the retention period of the printed document.
5 Number of Display Job Specify the number of jobs to be displayed.
6 Sort Order Specify the display order.
12
13
1
2
3
4
10
11
7
8
9
5
6
23
26
24 25
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
18
8.[Administration]
234 [Setup] Item List
7 Thumbnail List Select whether to display thumbnail images of the multi station print files in
the document list on the control panel. Thumbnail images appear for PDF and
JPEG files and the fixed icon appears for files of other formats.
A thumbnail just represents the image of a file. The image may differ from the
original, having parts of it cut or blank spaces added.
8 Print Order Specify the print order.
When you select [Indication Order] from [Print Order], documents are printed
according to the [Sort Order] setting at the item 4.
9 Enable Printed Jobs Specify whether to enable or disable reprinting.
10 Connection MFP Specify the following communication settings for the multi station print.
Port Number — Enter the port number.
Enable SSL/TLS — Select the SSL/TLS setting for the multi station print.
- Disable
— Select this to disable SSL/TLS.
- Verify with imported CA certification(s) — Select this to use CA
certificates for connection. You need to export the certificate from each
MFP and import it into all MFPs.
- Accept all certificates without CA — Select this to accept all certificates
without CA. There is no need to import the certificate of each MFP.
Authentication — Select [Disable] or [Basic] for authentication. [Disable] is
set as the default.
User Name — Enter the user name. You can enter up to 127 alphanumerical
characters and symbols except = ; # @ \.
Password — Enter the password of the user. You can enter up to 127
alphanumerical characters and symbols except = ; # \.
All MFPs should have the same settings for the connection.
Although the multi station print is available even if the user authentication is
disabled, this MFP cannot be connected to other MFPs: the job list is not
shared.
11 Use Common Settings Uses information of the MFPs registered on the [Common Settings] screen to
update the following list automatically: you cannot change the list. The
[Connection] and [TopAccess] buttons are not available for your own MFP.
12 Use Separate Settings Uses information of the MFPs registered in the following list.
13 [Add] button Allows you to add the device to connect.
14 [Delete] button Allows you to delete the selected device.
15 Connection MFP entry field Enter the IP address or host name of the MFP you want to register.
If the user authentication is disabled with more than one address registered in
the [Connection MFP] list, the [Connection MFP] settings are not displayed.
16 Server Address Shows the IP address or host name of the registered MFP.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 235
[Administration]
17 [Connect] button Tests the connection with the specified MFP to check if the communications
can be established.
Be sure to save the Multi Station Print settings with the [Save] button before
you test the MFP connection with the [Connect] button.
18 [TopAccess] button Starts TopAccess.
19 Group Connection Enable Select whether to connect the MFP groups. [Disable] is set as the default.
20 Own Group Name Enter a group name to which this MFP belongs. You can enter up to 12
characters.
All groups should share the same name of each group for the connection.
21 [Add] button Allows you to add a group. Click this button to show the [Add Connection
Group Information] screen. Set the following information and click [Save] to
save the settings. To edit the information, click the name of the group added
in the list.
Group Name — Enter the name of the connection group. You can enter up
to 12 characters.
Primary IP Address / Host Name — Enter the IP address or host name of the
primary device which represents the connection group. You can enter up to
256 characters. This device accesses the specified primary device first to
retrieve the job list.
Secondary IP Address / Host Name — Enter the IP address or host name of
the secondary device which represents the connection group. You can enter
up to 256 characters. If the access to the primary device fails, this device
accesses the specified secondary device next to retrieve the job list.
22 [Delete] button Allows you to delete the selected group.
23 Group Name Shows the name of the added connection group.
24 Primary IP Address / Host
Name
Shows the IP address or host name of the primary device which represents the
added connection group.
25 Secondary IP Address / Host
Name
Shows the IP address or host name of the secondary device which represents
the added connection group.
26 [Delete All] button Deletes all of the multi station print jobs.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
236 [Setup] Item List
Embedded Web Browser settings
You can set the EWB (Embedded Web Browser) function to display a web page on the touch panel.
The [EWB] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
The External Interface Enabler is required to use the EWB (Embedded Web Browser) function.
This setting is available only for some models.
When an error page appears due to a network failure while being connected to the internet, this may continue to be
displayed even after recovery has taken place. In that case, reboot the equipment.
Setting up Home Page Setting
You can specify the home page for the EWB function.
Setting up Proxy Setting
You can set the proxy for the EWB function.
The proxy settings are basically common to the Embedded Web Browser, Idle Screen, and Application functions. If
you change them for one function, they change accordingly for others.
P.290 “Proxy Setting”
P.369 “Proxy Setting”
Item name Description
1 Home Page Enter the URL of the home page.
2 Enforcement automatic
screen change
Specify whether or not the screen is automatically changed to [JOB STATUS]
when a job cannot be performed due to paper empty or toner empty, etc.
while the EWB screen is displayed.
Enable — Select this to change the screen to [JOB STATUS].
Disable — Select this not to change the screen.
Item name Description
1 Host Name Enter the host name of the proxy server.
2 Port Number Enter the port number of the proxy server.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 237
[Administration]
Setting up Certificate Setting
You can set the deny access setting for the EWB function.
Setting up EWB History Setting
You can set the history conditions for the EWB function.
3 Bypass proxy settings for
these addresses
Enter URLs which do not use the proxy server delimited with a semicolon (;).
4 Account ID Enter the account ID of the proxy server.
5 Password Enter the password of the proxy server.
6 Use automatic configuration
script
Enable or disable the automatic configuration script.
7 URL Specify the location of the PAC file by URL for the automatic configuration
script.
Note the following points for the PAC file.
Be sure to enter the protocol.
Do not use functions.
Item name Description
1 Deny Access Setting Makes the deny access setting. The connection of EWB is denied when this
setting is enabled while [Enable SSL/TLS] is enabled in HTTP and an invalid
certificate (CA certificate) is used.
Item name Description
1 EWB History Specify whether to restrict the size of the recorded history information. The
size is restricted to 100MB if you restrict.
Item name Description
1
1
8.[Administration]
238 [Setup] Item List
Setting up Server Registration Setting
You can register the address of the server used for the EWB function.
Setting up URL List for Home screen
You can register URLs to be displayed in the Home screen on the touch panel.
[Add New URL] screen
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Registers the server address entered in the entry column into the list.
2 Entry column Enter the server address.
3 [Delete] button Deletes the selected server address from the list.
4 Server Address list Lists the registered server addresses.
Item name Description
1 [Add] button Registers a URL to be displayed on the touch panel.
P.238 “[Add New URL] screen”
2 [Delete] button Deletes the URL that you have selected from the URL list for Home screen.
3 URL list Lists URLs which are displayed on the touch panel.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Registers the entered URL name and URL.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels adding a URL.
3 URL Name Enter the URL name to be registered.
4 URL Enter the URL to be registered.
5 Enforcement automatic
screen change
Specify whether or not the screen is automatically changed to [JOB STATUS]
when a job cannot be performed due to paper empty or toner empty, etc.
while the EWB screen is displayed.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
3
1
4
5
2
8.[Administration]
[Setup] Item List 239
[Administration]
Off Device Customization Architecture settings
Set ODCA (Off Device Customization Architecture) when you are linking external application software to services
provided by this equipment.
For details, refer to the application software manual.
The [ODCA] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Setting up Network
You can set up the network respectively for SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) and REST (REpresentational State
Transfer).
Setting up Configuration
Notification Events
Item name Description
1 Enable Port Select whether the external connection is enabled or disabled.
2 Port Number Specify the port number where the external connection is enabled.
3 Enable SSL/TLS Port Select whether SSL/TLS is enabled or disabled for the external connection.
4 SSL/TLS Port Number Specify the SSL/TLS port number where the external connection is enabled.
Item name Description
1 Session Timeout(60-99999) Specify the duration to maintain the connection.
Item name Description
1 [Delete All] button Deletes all notification events registered with external application software.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
1
8.[Administration]
240 [Setup] Item List
Version
The screen displays version information, depending on the model.
The [Version] submenu can be accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Setup] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Item name Description
1 Printer Manufacture Displays the manufacturer name of your equipment.
2 Copier Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of your equipment.
3 Copier Main ROM Version Displays the main ROM version information of your equipment.
4 Copier Scanner ROM Version Displays the copier scanner ROM version information of your equipment.
5 License Guide The License Guide can be downloaded.
1
2
3
4
5
[Administration]
[Security] Item List 241
0.[Security] Item List
Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the [Security] menu from the
[Administration] page.
For how to access it, see the reference below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
Authentication settings
You can restrict user operations using the authentication function of your equipment.
The [Authentication] submenu can be accessed from the [Security] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Security] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.241 “[Security] Item List”
Setting up Department Setting
When you want to manage the counters for every department, enable department management. If this is done, the
department code input screen will be displayed on the computer and the touch panel when copying, scanning, faxing,
faxing via the Internet, and operating on e-Filing to enable you to manage operations by departments.
The following applications can access your equipment regardless of the department setting.
AddressBook Viewer
Backup/Restore Utility
TWAIN Driver
File Downloader
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings after you change the settings at [Security] menu.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the changed settings.
Item name Description
1 Department Code Select whether or not to enable department management. [Disable] is set as
the default.
1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.[Administration]
242 [Security] Item List
* The number of outputs are only counted for received faxes, in which the department code needs to be entered, such as manual reception,
polling reception or the printing of originals stored in the confidential mailbox and the bulletin mailbox.
2 Copy When this function is enabled, the following counters are managed in each
department.
Number of copied sheets
Number of originals scanned while copying
[Enable] is set as the default.
3 Fax When this function is enabled, the following counters are managed in each
department.
Number of transmitted fax pages
Number of original pages scanned while transmitting faxes
Number of received fax pages
Number of received fax pages which are printed*
[Enable] is set as the default.
4 Print When this function is enabled, the number of outputs in printing (for printing,
received E-mail and Internet Fax) is managed in each department.
[Enable] is set as the default.
5 Scan When this function is enabled, the number of originals scanned such as when
they are stored in the shared folder is managed in each department.
[Enable] is set as the default.
6 List When this function is enabled, the number of system page outputs is managed
in each department.
[Enable] is set as the default.
7 User Functions When this function is enabled, operations in the USER FUNCTION menu are
managed in each department.
[Enable] is set as the default.
8 EWB Specify whether or not to enable the EWB (Embedded Web Browser) function.
You need the External Interface Enabler option to use EWB.
9 Require Department Code in
User Registration
Select whether or not to register the department code when registering a
user. [Disable] is set as the default.
10 Invalid Department Code
Print Job
Select whether or not to print jobs without a department code or with an
invalid department code when department management is enabled.
Force use of department code — Select this to force the entry of the
department code when printing.
Print — Select this to print jobs with an invalid department code.
Delete — Select this to delete jobs with an invalid department code.
While SNMP communication is disabled in the printer driver, if the Invalid
Department Code Print Job is set to Force use of department code and an
invalid department code is entered in the printer driver, a printing job will be
registered in Invalid department code print job list.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 243
[Administration]
Setting up User Authentication Setting
You can configure user authentication to access your equipment.
Item name Description
1 User Authentication Select whether or not to enable user authentication. [Disable] is set as the
default.
You cannot configure “E-mail authentication” if you enable user
authentication.
The No Limit Black function becomes unavailable if you enable user
authentication. For the details of the No Limit Black function, see the
reference below:
User Functions - MANAGING COUNTERS (COUNTER MENU) - Department
Management - Setting the No Limit Black function
2 User Authentication
According To Function
Specify whether or not to authenticate users for each function.
3 Copy Enable or disable user authentication when the Copy function is used.
[Enable] is set as the default.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
8.[Administration]
244 [Security] Item List
4 Fax Enable or disable user authentication when the FAX function is used. [Enable]
is set as the default.
When you want to set [Disable] for this function, use the latest version of a N/
W-Fax driver. For details, contact your service technician.
5 Print Enable or disable user authentication when the Print function is used.
[Enable] is set as the default.
When you want to set [Disable] for this function, use the latest version of a
printer driver. For details, contact your service technician.
6 Scan Enable or disable user authentication when the Scan function is used.
[Enable] is set as the default.
7 List Enable or disable user authentication when the List function is used. [Enable]
is set as the default.
8 User Functions Enable or disable user authentication when the User Functions are used.
[Enable] is set as the default.
9 EWB Specify whether or not to enable the EWB (Embedded Web Browser) function.
You need the External Interface Enabler option to use EWB.
10 Authentication Method for
Admin
Select the administrator authentication method.
User Name and Password —Select this to authenticate an administrator
with a user name and a password.
Only Password —Select this to authenticate an administrator with a
password.
11 Authentication failed print
job/Raw Print Job
Select whether or not to print jobs which have failed user authentication.
Hold — Select this to register in the hold print job.
Print — Select this to print jobs which failed authentication.
Delete — Select this to delete jobs which failed authentication.
When the N/W-Fax driver is used, selecting [Hold] deletes the job.
12 Auto Release on Login Specify whether to process private jobs and hold jobs at login.
Disable — Select this not to print at login.
Enable — Select this to print at login.
13 Project Management Specify whether or not to enable project management.
14 Print Job(Without Project
Code)
Specify whether or not to print the print jobs without project codes when
Project Management is enabled.
Hold — Registers print jobs to Hold.
Print — Prints print jobs that failed authentication.
Delete — Deletes print jobs that failed authentication.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 245
[Administration]
15 Authentication Method for
Print Jobs
Select the user authentication method for print jobs. Although this
equipment can be configured to use two network channels at the same time,
it might not be possible to authenticate users via the secondary network
depending on the authentication processes in the network environment. You
can use this setting to set the user authentication to the network
environment.
Use User Name and Domain Name
— Uses a user name and domain name
for authentication. This is the usual authentication method for a single
network channel.
Use Only User Name — Uses only a user name for authentication. If users
can be authenticated only with their names, they can print with this
equipment.
Use Only Domain Participation Information — Uses only information
about the domain participation for authentication. If users can be
authenticated only with the domain participation information, they can
print with this equipment.
The simultaneous use of the two-channel network can be set at
[Administration] > [Setup] > [Network] > [Basic Setting] > [Network
Composition]. For details, see the reference below:
P.120 “Basic Setting”
16 Use Password Authentication
for Print Job
Performs user authentication for each print job. The user name and password
are required to execute printing.
17 Delete Own Account Specify whether to permit users to delete their own accounts.
Disable — Prohibit user to delete their own accounts.
Enable — Permit users to delete their own accounts.
The default setting varies from shipment to shipment. This function is
enabled as a default for some districts.
18 Enable Guidance Screen Select the screen dedicated to the card authentication.
For the details of the card authentication setting, contact your service
technician.
19 Enable Guest User Enables operations by the guest user.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
246 [Security] Item List
20 Authentication Type Select the authentication method.
MFP Local Authentication
You can manage network users with the MFP local authentication of your
equipment when you do not have a user authentication system in your
environment.
When MFP local authentication is enabled, users must enter the user name
and password that is registered in the equipment to operate the touch
panel.
P.247 “MFP Local Authentication”
Windows Domain Authentication
You can manage network users with Windows domain authentication when
you already manage your network using Windows domains.
When Windows domain authentication is enabled, users must enter the
user name and password that are registered in the Windows domain to
operate the touch panel.
P.251 “Windows Domain Authentication”
LDAP Authentication
You can manage network users with LDAP authentication when you already
manage your network using LDAP. When LDAP authentication is enabled,
users must enter the user name and password that are registered in the
LDAP server to operate the touch panel.
P.254 “LDAP Authentication”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 247
[Administration]
MFP Local Authentication
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10
8.[Administration]
248 [Security] Item List
Item name Description
1 Automatic deletion of
unlogged-in user
Enables the function to delete unlogged-in local users automatically after the
specified period. If the days set in [Validity Period of Local User] have passed
after local users logged out last, they are automatically deleted every 24
hours or at the restart of the equipment.
2 PIN Code Authentication
Setting
PIN Code Authentication — Select the PIN code authentication method.
Disable — Select this no to use the PIN code authentication. Use the user
name and password for authentication.
Enable — Select this to use the PIN code authentication. Instead of the PIN
code, it is possible to use the user name and password for authentication.
Minimum PIN Code Length — Enter a figure that specifies the minimum
digits for the PIN code.
3 Card Authentication Select whether or not to enable card authentication.
For the details of the card authentication setting, contact your service
technician.
4 Auto Change Login User Select whether or not to enable the function to change login users
automatically when authenticating users with the card.
5 Card ID is used as User Name Select whether or not to use the card ID as a user name.
6 Create User Information
Automatically
Select whether or not to add unregistered user information to the equipment
automatically when authenticating users with the card.
7 User authentication is
performed during automatic
registration
Select whether or not to perform user authentication with the external
servers before registering the user information automatically when [Create
User Information Automatically] is enabled. When this setting is enabled, only
the information of users authenticated with the external servers is registered.
You need to select the authentication type and set the external
authentication servers in the list of servers.
8 Authentication Type Select the authentication method for the automatic user registration when
[User authentication is performed during automatic registration] is enabled.
Windows Domain Authentication — You can manage users with Windows
domain authentication when you already manage your network using
Windows domains.
LDAP Authentication — You can manage users with LDAP authentication
when you already manage your network using LDAP.
9 Use NT Domain Server Select whether or not to manage the domain with the NT domain controller
when [Windows Domain Authentication] is selected from [Authentication
Type].
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 249
[Administration]
10 Server List Displays up to 16 user authentication domains or servers in the list depending
on the [Authentication Type] setting.
Windows Domain Authentication — Displays a list of domains that are
assigned for Windows Domain Authentication. Click [Add] and enter the
following items in the displayed screen to register a domain. Select the
domain and click [Edit] to edit a domain. Use [Move Up] and [Move Down]
to change the priority order in the list. Delete the selected domain using
[Delete] button.
Domain Name — Enter the domain name.
PDC — Enter the server name or IP address of the Primary Domain
Controller (PDC). You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and
symbols.
BDC — Enter the server name or IP address of the Backup Domain
Controller (BDC) as required. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical
characters and symbols.
You can add the primary domain controllers and the backup
domain controllers only when [Use NT Domain Server] is
selected.
If the wrong primary or backup domain controller is specified,
the [OK] in the user authentication screen on the touch panel is
highlighted while this equipment searches for the primary or
backup domain controller for 2 to 4 minutes.
LDAP Authentication — Displays a list of servers that are assigned for the
card authentication. Click [Server Assignment] and add the server in the
displayed screen to assign a server. Register the available server as [LDAP
Client]. Use [Move Up] and [Move Down] to change the priority order in the
list.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
11 Require PIN Code Select whether or not to require PIN code when authenticating users with the
card.
This function is available only on the equipment that supports the PIN code
input.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
250 [Security] Item List
12 Shared Setting Shared User Management —Select whether this equipment should act as a
primary or secondary MFP when managing user information in sync with
other MFPs.
Disable — Does not synchronize.
Enable(Primary) — Synchronizes as a primary MFP.
Enable(Secondary) — Synchronizes as a secondary MFP.
Connection Timeout —Enter the timeout period before stopping
communication if the primary MFP cannot connect to the secondary MFPs.
You can set 1 to 180 seconds.
The [Shared User Management] and [Connection Timeout] settings are
linked to the same settings on the [MFP Collaboration] > [Shared User
Management] screen.
P.228 “Shared User Management”
Although information can be synchronized and managed for up to 10,000
users, it is recommended that the maximum number of users should be
2,000 for the practical synchronized management.
User information cannot be registered, updated, and deleted on the user
management screen of the secondary MFPs.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 251
[Administration]
Windows Domain Authentication
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
8.[Administration]
252 [Security] Item List
Item name Description
1 Create User Information
Automatically
Select whether or not to register user information automatically to this
equipment. This item is selected as the default. By registering user accounts
to the printer, you can manage counters and quotas for each user.
When automatically adding a user while printing from the printer driver,
enable [Use Password Authentication for Print Job] on the [User
Authentication Setting] screen.
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
2 Use cache information when
user authentication failed
Either of the following data is saved according to the authentication method.
Password, Card number, Domain name, PIN code, Home Directory
information or RBAC information.
The cache information will be updated if user authentication succeeds with
the authentication server. However, if a user is authenticated with the cache
information, it is not updated.
3 Validity Period of Cache Enter the number of days to maintain the cache information. 1 to 14 days can
be set from the latest update.
4 Register Local User which is
available in Windows Domain
Authentication/LDAP
Authentication
Select this to register a local user who can log in with MFP Local
Authentication using the cache information for an MFP managed with
external authentication.
5 Validity Period of Local User Enter the number of valid days for local users. Up to 180 days can be set from
the user creation day. If 0 is set, the number of valid days will be indefinite.
6 Use NT Domain Server Select this check box if you are managing the domain using the NT domain
controller.
7 Domain List Displays a list of domains that are assigned for Windows Domain
Authentication.
Click [Add] and enter the following items in the displayed screen to register a
domain. Select the domain and click [Edit] to edit a domain.
Use [Move Up] and [Move Down] to change the priority order in the list. Delete
the selected domain using [Delete] button.
Domain Name — Enter the domain name.
PDC — Enter the server name or IP address of the Primary Domain Controller
(PDC). You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
BDC — Enter the server name or IP address of the Backup Domain Controller
(BDC) as required. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and
symbols.
You can add the primary domain controllers and the backup domain
controllers only when [Use NT Domain Server] is selected.
If the wrong primary or backup domain controller is specified, the [OK] in
the user authentication screen on the touch panel is highlighted while this
equipment searches for the primary or backup domain controller for 2 to 4
minutes.
8 Connection Timeout Enter the timeout period for quitting communication when no response is
received from the PDC or BDC server. Specify within the range from 1 to 180
seconds.
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 253
[Administration]
9 Role Based Access Setting Configure role based access using an LDAP server.
Role Based Access using LDAP server — Select whether enable or disable
role based access. [Disable] is set as the default.
LDAP Server — Select the LDAP server that manages the Role Based Access
Control.
10 PIN Code Authentication
Setting
PIN Code Authentication — Select the PIN code authentication method.
Disable
— Select this no to use the PIN code authentication. Use the user
name and password for authentication.
Enable — Select this to use the PIN code authentication. Instead of the PIN
code, it is possible to use the user name and password for authentication.
Minimum PIN Code Length — Enter a figure that specifies the minimum
digits for the PIN code.
11 Card Authentication Select whether or not to enable card authentication.
For the details of the card authentication setting, contact your service
technician.
12 Auto Change Login User Select whether or not to enable the function to change login users
automatically when authenticating users with the card.
13 Require PIN Code Select whether or not to require PIN code when authenticating users with the
card.
This function is available only on the equipment that supports the PIN code
input.
14 LDAP Server List Displays a list of servers that are assigned for the PIN code or card
authentication. Click [Server Assignment] and add the server in the displayed
screen to assign a server. Register the available server as [LDAP Client].
Use [Move Up] and [Move Down] to change the priority order in the list.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
If [Windows Server] is selected as an LDAP server for the PIN code or card
authentication, the following attribute type of user name is employed for the
one at the login and the one of the user which is automatically registered
while [Create User Information Automatically] is enabled.
If Kerberos is selected to access the LDAP server: sAMAccountName
If Digest-MD5, CRAM-MD5, Login, Plain or Simple Bind is selected to access
the LDAP server: displayName
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
254 [Security] Item List
LDAP Authentication
Item name Description
1 Create User Information
Automatically
Select whether or not to register user information automatically to this
equipment. This item is selected as the default. By registering user accounts
to the printer, you can manage counters and quotas for each user.
When automatically adding a user while printing from the printer driver,
enable [Use Password Authentication for Print Job] on the [User
Authentication Setting] screen.
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
11
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 255
[Administration]
2 Use cache information when
user authentication failed
Either of the following data is saved according to the authentication method.
Password, Card number, Domain name, PIN code, Home Directory
information or RBAC information.
The cache information will be updated if user authentication succeeds with
the authentication server. However, if a user is authenticated with the cache
information, it is not updated.
3 Validity Period of Cache Enter the number of days to maintain the cache information. 1 to 14 days can
be set from the latest update.
4 Register Local User which is
available in Windows Domain
Authentication/LDAP
Authentication
Select this to register a local user who can log in with MFP Local
Authentication using the cache information for an MFP managed with external
authentication.
5 Validity Period of Local User Enter the number of valid days for local users. Up to 180 days can be set from
the user creation day. If 0 is set, the number of valid days will be indefinite.
6 LDAP Server List Displays a list of servers that are assigned for LDAP Authentication. Click
[Server Assignment] and add the server in the displayed screen to assign a
server. Register the available server as [LDAP Client].
Use [Move Up] and [Move Down] to change the priority order in the list.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
7 Role Based Access Setting Configure role based access using an LDAP server.
Role Based Access using LDAP server — Select whether enable or disable
role based access. [Disable] is set as the default.
LDAP Server — Select the LDAP server that manages the Role Based Access
Control.
8 PIN Code Authentication
Setting
PIN Code Authentication — Select the PIN code authentication method.
Disable — Select this no to use the PIN code authentication. Use the user
name and password for authentication.
Enable — Select this to use the PIN code authentication. Instead of the PIN
code, it is possible to use the user name and password for authentication.
Minimum PIN Code Length — Enter a figure that specifies the minimum digits
for the PIN code.
9 Card Authentication Select whether or not to enable card authentication.
For the details of the card authentication setting, contact your service
technician.
10 Auto Change Login User Select whether or not to enable the function to change login users
automatically when authenticating users with the card.
11 Require PIN Code Select whether or not to require PIN code when authenticating users with the
card.
This function is available only on the equipment that supports the PIN code
input.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
256 [Security] Item List
Setting up Email Authentication
When E-mail authentication is enabled, users must enter the user name and password before performing Scan to
Email.
12 LDAP Server List Displays a list of servers that are assigned for the PIN code or card
authentication. Click [Server Assignment] and add the server in the displayed
screen to assign a server. Register the available server as [LDAP Client].
Use [Move Up] and [Move Down] to change the priority order in the list.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
If [Windows Server] is selected as an LDAP server for the PIN code or card
authentication, the following attribute type of user name is employed for the
one at the login and the one of the user which is automatically registered
while [Create User Information Automatically] is enabled.
If Kerberos is selected to access the LDAP server: sAMAccountName
If Digest-MD5, CRAM-MD5, Login, Plain or Simple Bind is selected to access
the LDAP server: displayName
Item name Description
1 Email Authentication Select whether or not to enable E-mail authentication.
You must carry out “E-mail address setting” to use E-mail authentication.
P.257 “Setting up Email Address Setting”
Item name Description
1
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 257
[Administration]
Setting up Email Address Setting
You can configure the E-mail address when E-mail authentication is enabled.
Item name Description
1 From Address Specify the From Address.
'From Address' of Email Setting:
Select this to set the From Address in E-mail settings.
User Name + @ + Mail Domain Name:
Select this to specify the From Address in the “User Name + @ + Mail Domain
Name” format.
The authenticated user name is employed as the “User Name”.
The domain name specified in the [Domain Name] box is used as the “Mail
Domain Name”.
When this is selected, enter the domain name in the [Domain Name] box.
'User Name' of LDAP:
Select this to set the From Address with the one you have selected from LDAP
addresses.
When you select this function, a list of servers assigned for LDAP
authentication is displayed to allow you to select one.
Specify the mail domain name to be used in the case the LDAP server search
fails in the [Domain Name] box.
The equipment searches the authenticated user name in [Attribute type of
“User Name”] of the LDAP server. If the registered user name has been found
in the specified schema, the schema value set in [Attribute type of “Email
Address”] becomes the sender address. If the registered user name has not
been found in the specified schema, the format set in [User Name + @ + Mail
Domain Name] becomes the sender address.
You can assign up to 4 registered LDAP servers to search. Click the [Server
Assignment] button and add the server in the displayed screen to change the
assignment. Register the available server as [LDAP Client].
Use [Move Up] and [Move Down] to change the priority order in the list.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
Use Email Address which was registered Local User:
Specify the Email Address that is registered to the user information.
From Address cannot be edited in Scan to Email.:
Select this check box if you do not want to allow users to edit the From
Address.
2 From Name Specify the From Name.
Account Name of From Address + From Name of Email Setting:
Select this to specify the From Name in the “Account Name of From Address +
From Name of Email Setting” format.
'From Name' of Email setting:
Select this to set the From Name which has been specified in E-mail settings.
'User Name' of LDAP:
If the “From Address” is already set to “'User Name' of LDAP”, “From Name” is
also automatically set to “'User Name' of LDAP” and used as the sender of the
e-mail to the selected LDAP address.
Login User Name:
Specify the Login User Name that is registered to the user information.
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
258 [Security] Item List
3 Restriction setting for Email
Destination
When User Authentication or Email Authentication is enabled, select whether
to set the From Address of the authenticated user as a destination.
None
— Not used as a destination.
Fixed To — Only the From Address of the authenticated user is used for
“To”.
To — The From Address of the authenticated user is added to “To”.
Cc — The From Address of the authenticated user is added to “Cc”.
Bcc — The From Address of the authenticated user is added to “Bcc”.
When you select any setting except None, the item list appears so that you can
select one of the following items from the list to specify one's own address
besides the sender's address.
use From Address:
Select this to use the E-mail address (log-in user’s E-mail address) which has
been set at the above-mentioned [From Address].
'From Address' of Email Setting:
Select this to set the From Address in E-mail settings.
User Name + @ + Mail Domain Name:
Select this to specify the From Address in the “User Name + @ + Mail Domain
Name” format.
The authenticated user name is employed as the “User Name”.
The domain name specified in the [Domain Name] box is used as the “Mail
Domain Name”.
When this is selected, enter the domain name in the [Domain Name] box.
'User Name' of LDAP:
Select this to set the From Address with the one you have selected from LDAP
addresses.
When you select this function, a list of servers assigned for LDAP
authentication is displayed to allow you to select one.
Specify the mail domain name to be used in the case the LDAP server search
fails in the [Domain Name] box.
The equipment searches the authenticated user name in [Attribute type of
“User Name”] of the LDAP server. If the registered user name has been found
in the specified schema, the schema value set in [Attribute type of “Email
Address”] becomes the sender address. If the registered user name has not
been found in the specified schema, the format set in [User Name + @ + Mail
Domain Name] becomes the sender address.
You can assign up to 4 registered LDAP servers to search. Click the [Server
Assignment] button and add the server in the displayed screen to change the
assignment. Register the available server as [LDAP Client].
Use [Move Up] and [Move Down] to change the priority order in the list.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
Use Email Address which was registered Local User:
Specify the Email Address that is registered to the user information.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 259
[Administration]
Setting up Single Sign On Setting
Normally users are required to enter the user name and password for E-mail authentication and Scan to Email;
however, you can enable the single sign on setting to eliminate these operations.
Setting up Home Directory Setting
You can configure the home directory when home directory is enabled.
Item name Description
1 Single Sign On for Scan to
Email
Select whether or not to enable single sign on. [Disable] is set as the default.
Item name Description
1 Home Directory Select whether or not to enable home directory.
2 Home Directory Server Specify the home directory server.
Use Home Directory. Registered as Local User — Select this to use the
home directory which was registered for a local user. This option is available
only when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected for [Authentication Type].
Use User Authentication Server — Select this to use the user
authentication server as the home directory server.
Use User Authentication Server(Use specific server for Card
Authentication) — Select this to use the user authentication server as the
home directory server. However, use the specified server as the home
directory server in the case of Card Authentication.
User Specific Server — Select this to specify the home directory server.
If you select “Use User Authentication Server (Use specific server for Card
Authentication)” or “User Specific Server”, the LDAP server list appears on the
screen. You can set up to 3 servers. Click the “Primary” button to select the
primary server.
Click the LDAP server name on the list to open the Home Directory Server
Setting screen. Select the home directory server for each server name. If you
do not specify the server, select “Disable”.
1
1
2
8.[Administration]
260 [Security] Item List
Public Box Authentication
You can set the password authentication for the public box.
This setting can protect the public box with a password. Set the password at the properties window of the public box
that you can open from inside the e-Filing box.
Certificate Management settings
You can manage device certificates and client certificates.
The [Certificate Management] submenu can be accessed from the [Security] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Security] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.241 “[Security] Item List”
Setting up Device Certificate
You can configure the device certificate for encrypted communications using wireless LAN, IEEE 802.1X
authentication, IPsec, or SSL/TLS.
Item name Description
1 Public Box Authentication Select whether to enable the password authentication for the public box.
Disable — Disables the password authentication. The password entry is not
required for the access to the public box.
Enable — Enables the password authentication. The password entry is
required for the access to the public box.
1
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 261
[Administration]
Item name Description
1 self-signed certificate Creates a certificate for encrypted communications using SSL/TLS on your
device.
[Create] button — Displays the [Create self-signed certificate] screen. Specify
items necessary for the certificate to create the self-signed certificate.
P.262 “[Create self-signed certificate] screen”
[Export] button — Exports the created self-signed certificate.
2 Import Import the certificate for encrypted communications using wireless LAN, IEEE
802.1X authentication, IPsec, or SSL/TLS.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the certificate file.
[Upload] button — Uploads the selected certificate file.
[Delete] button — Deletes the registered certificate file.
3 SCEP(Automatic) Automatically acquires the certificate for encrypted communications using IP
sec or SSL/TLS.
CA Server Address (Primary) — Enter the IP address of FQDN of the CA server.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
CA Server Address (Secondary) — Enter the IP address of FQDN of the CA
server. You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
MFP’s Address in Common Name in the Certificate — Select whether you
use the IP address or FQDN as the address of this equipment to be entered in
the [Common Name] box of the certificate. [IP Address] is set as the default.
Timeout — Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no
response is received from the CA server. Specify within the range from 1 to 120
seconds. “10” is set as the default.
CA Challenge — Enter the password for the CA challenge. You can enter up to
32 alphanumerical characters. You need to enter a maximum of 32
alphanumerical characters for the first time when you extend the password
length.
SAN — Set the SAN attribute if necessary. Enter DNS, IP address, URI, e-mail
address and OID by dividing them with ||. There are some restrictions as
below.
DNS: You can enter up to 253 letters with alphanumerical characters and
symbols “.” and “-”.
URI: You can use alphanumerical characters and symbols “- . _ ~ : / ? # ! @ $ ' ( )
* + ; =”.
Email: You need to enter “@” and “.” in the address.
Signature Algorithm — Select SHA1 or MD5 as the signature algorithm.
Poll Interval — Specify the polling interval. [1 Minute] is set as the default.
Maximum Poll Duration — Specify the polling duration. [8 Hours] is set as the
default.
[Request] button — Click this button to request the certificate.
[Delete] button — Deletes the registered certificate.
8.[Administration]
262 [Security] Item List
[Create self-signed certificate] screen
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the self-signed certificate.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels creating the certificate.
3 Country/Region Name Enter the country or region name using two alphanumerical characters and
symbols. (Example: JP)
4 State or Province Name Enter the state or province name with alphanumerical characters and
symbols. You can enter up to 128 characters.
5 Locality Name Enter the city or town name with alphanumerical characters and symbols.
You can enter up to 128 characters.
6 Organization Name Enter the organization name with alphanumerical characters and symbols.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
7 Organizational Unit Name Enter the organizational unit name with alphanumerical characters and
symbols. You can enter up to 64 characters.
8 Common Name Enter the FQDN or IP address of this equipment with alphanumerical
characters and symbols. You can enter up to 64 characters.
9 Email Address Enter the E-mail address with alphanumerical characters and symbols. You
can enter up to 64 characters.
10 Validity Period Enter the number of months in the validity period of the self-signed
certificate.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 263
[Administration]
Setting up Client Certificate
[Create Client Certificate] screen
Item name Description
1 Client Certificate Creates the client certificate.
[Create] button — Displays the [Create Client Certificate] screen. Specify
items necessary for the certificate to create the client certificate.
P.263 “[Create Client Certificate] screen”
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the Client certificate.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels creating the certificate.
3 Country/Region Name Enter the country or region name using two alphanumerical characters and
symbols. (Example: JP)
4 State or Province Name Enter the state or province name with alphanumerical characters and
symbols. You can enter up to 128 characters.
5 Locality Name Enter the city or town name with alphanumerical characters and symbols.
You can enter up to 128 characters.
6 Organization Name Enter the organization name with alphanumerical characters and symbols.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
7 Organizational Unit Name Enter the organizational unit name with alphanumerical characters and
symbols. You can enter up to 64 characters.
8 Common Name Enter the FQDN or IP address of this equipment with alphanumerical
characters and symbols. You can enter up to 64 characters.
9 Validity Period Enter the number of months in the validity period of the self-signed
certificate.
10 Password Enter the password of the certificate with alphanumerical characters and
symbols. You can enter up to 64 characters.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.[Administration]
264 [Security] Item List
Setting up Certificate Setting
When you create PDF with the digital signature in the PDF/A-1b file format, you need to select the [SHA1] signature
algorithm and the [RSA1024] public key.
P.118 “PDF/A Fileformat Setting”
Setting up CA Certificate
When you want to enable SSL/TLS and verify with a CA certificate for the SMTP Client, POP3 Network Service, FTP
Client, Directory Service, or Syslog Setting, you must install the CA certificate. You can install up to 30 CA certificates in
this equipment.
Setting up Certificate Files
You can display a list of registered certificate files.
Item name Description
1 Signature Algorithm Select the signature algorithm to be used in Certificate.
SHA1 — Select this to use SHA1.
SHA256
— Select this to use SHA256.
SHA384 — Select this to use SHA384.
SHA512 — Select this to use SHA512.
Select a signature algorithm from SHA256, SHA384, and SHA512 to create a
self-signed certificate.
2 Public Key Select the public key to be used in Certificate.
RSA1024 — Select this to use RSA1024.
RSA2048
— Select this to use RSA2048.
Select “RSA2048” for the public key to create a self-signed certificate.
Item name Description
1 CA Certificate(PEM) Selects the certificate in the PEM format.
[Upload] button — Uploads the certificate.
[Delete] button — Deletes the registered certificate.
2 CA certificate (DER) Selects the certificate in the DER format.
[Upload] button — Uploads the certificate.
[Delete] button — Deletes the registered certificate.
1
2
1
2
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 265
[Administration]
Password Policy settings
You can configure policies for the password to register.
The [Password Policy] submenu can be accessed from the [Security] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Security] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.241 “[Security] Item List”
Setting up Policy for Users
You can configure policies for user registration.
If you change the settings, they become effective from the next login.
Item name Description
1 Minimum Password Length Specify the minimum number of digits for the password. Specify within the
range from 0 to 64. “0” is set as the default.
2 Requirements to Apply Select [Enable] to set restrictions on the character strings that can be used in
passwords. [Disable] is set as the default.
Restrictions
The user name and password cannot be the same.
The same password cannot be used again.
A password consisting of sequences of the same characters cannot be used.
A password containing the characters entered in the restricted character
text box cannot be used.
3 Lockout Setting Specify whether or not to enable the lockout setting when the user failed to
supply the correct password. [Enable] is set as the default.
Number of Retry — Specify the number of incorrect password entry times to
lock out the user. Specify within the range from 1 to 30 times. “10” is set as the
default.
Lockout Time — Specify the duration to lock out the user. Specify within the
range from 1 to 1440 minutes. “1” is set as the default.
Due to a change in the number of retry times, a user may lock out in the next
login. The history of lockouts is registered in the log.
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
266 [Security] Item List
Setting up Policy for Administrator, Auditor
You can configure policies for administrator and auditor registration.
4 Available Period Select [Enable] to specify how long the password is valid before its expiry.
[Disable] is set as the default.
Expiration day(s) — Specify how long the password is valid before its expiry.
Specify within the range from 1 to 999 days. “180” is set as the default.
When the number of days set in [Expiration day(s)] elapses, a screen that
prompts the user to change the password will appear the next time the user
logs in.
Item name Description
1 Minimum Password Length Specify the minimum number of digits for the password. Specify within the
range from 6 to 64. “6” is set as the default.
2 Requirements to Apply Select [Enable] to set restrictions on the character strings that can be used in
passwords. [Disable] is set as the default.
Restrictions
The user name and password cannot be the same.
The same password cannot be used again.
A password consisting of sequences of the same characters cannot be used.
A password containing the characters entered in the restricted character
text box cannot be used.
3 Lockout Setting Specify whether or not to enable the lockout setting when the user failed to
supply the correct password. [Enable] is set as the default.
Number of Retry — Specify the number of incorrect password entry times to
lock out the user. Specify within the range from 1 to 30 times. “10” is set as the
default.
Lockout Time — Specify the duration to lock out the user. Specify within the
range from 1 to 1440 minutes. “1” is set as the default.
Due to a change in the number of retry times, a user may lock out in the next
login. The history of lockouts is registered in the log.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 267
[Administration]
Setting up Policy for e-Filing Boxes, SecurePDF, SNMPv3, Cloning, Secure Receive
You can configure policies for passwords for operations and applications on your equipment.
*1 With SNMPv3 and encrypted PDF files, a password of at least one character is required.
*2 With Cloning, you can also register the same password as the file name.
*3 The Lockout Setting is enabled only when you are using e-Filing Boxes.
4 Available Period Select [Enable] to specify how long the password is valid before its expiry.
[Disable] is set as the default.
Expiration day(s) — Specify how long the password is valid before its expiry.
Specify within the range from 1 to 999 days. “180” is set as the default.
When the number of days set in [Expiration day(s)] elapses, a screen that
prompts the user to change the password will appear the next time the user
logs in.
Item name Description
1 Minimum Password Length
(e-Filing Boxes)
Specify the minimum number of digits for the password of e-Filing boxes.
Specify within the range from 0 to 20. “1” is set as the default.
2 Minimum Password Length
(SecurePDF, SNMPv3,
Cloning, Secure Receive)
Specify the minimum number of digits for the password of Secure PDF,
SNMPv3, Cloning, and Secure Receive. Specify within the range from 0 to 20.
*1
“0” is set as the default.
3 Requirements to Apply Select [Enable] to set restrictions on the character strings that can be used in
passwords. [Disable] is set as the default.
Restrictions
The file name and password cannot be the same.
*2
The same password cannot be used again.
4
Lockout Setting
*3
Specify whether or not to enable the lockout setting when the user failed to
supply the correct password. [Disable] is set as the default.
Number of Retry — Specify the number of incorrect password entry times to
lock out the user. “10” is set as the default.
Lockout Time — Specify the duration to lock out the user. Specify within the
range from 1 to 1440 minutes. “1” is set as the default.
Due to a change in the number of retry times, a user may lock out in the next
login. The history of lockouts is registered in the log.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
268 [Security] Item List
Security Stamp setting
You can add information such as the date, time and user name at the edge of the print output or transmission images.
If you add both the TTI and security stamp, the TTI is added as the first line and the security stamp is added as the
second line.
Security stamps are added at the top 5mm of the fax image; therefore, the top 5mm of the image is not printed at the
recipient.
When including the date and time in the stamp, the transmission date and time of the first page is printed on all pages
for security stamps. Whereas the transmission date and time of each page is printed for TTI.
Item name Description
1 Print Copy — Specify whether or not to add information to copy jobs. [Disable] is
set as the default.
Printer — Specify whether or not to add information to print jobs. [Disable] is
set as the default.
e-Filing — Specify whether or not to add information to e-Filing jobs. [Disable]
is set as the default.
2 Fax Transmission — Specify whether or not to add information to fax
transmission jobs. [Disable] is set as the default.
3 Job ID Specify whether or not to include the job ID in the stamp.
4 Date & Time Specify whether or not to include the date and time in the stamp.
Date: Prints the date.
Date & Time: Prints the date and time.
5 Card ID Specify whether or not to include the card ID in the stamp.
6 User Name Specify whether or not to include the user name in the stamp.
7 Serial Number Specify whether or not to include the serial number in the stamp.
8 Department Name Specify whether or not to include the department name in the stamp.
9 Optional text Specify whether or not to include optional text in the stamp. You can enter up
to 32 alphanumeric characters.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8.[Administration]
[Security] Item List 269
[Administration]
Configuration settings
System Protection
You can configure the equipment to protect the system from malware. The information about the applications that
can run on the equipment is automatically updated so that the activity of malware can be monitored. If you run any
unknown application with this function enabled, the equipment records the activity in the log and shows the service
call message on the control panel. Do not run the application after the equipment restarts. For details, ask your
service representative.
Item name Description
1 Antimalware Select whether to enable the antimalware function. Change and save the
setting while no jobs are in execution, and reboot the equipment, so that this
function becomes effective.
Enable — Enables the antimalware function. The antimalware icon appears
on the counter screen on the control panel of the equipment to monitor the
activity of malware.
Disable — Disables the antimalware function.
1
270 [Maintenance] Item List
0.[Maintenance] Item List
Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the [Maintenance] menu from the
[Administration] page.
For how to access it, see the reference below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
Upload Software settings
You can update client software embedded in your equipment. Users can download client software on their computers
using the TopAccess [Install Software] link.
Installer (Setup files) for Client Utilities CD-ROM or Client Utilities/User Documentation DVD
Mac PPD Files
UNIX Filters
Uploading new software overwrites the old version of software that had been uploaded.
The files for uploading are provided for each client software.
Driver Files
- Contact your dealer for information about obtaining driver files with the installer.
- You can create a driver file for uploading by compressing folders under “Client\Drivers” in the Client Utilities/User
Documentation DVD in zip format.
P.271 “Preparing a driver file for uploading”
Mac PPD Files — These files are stored in the “MacPPD” folders in the Client Utilities/User Documentation DVD. The
PPD file for duplex printing is stored in the “2-sided_default” folder, whereas the PPD file for simplex printing is
stored in the “normal” folder.
Unix Filters — These filters are stored in the folder for each workstation in the “Admin\BW_Unix_Linux” folder (for
black printing) or “Admin\Color_Unix_Linux” folder (for color printing) included in the Client Utilities/User
Documentation DVD. The CUPS filter for duplex printing is stored in the “2-sided_default” folder whereas the one
for simplex printing is in the “normal” folder.
The [Upload Software] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 271
[Administration]
When [Driver Customization Packages] is selected:
Preparing a driver file for uploading
1
Insert the Client Utilities/User Documentation DVD into the computer’s CD-ROM or DVD-ROM
drive.
2
Open the folder where driver files and plug-in files are stored.
They are stored in the “Client\Drivers” folder.
3
Compress the folder in zip format to create the driver file for uploading.
Match the name of the ZIP file to be created with the file name displayed on the TopAccess screen. The file name
is case sensitive. If the file name is different, you will not be able to upload it.
Item name Description
1 Upload Files Select the software you want to upload to the equipment.
Driver Files — Select this to upload the setup files.
Mac PPD Files — Select this to upload the PPD file which is used by macOS.
Unix Filters — Select this to upload the tar files that contain filters for each
UNIX workstation.
Driver Customization Packages — Select this to upload the custom
package file for the printer driver.
[OK] button — Confirms the selected software.
2 [Upload] button Uploads the browsed setting file.
3 [Choose File] button Browses the setting file to be uploaded.
Select the corresponding setting file.
At the left of each box, the file name will be displayed. Be sure to specify the
same file for each box.
4 Installed Driver
Customization Packages List
Displays a list of installed custom package files.
Folder name
Name of the ZIP file to be
created
Remarks
UNI univ.zip Universal printer driver
PS ps3.zip PS3 printer driver (PostScript)
1
2
4
3
8.[Administration]
272 [Maintenance] Item List
Remove Software settings
You can delete the software uploaded to the equipment.
The [Remove Software] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Item name Description
1 [Delete] button Deletes the selected software.
Select and click the software to be deleted from the software list.
2 Software list Displays a list of software uploaded to your equipment.
Select the software files you want to delete.
3 Installed Driver
Customization Packages List
Displays a list of the installed custom package files.
Select the files you want to delete.
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 273
[Administration]
Create Clone File settings
You can create a clone file of the environment on your equipment.
You can implement a cloned environment by installing the created clone file on another equipment.
For the details of the clone file and how to use it, contact your service technician.
The clone files are compatible with other equipment units. For details about the available models, contact your
service representative.
When an end-user (either an individual or an entity) intends to clone data (font, ICC profile, or any data
downloaded or added by the end-user) stored in TTEC products (copier, MFP), the end-user shall investigate,
review and confirm terms of use for such data and intellectual property rights thereof. The end-user shall perform
such cloning at your own risk and responsibility.
TTEC AND ITS AFFILIATES HEREBY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OF QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF TTEC PRODUCTS,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTIES INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS,
IN THE USE OF CLONING BY THE END-USER.
IN NO EVENT WILL TTEC BE LIABLE TO THE END-USER NOR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF CLONING BY THE END-USER, TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
When you clone the LDAP role, make sure of the consistent LDAP settings between the equipment units.
If you have installed a clone file from other models, the equipment might not work properly. For recovery, be sure
to create a clone file on the target equipment and keep it before installing the clone file.
The [Create Clone File] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Item name Description
1 [Create] button Creates the clone file of the category selected in the category setting.
When you click this button, a screen is displayed to set a password on the
clone file.
1
8.[Administration]
274 [Maintenance] Item List
Setting up Clone File
Setting up Category Setting
Select the category for the clone file.
The clone file will include the settings listed in “Description” that make up the category you select.
Item name Description
1 Device Name Displays the device name of the created clone file.
Click the device name to download the clone file.
2 Copier Model Displays the copier model of the created clone file.
3 Version Displays the system ROM version of the created clone file.
4 Date Created Displays the created date of the clone file.
Item name Description
1 Security Includes secure erase and authentication settings in the clone file.
2 Default Settings Includes the general, copy, scan, fax, ifax, E-mail, save as file, printer,
notification, log settings, and EWB settings in the clone file.
3 User Management Includes the user, group, role, quota, department code, home data with
address book, and project code in the clone file.
4 Network/Print Service Includes network, print service, wireless LAN, Bluetooth, directory service,
and driver customization packages settings in the clone file.
5 Address Book Includes the address book in the clone file.
6 Address Book + Mail Boxes Includes the address book and mail boxes in the clone file.
7 Screen Settings/System
Application
Includes the common theme setting, the icon non-indication setting, the
system application program, and the system application settings (except
licenses) in the clone file.
8 Application Includes the application program and application setting (except licenses) in
the clone file.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 275
[Administration]
Install Clone File settings
You can install the created clone file.
You can implement a cloned environment by installing the clone file created on another equipment.
Before the clone file is installed, confirm that no jobs in progress or under waiting remain by means of the [Job
Status] page. If any jobs do remain, the installation of the clone files cannot be carried out.
P.24 “[Job Status] Overview”
After the clone file has been installed, reboot this equipment in accordance with the guidance. Manually reboot this
equipment if you did not do so by closing the installation execution screen.
After you do cloning between the color and monochrome models, the sleep mode action might be changed. If the
equipment is turned off unexpectedly or the sleep mode does not work as you like, check the Sleep Mode setting.
P.109 “Setting up Energy Save”
The [Install Clone File] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page. For
how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
When the installation of the clone file is complete, the screen shows the reference link so that you can click it to
download a file that records the result of the installation.
9 ICC Profile Includes ICC profiles installed from TopAccess in the clone file.
You can select ICC profiles only for color models.
You are required to have the license to use some ICC profiles.
10 Print Data Converter Includes print data converter settings in the clone file.
11 Administrator’s Password Includes the password of the default administrator in the clone file.
12 Fonts Includes downloaded fonts for print and display in the clone file.
You are required to have the license to use some fonts.
13 LDAP Role Includes information about the LDAP role in the clone file.
Item name Description
1 [Install] button Installs the selected clone file.
When you click this button, a dialog box is displayed to prompt you to enter
the password you specified when creating the clone file.
Item name Description
1
8.[Administration]
276 [Maintenance] Item List
Setting up File Upload
Setting up Clone File Information
Setting up Setting data included in Clone File
Item name Description
1 [Choose File] button Select a clone file.
2 [Upload] button Displays information on the selected clone file and what is included in the
clone file.
Item name Description
1 Device Name Displays the device name of the created clone file.
2 Copier Model Displays the copier model of the created clone file.
3 Version Displays the system ROM version of the created clone file.
4 Date Created Displays the created date of the clone file.
Item name Description
1 Security Displays if secure erase and authentication settings are included.
2 Default Settings Displays if the general, copy, scan, fax, ifax, E-mail, save as file, printer,
notification, log settings, and EWB settings are included.
3 User Management Displays if the user, group, role, quota, department code, home data with
address book, and project code are included.
Select whether or not to include the address book information when user
management is included but the address book is not. When excluding the
address book has been selected, it is necessary to input again the addresses
registered from the address book.
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 277
[Administration]
4 Network/Print Service Displays if network, print service, wireless LAN, Bluetooth, directory service,
and driver customization packages settings are included.
5 Address Book Displays if the address book is included.
6 Address Book + Mail Boxes Displays if the address book and MailBox are included.
7 Screen Settings/System
Application
Displays if the common theme setting, the icon non-indication setting, the
system application program, and the system application settings (except
licenses) are included.
8 Application Displays if the application program and application setting (except licenses)
are included.
9 ICC Profile Displays if the ICC profiles installed from TopAccess are included. This item
appears only for color models.
10 Print Data Converter Displays if the print data converter settings are included.
11 Administrator’s password Displays if the password of the default administrator is included.
12 Fonts Displays if downloaded fonts for print and display are included.
13 LDAP Role Displays if the LDAP role is included.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
278 [Maintenance] Item List
Import settings
You can import address book data, department code information and so on exported from another equipment item.
The [Import] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Before the data are imported, confirm that no jobs in progress or under waiting remain by means of the [Job Status]
page. You cannot import data if there are these jobs.
If import is taking too long, try importing data after your equipment has entered sleep mode.
P.24 “[Job Status] Overview”
Setting up Address Book
You can import address information exported from an address book on another equipment or a different address
book program in the CSV or XML format.
The importing method of address book data is either adding imported data to the address book already registered in
this equipment or deleting all the address book data already registered and replacing them with the imported data.
It is recommended that you export an address book in the CSV or XML format and edit it when creating address book
data.
You cannot import an address book when it exceeds the number of characters specified on each item. Invalid
characters are replaced with “!”.
Last Name: 32 characters
First Name: 32 characters
Index: 64 characters
Email Address: 192 alphanumerical characters
Phone Number: 128 numbers
Tel Number 2: 128 numbers
Company: 128 characters
Department: 128 characters
Keyword: 256 characters
SUB: 20 characters
SID: 20 characters
SEP: 20 characters
PWD: 20 characters
The group data are not included in the imported address book data.
Item name Description
1 Import Method Specify the import method of the address book.
Addition — Select this to append the imported information to the existing
data.
Overwrite — Select this to replace the existing data with the imported
information.
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 279
[Administration]
Setting up MailBoxes
Setting up Combined (Address Book + MailBoxes)
Template Data Conversion
2 Address Book Type Select “Local” or “Shared” as the import source when using the Shared
Address Book function.
3 Favorite Specify whether or not to enable Favorite information. The default is [Enable].
4 File Name Select the address book file to be imported.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the address book file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected address book file.
Item name Description
1 File Name Select the mailbox file to be imported.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the mailbox file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected mailbox file.
Item name Description
1 File Name Select the combined (address book + mailboxes) file to be imported.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the combined file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected combined file.
Item name Description
1 File Name Import the template data file of the old models to convert it to the home data.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the old template data file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected old template data file.
Templates exceeding the registration limit cannot be converted.
Templates items protected with passwords cannot be converted.
My Menu is converted to Private Home according to the current user
information: the user information should be cloned in advance.
Item name Description
1
1
1
8.[Administration]
280 [Maintenance] Item List
Setting up Home Data
Item name Description
1 Import Method Specify the import method of the home data.
Addition — Select this to append the imported information to the existing
data.
Overwrite — Select this to replace the existing data with the imported
information.
2 File Name Select the home data file to be imported.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the home data file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected home data file.
The [Home] button does not work or the executed results of jobs may differ
depending on the equipment to be imported.
1
2
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 281
[Administration]
Export settings
You can export the address book, mailboxes and so on.
The [Export] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
The group data are not included in the exported address book data.
Setting up Address Book
Item name Description
1 File Name Displays the file name of the created export files.
Click a file name to download.
2 File Size Displays the file size of the created export files.
3 Date Created Displays the created date of the export files.
4 Export Data Format Format Select the file format of the export file.
CSV — Select this to create the file in the CSV format.
XML — Select this to create the file in the XML format.
5 Address Book Type Specify “Local” or “Shared” as the export source when using the Shared
Address Book function.
6 Favorite Specify whether or not to enable Favorite information. The default is [Enable].
7 [Create New File] button Creates the export file.
If you previously exported address book data, the exported file link and
information are displayed in the File Name area. You can click the link to save
the previously exported file.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
282 [Maintenance] Item List
Setting up MailBoxes
Setting up Combined (Address Book + MailBoxes)
Item name Description
1 File Name Displays the file name of the created export files.
Click a file name to download.
2 File Size Displays the file size of the created export files.
3 Date Created Displays the created date of the export files.
4 [Create New File] button Creates the export file.
If you previously exported mailbox data, the exported file link and information
are displayed in the File Name area. You can click the link to save the
previously exported file.
Item name Description
1 File Name Displays the file name of the created export files.
Click a file name to download.
2 File Size Displays the file size of the created export files.
3 Date Created Displays the created date of the export files.
4 [Create New File] button Creates the export file.
If you previously exported combined (address book + mailboxes) data, the
exported file link and information are displayed in the File Name area. You can
click the link to save the previously exported file.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 283
[Administration]
Setting up Home Data
Item name Description
1 File Name Displays the file name of the created export files.
Click a file name to download.
2 File Size Displays the file size of the created export files.
3 Date Created Displays the created date of the export files.
4 [Create New File] button Creates the export file.
If you previously exported home data, the exported file link and information
are displayed in the File Name area. You can click the link to save the
previously exported file.
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
284 [Maintenance] Item List
Panel View
You can customize the appearance on the control panel by showing the necessary buttons and lists and hiding the
forbidden buttons and lists.
After you change the settings, you need to restart the equipment.
The [Panel View] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page. For how to
access it and information on the [Registration] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
Hidden functions does not appear but they are not disabled.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the changed settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the changed settings.
3 Simple Copy
Simple Scan
Copy
Scan
Fax
Print
e-Filing
User Functions
Job Status
Common
User Account
Home
Select the screen of the control panel that you want to customize.
4 Related Links Displays the links related to the panel view.
5 Title
Guidance
MainArea
The target items are classified into categories. Select the check box for the
item that you want to show on the selected screen of the control panel and
clear the check box for the item that you want to hide.
43 5
1 2
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 285
[Administration]
Idle Screen
You can set the display of the specified contents on the control panel during idle hours.
YOU SHALL ADHERE TO THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN USING CONTENTS DISPLAY FUNCTION ON THE STANDBY
SCREEN, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMAGE CONTENTS, WEB CONTENTS, OR EXTERNAL URL CONTENTS;
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR INCORPORATING, DISPLAYING, AND
TRANSMITTING ANY CONTENT, COPYRIGHTED MATERIAL, OR INFORMATION THROUGH THE USE ON THE STANDBY
SCREEN.
YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION AND/OR TOSHIBA TEC AFFILIATED
COMPANIES ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY IN CONNECTION WITH USE OF ANY CONTENTS, FOR
ANY DAMAGES, LOSSES, COSTS OR EXPENSES ARISING OUT OF:
(I) INFRINGEMENT, VIOLATION, OR MISAPPROPRIATION OF ANY THIRD-PARTY RIGHT, INCLUDING ANY COPYRIGHT,
TRADEMARK, PATENT, TRADE SECRET, MORAL RIGHT, OR ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY OR PROPRIETARY
RIGHT, PRIVACY RIGHT, RIGHT OF PUBLICITY, OR
(II) SLANDER, DEFAME, LIBEL, OR INVASION OF THE RIGHT OF PRIVACY, PUBLICITY OR OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS OF
ANY OTHER PERSON.
You have to follow the security guidelines provided by government agencies and/or third-party organizations, such
as OWASP, when creating web content.
The [Panel View] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page. For how to
access it and information on the [Registration] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
General Setting
You can turn on or off the idle screen function.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the [Idle Screen] settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
Item name Description
1 Enable Idle Screen Enable or disable the idle screen function.
1 2
1
8.[Administration]
286 [Maintenance] Item List
Close Button Setting
You can turn on or off the appearance of the button that closes the idle screen.
Display Timing
You can set the display timing of the idle screen.
Item name Description
1 Display Button Enable or disable the button to close the idle screen.
2 Transparency Set the transparency of the button that closes the idle screen. You can set it
when [Display Button] is enabled.
Item name Description
1 Before Authentication /
Session Clear
Select this check box to show the idle screen before authentication and after
the session clear. Only when this setting is selected, you can set the following
[Select Contents], [Preset Print], [Print Button Position], and [Print Button
Transparency].
Before Authentication — When the user authentication is enabled, the idle
screen appears before user log-in, at the start-up of MFP, and at the
recovery from the sleep/super sleep mode. When the user authentication is
disabled, the idle screen appears at the start-up of MFP and at the recovery
from the sleep/super sleep mode.
After Session Clear — After the auto clear, the idle screen appears after
users press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button twice or after they press the
[ACCESS] button.
After the session clear, the energy saver screen does not appear even if the
sleep timer goes off.
2 Select Contents Select the type of contents that appears as the idle screen before
authentication and after clearing the session. You need to set the contents
under [Contents Setting].
Image — Shows up to ten imported images.
Web Contents — Shows the imported Web contents.
External URL — Shows the contents specified by the URL.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 287
[Administration]
3 Preset Print Enable or disable the preset print function. When [Enable] is selected, users
can print a PDF file on the idle screen that appears before authentication and
after the session clear. You need to preset the PDF file under [Preset Print
Setting].
You cannot select this setting in the following situations.
- When the equipment is used in the High Security mode
- When the print jobs are restricted
- When the print data converter function is enabled
- When the project management function is enabled
The preset print function is not available on the idle screen that appears
after the user authentication.
4 Print Button Position Select the left, center, or right position of the print button for the preset print
function.
5 Print Button Transparency Set the transparency of the print button for the preset print function.
6 After Authentication Select this check box to show the idle screen after the authentication. If the
authentication is enabled, the idle screen appears after users have logged in.
Only when this setting is selected, you can set the following [Select Contents].
You cannot select [After Authentication] when the user authentication is
disabled.
7 Select Contents Select the type of contents on the idle screen that appears after
authentication. You need to set the contents under [Contents Setting].
Image — Shows up to ten images at regular intervals.
Web Contents — Shows the imported Web contents.
External URL — Shows the contents specified by the URL.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
288 [Maintenance] Item List
Contents Setting
You can set three types of contents that can appear on the idle screen.
Image — You can import and register up to ten JPEG, PNG, and GIF files. The recommended values per file are as
follows: the file size is up to 1.5MB, the resolution is 1024 x 600 pixels, and the color depth is 32-bits. They are
displayed as enlarged or reduced according to the touch panel size.
Web Contents — You can import a ZIP file that contains HTML, CSS, JPEG, PNG, GIF, and JavaScript files. The
recommended file size is up to 20MB. The display size depends on the created contents and the contents are not
enlarged or reduced to the touch panel size.
External URL — You can specify one URL for the contents. The display size depends on the specified URL and the
contents are not enlarged or reduced to the touch panel size.
Use one-byte characters for file names.
Contents of the 1,024 x 600-pixel resolution can be displayed without enlargement and reduction.
Item name Description
1 Import Image Import an image file to show on the idle screen.
[Choose File] button — Click this button to select an image file.
[Import] button — Click this button to import the selected image file. The
imported image file is registered in the list below.
You cannot register more than one file with the same file name.
2 External URL Enter the external URL for the file that shows as an image content.
[Registration] button — Click this button to register the specified image file
in the list below.
[Preview] button — Click this button to show the preview of the image in
another window. Click [X] to close the preview window.
You cannot register the same URLs many times.
If the proxy is not set correctly, the image might not show properly on the
touch panel even if you see it properly in TopAccess.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 289
[Administration]
3 Image File Register up to ten image files in the list. The idle screen shows the registered
images in order from top to bottom at regular intervals.
[Delete] button — Click this button to delete the image file from the list.
[Move Down] button — Select the image file in the list and click this button
to move it down.
[Move Up] button — Select the image file in the list and click this button to
move it up.
You cannot cancel the operation of the [Delete], [Move Down], and [Move Up]
buttons even before you click the [Save] or [Cancel] button.
4 Switch Time Specify an interval in seconds (1 to 60) for the appearance so that the idle
screen shows the registered images sequentially at intervals of the specified
time.
5 Web Contents Import a ZIP file in which the Web contents are archived for the display on the
idle screen.
[Choose File] button — Click this button to select a ZIP file.
[Import] button — Click this button to import the selected ZIP file.
[Delete] button — Click this button to delete the imported ZIP file.
When you create a ZIP file for import, locate the file, which you want to
display first, as “index.html” in the root directory.
If you want to change the Web contents after importing them, delete the
imported contents first and then import new ones.
You cannot cancel the operation of the [Delete] button even before you click
the [Save] or [Cancel] button.
6 External URL Enter one URL to show the contents on the idle screen. You can clear the URL
for deletion.
[Preview] button — Click this button to show the preview of the contents in
another window. Click [X] to close the preview window.
If the proxy is not set correctly, the content image might not show properly on
the touch panel even if you see it properly in TopAccess.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
290 [Maintenance] Item List
Preset Print Setting
You can preset a PDF file that users can print on the idle screen. The recommended file size is up to 40MB.
Do not preset encrypted PDF files because they cannot be printed.
When the EWB scan or print job is executed while the idle screen appears, the job execution screen appears over
the idle screen.
Preset print cannot be done if there are print jobs other than scheduled print jobs and print jobs waiting for user
operation.
Preset print is done in the color mode you have set on the equipment.
Preset print is done with the paper size you have set for the PDF file.
The print settings other than the color mode and the paper size depend on the default raw job settings.
P.211 “Setting up Default Raw Job Setting”
Proxy Setting
You can set up the proxy for the idle screen function.
The proxy settings are basically common to the Embedded Web Browser, Idle Screen, and Application functions. If
you change them for one function, they change accordingly for others.
P.236 “Setting up Proxy Setting”
P.369 “Proxy Setting”
Item name Description
1 Import Print File Import a PDF file as the preset file that users can print on the idle screen.
[Choose File] button — Click this button to select a PDF file.
[Import] button — Click this button to import the selected PDF file.
[Delete] button — Click this button to delete the imported PDF file.
You cannot cancel the operation of the [Delete] button even before you click
the [Save] or [Cancel] button.
2 Color Mode Select the color mode [Full Color] or [Black] for the preset print function.
Item name Description
1 Host Name Specify a host name of the proxy server.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 291
[Administration]
Delete Files settings
You can delete information such as scanned data, transmission data, and reception data that are stored in the local
folder using the Save as file function. It is recommended to delete the stored data periodically to maintain the internal
storage device.
The [Delete Files] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
2 Port Number Specify a port number of the proxy server.
3 Bypass proxy settings for
these addresses
Specify URLs that do not use the proxy server. When you specify more than
one URL, delimit each with a semicolon ( ; ).
4 Account ID Enter the account ID of the proxy server.
5 Password Enter the password of the proxy server.
6 Use automatic configuration
script
Enable or disable the automatic configuration script for the proxy server.
7 URL Specify a URL for the PAC file when the automatic configuration script is
enabled.
Note the following points for the PAC file.
Be sure to enter the protocol without omission.
Do not use functions.
Item name Description
1 [Delete Files] button Click this to delete the selected data files.
2 Scan Deletes all scan data stored in the shared folder.
3 Transmission Deletes all fax/ifax transmission data stored in the shared folder.
4 Reception Deletes all fax/ifax reception data and mailbox/fax/ifax forwarding data in the
shared folder.
Item name Description
2
1
3
4
8.[Administration]
292 [Maintenance] Item List
Notification settings
An administrator can configure notification to receive E-mail (mobile terminal can also be used) notifications when an
error occurred or a job is complete.
To enable the E-mail notification, the E-mail settings in the [Setup] menu page must be configured correctly.
P.195 “Email settings”
The [Notification] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Setting up Email Setting
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Stores settings for transmitting the report to the registered E-mail address.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the changed settings.
Item name Description
1 Notify administrator at Email
Address 1
Register E-mail addresses for administrators who receive the notification.
The notification is sent to the selected administrators by E-mail.
2 Notify administrator at Email
Address 2
3 Notify administrator at Email
Address 3
1 2
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 293
[Administration]
Setting up System Message Notification Events
You can select the events to be notified of.
Item name Description
1 Device Paper Misfeed — Select this to be notified of paper misfeeds.
Drawer Out of Paper — Select this to be notified when you are out of paper.
Door/Drawer Open — Select this to be notified when a cover or drawer is
open.
Print Needs Attention — Select this to be notified when a job is printed.
Toner Empty — Select this to be notified when a toner is empty.
Waste Toner Box is Full — Select this to be notified when the waste toner box
is full.
Power Status — Select this to be notified when the power source status
changes such as a power cut.
H/W Option Attachment History — Select this to be notified when a
hardware option is installed.
2 Maintenance Change Settings — Select this to be notified of setting changes.
Maintenance User Data — Select this to be notified when user information is
edited.
Export/Import — Select this to be notified of an export or import.
Cloning — Select this to be notified when a clone is made.
System Updates — Select this to be notified of system updates.
Log Full — Select this to be notified when the log has reached the maximum
size.
Storage Device Alert/Data Backup — Select this to be notified when the
backup or replacement of the internal storage device of this equipment is
required due to its abnormality.
3 Network Error — Select this to be notified of network errors.
4 Security Error — Select this to be notified of security errors.
Warning — Select this to be notified of security warnings.
Information — Select this to be notified of security information.
5 Received Fax/InternetFax Error — Select this to be notified of fax/Internet Fax reception errors.
Warning — Select this to be notified of fax/Internet Fax reception warnings.
Information — Select this to be notified of fax/Internet Fax reception
information.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
294 [Maintenance] Item List
Setting up Job Notification Events
You can select jobs to be notified.
6 Scan Warning — Select this to be notified of the periodical deletion of scanned files
or fax/Internet Fax transmission and reception data is successfully completed.
Information — Select this to be notified of the deletion of scanned files or fax/
Internet Fax transmission and reception data by the [Delete Files] function
under the [Maintenance] menu is successfully completed.
7 e-Filing Warning — Select this to be notified when the available space in the e-Filing
box is low or the preservation period of documents in the e-Filing box is
expiring soon.
Information — Select this to be notified when the e-Filing box is initialized.
Use the e-Filing box web utility and specify in the property screen for each box
if you want to notify whether e-Filing box operations are successfully
completed. For information on how to set, see the reference below:
e-Filing - OPERATING WITH A CLIENT COMPUTER - Managing User Boxes
and Folders - Modifying and displaying user box and folder properties -
Modifying box properties
Item name Description
1 Scan Send Email when an error occurs
Send Email when job is completed
2 Received Fax/InternetFax Send Email when an error occurs
Send Email when job is completed
3 Fax Received Forward Send Email when an error occurs
Send Email when job is completed
4 InternetFAX Received
Forward
Send Email when an error occurs
Send Email when job is completed
5 Received Forward for
Application
Send Email when an error occurs
Send Email when job is completed
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 295
[Administration]
Setting up Application
You can select jobs to be notified.
Setting up License
You can select jobs to be notified.
Languages settings
You can specify the language for the touch panel of your equipment.
The [Languages] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Item name Description
1 Install Notifies when the added application has been installed, uninstalled, or
updated.
2 Start Up Notifies when the application has failed to start or has been terminated
abnormally.
Item name Description
1 Install Notifies when the added license has been installed, uninstalled, or updated.
2 Term / Trial Notifies when the trial term has been terminated.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the registered language.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the changed settings and operation.
1
2
1
2
1 2
8.[Administration]
296 [Maintenance] Item List
Setting up Install Language Pack
You can install additional language packs.
P.296 “Setting up Current Language Pack List”
Setting up Current Language Pack List
Displays a list of installed language packs. You can delete unnecessary language packs.
Item name Description
1 File Name Select the language pack file to be installed.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the language pack file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected language pack file.
Item name Description
1 [Delete] button Select unnecessary language packs and click the [Delete] button to delete
them.
You cannot delete [English(US)] or the language selected in [PanelUI Language].
2 Name Displays the name of the language pack.
3 Version Displays the version of the language pack.
4 Date Displays the installed date of the language pack.
1
1
2 3 4
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 297
[Administration]
Setting up Default Setting for PanelUI
Select the display language for the touch panel.
Custom Keyboard Setting
When you use the English keyboard or you enter an E-mail address on the control panel, you can select [CUSTOM] to
enter a specific string of characters easily. You can register up to eight patterns of strings as the custom keyboard.
Item name Description
1 PanelUI Language Select the display language for the touch panel.
2 PanelUI Keyboard Display Select whether to display the soft-keyboard when entering characters with
the touch panel.
3 PanelUI Keyboard Layout Select the panel keyboard layout displayed on the touch panel.
Item name Description
1 (Registration areas) Register up to eight patterns of strings with up to 64 alphanumeric characters
and symbols. The control panel shows them in the same order as the
registration.
The number of characters and the prohibited characters for entry vary from
area to area on the control panel.
If you register too many characters for entry, the control panel does not
show the exceeding characters and users cannot enter them.
If you register prohibited characters, users cannot select the patterns
including them on the control panel.
1
2
3
1
8.[Administration]
298 [Maintenance] Item List
Remote Command
The remote command is used to maintain your equipment from a distance. It can get information about the settings
and status of your equipment and change the settings. You can set how to execute the remote command and check
the log of the execution.
The [Languages] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Apply Remote Command File
If the remote maintenance is not allowed, get the remote command file. You can execute the remote command from
TopAccess.
For the remote command file, contact your service technician or representative.
Item name Description
1 Allow remote command
execution to service
Select whether to allow your service technician to do the remote
maintenance.
Enable — Allows your service technician to execute the remote command
from a remote place.
Disable — Prohibits your service technician from executing the remote
command from a remote place.
Item name Description
1 [Choose File] button Select the obtained remote command file.
2 [Apply] button Execute the selected remote command file and apply it to your equipment.
After application, the screen shows the file name, the schema version, and the
day of execution.
If the execution has succeeded, the link appears for you to download the
result file. Click the link to download the file. Click [OK] to make the
message disappear.
If the settings of the equipment have been changed, the message appears
and prompts you to reboot the equipment. Click [OK] to reboot it.
If the execution has failed, the message with the error code appears. Write it
down and consult your service technician.
1
1
2
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 299
[Administration]
Remote Command Execution History
You can check the log of the executed remote command up to three times.
Item name Description
1 Date Shows the execution day and time of the remote command file.
2 Command Type Shows the type of the remote command.
Get Setting — Shows that the remote command has been executed to get
information about the settings of the equipment.
Set Setting — Shows that the remote command has been executed to set
the equipment.
3 Result Shows the execution result of the remote command file.
Success — Shows that the execution has succeeded.
Failed (error code) — Shows that an error has occurred. You can check the
error code to tell your service technician.
4 User Shows the executor of the remote command.
Service — Shows that the service technician has executed the remote
command from a remote place or on the control pane of the equipment.
Admin — Shows that the administrator has executed the remote command
from TopAccess.
5 Schema version Shows the schema version of the remote command file.
6 Remote Command File Shows the name of the executed remote command file. You can click it to
download the file.
7 Remote Command Execution
History
Shows the name of the file that records the result of the executed remote
command. You can click it to download the file.
1 2 4 5 63 7
8.[Administration]
300 [Maintenance] Item List
Data Backup
You can back up the data of the internal storage device embedded in your equipment.
The [Data backup] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Data Backup
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings for the data backup function.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the changed settings.
3 Data Backup Select whether the Data backup function is enabled or disabled. [Enable] is set
as the default.
1 2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 301
[Administration]
4 Use External Server for Data
Backup
Select this check box to store backed-up data of the internal storage device in
an external server.
Enter the following items to configure the external server to store the backed-
up data of the internal storage device.
Protocol
Select the protocol to be used for storing the backed-up data of the internal
storage device in an external server.
SMB
— Select this to send the backed-up data of the internal storage device
in an external server using the SMB protocol.
FTP — Select this to send the backed up data of the internal storage device
in an FTP server.
FTPS — Select this to send the backed-up data of the internal storage device
to an FTP server using FTP over SSL/TLS.
Server Name
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter an FTP server name or an IP
address.
You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Port Number(Command)
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the port number to be used for
the controls. Generally, “-” is entered for the control port. When “-” is entered,
the default port number, that is set for FTP Client by an administrator, will be
used. If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client, ask your
administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number.
You can enter a value in the range within from 0 to 65535 using numbers and
hyphens (-). “-” is set as the default.
Network Path
When you select [SMB] as the protocol, enter the network path to the network
folder.
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the directory in the specified FTP
server.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Login User Name
Enter the log-in user name to access an SMB server or an FTP server, if
required. When you select [FTP] as the protocol, an anonymous log-in is
assumed if you leave this box blank. Enter the login user name to access an
SMB server, an FTP server, or a NetWare server, if required. When you select
[FTP] as the protocol, an anonymous login is assumed if you leave this box
blank. You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other
than <, >, “ (double quotation), : (colon) and ; (semicolon). A user name with
only a single space is not possible.
You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than <,
>, “ (double quotation), : (colon) and ; (semicolon). A user name with only a
single space is not possible.
Password
Enter the password to access an SMB server or an FTP server, if required. You
can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces. A single
space only can also be entered.
Retype Password
Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
Connection Test
By clicking [Execute], a connection test is performed by using the specified
network settings to check if the communications can be established.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
302 [Maintenance] Item List
User Paper Type
You can set user paper types.
After you set user paper types, you need to restart the equipment.
The [User Paper Type] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page. For
how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
For details on the registration of user paper types, consult your service representative.
User Paper Type
Use External Server for Data
Backup (Continued)
Schedule of Automatic Data Backup
Set the period of automatic backup.
You can select the period from Disable, Weekly, Every 2 weeks and Monthly.
Day of Week: Select this to specify the day of week.
Time: Select this to specify the time. (24-hour display)
5 Target of Data Backup Select the data to be backed up.
Item name Description
1 File Name Select a file to install a user paper type.
[Choose File] button — Select a file for the user paper type.
[Import] button — Click this button after you select a user type name in
[User Paper Type List], so that the selected user paper type file is imported
at the selected user type name.
2 [Delete] button Click this button to delete the user paper type selected in [User Paper Type
List].
Item name Description
4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Maintenance] Item List 303
[Administration]
System Updates settings
You can update the system on your equipment.
You can also update the fax system when the FAX Unit is installed.
If a message appears to tell the data is invalid, download the updating file again.
The [System Updates] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Setting up Install Software Package
3 [Export] button Click this button to export the user paper type selected in [User Paper Type
List].
You can export the user paper types that have been imported with the
[Import] button.
4 No Indicates the number for the user paper type. You can import up to 10 files for
user paper types.
5 Name Shows the name of the user paper type. Click this to change the name.
6 File Name Shows the file name for the user paper type.
7 Base Type Shows the base paper type for the user paper type.
8 Status Shows the status of the user paper type.
Item name Description
1 File Name Select the software pack file to be installed.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the software pack file.
[Install] button — Installs the selected software pack file.
Item name Description
1
8.[Administration]
304 [Maintenance] Item List
Setting up Current Software List
The screen displays information about the installed firmware, depending on the model. Click [REFRESH] to update the
information.
Install Card Reader Firmware
Contact your service technician for details.
Reboot settings
You can reboot your equipment by clicking the [Reboot] button. If rebooting is performed, warming-up may take
longer than normally.
While the equipment is being restarted, the network will not be available. A message is displayed to inform you that it
will reconnect to TopAccess after a while. Also, the touch panel on this equipment displays a message to inform you
that the network is not ready. When this message disappears, TopAccess will once again be available.
The [Reboot] submenu can be accessed from the [Maintenance] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Maintenance] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.270 “[Maintenance] Item List”
Item name Description
1 Name Displays the name of the System Firmware.
2 Version Displays the version of the System Firmware.
3 Date Created Displays the Created date of the System Firmware.
4 Date Installed Displays the installed date of the System Firmware.
1 2 3 4
[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 305
0.[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the [Registration] menu from the
[Administration] page.
For how to access it, see the reference below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
Public Home
In Public Home, you can set the Home screen that is displayed when you press the [Home] button.
You can register the functions used frequently as panel buttons.
General users can set [Public Home] under [Registration] only if they are allowed at [Home Setting].
P.115 “Home Setting”
The administrator can set [Public Home] only under [Administration].
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
Item name Description
1 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
2 [Delete] button Deletes the selected Panel Button. When you delete a folder, the confirmation
message appears and all buttons inside the folder are deleted.
3 [Reset] button Deletes the current settings.
4 Panel button list Displays a list of panel buttons you can select for the shared home. You can
drag and drop the icon with your mouse or click the arrows to change the
button position.
Select the panel buttons you want to use.
Click the link to edit the home type. When you open the [Edit Settings] screen,
you can change the button icon and names, and delete or move the button:
you cannot move the folder button. When you move your mouse pointer over
an icon, the check box appears at the upper left. Select this check box to
delete the selected button.
Click the [+] icon that represents an empty position to register the button.
P.306 “[Select Home Type] screen”
In Public Home, you can register 64 types.
2
1
3
4
4
8.[Administration]
306 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
[Select Home Type] screen
Select a home type to add to Public Home.
[Edit Settings] screen for templates
You can set the template you are registering.
When you select agents, the setting status of the selected agents and the button to open the edit screen appear at the
bottom of the screen.
Item name Description
1 Create Template Registers a template button.
P.306 “[Edit Settings] screen for templates”
2 Create Folder Registers a folder button. You can register up to 64 folders.
P.307 “[Edit Settings] screen for folders”
3 Register from Job History Registers a panel button from the job history.
P.308 “[Register from Job History] screen”
4 Register from URL List Registers a panel button from the URL list.
P.309 “[Register from URL List] screen”
5 Register from
Recommendation
Registers a panel button from the recommendation list.
P.309 “[Register from Recommendation] screen”
6 Register from Function List Registers a panel button from the function list.
P.309 “[Register from Function List] screen”
7 Register from Application Registers a panel button from the application.
P.310 “[Register from Application] screen”
8 Register from Home Registers a panel button from the home screen.
P.310 “[Register from Home] screen”
Item name Description
1 [Select Agent] button Allows you to set the selected agent.
You can set the template details when creating a new agent.
P.311 “Template settings”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
9
5
876
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 307
[Administration]
[Edit Settings] screen for folders
You cannot change the position of the registered folder.
2 Copy You can create a template which copies the document. Select this agent if
you want to print a copy when you are sending a document to another
destination. You can also specify the [Save as file] agent or [Store to e-Filing]
agent at the same time.
3 Fax / InternetFax You can create a template for fax or Internet Fax transmission. You can also
specify the [Save as file] agent at the same time.
4 Scan You can create a template for a scan. You need to select either the [Email]
agent, [Save as file] agent, [Store to e-Filing] agent, or [Save to USB Media]
agent at the same time. You can specify up to two agents for a scan template.
5 Meta Scan This agent is enabled when the meta scan option is installed.
You can create a template for the meta scan option.
Refer to the document provided by the vendor of the application which
supports meta scan option for details.
6 Email You can transmit the document as an E-mail attachment.
7 Save as file You can save the document in a shared folder.
8 Store to e-Filing You can store the document in the e-Filing.
9 Save to USB Media You can save the document in USB media.
Item name Description
1 Icon This folder icon appears on the touch panel. You cannot change this icon.
2 Name 1 Enter a name 1 (upper position) for the folder icon that appears on the touch
panel. You can enter up to 20 characters including the following:
" * + , / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] |
3 Name 2 Enter a name 2 (lower position) for the folder icon that appears on the touch
panel. You can enter up to 20 characters including the following:
" * + , / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] |
4 Notification Enter a recipient E-mail address for the notification message. You can either
select an option to send it to the E-mail address set in a private group or
specify an E-mail address.
5 [Save] button Saves the changed settings.
6 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5 6
8.[Administration]
308 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
You can register buttons in a folder.
[Register from Job History] screen
Item name Description
1 Folder name Shows [Name 1] of the registered folder.
2 Folder Button Page You can register up to 60 buttons in a folder.
3 Jump to Click a number to jump directly to the registration page.
4 [Close] button Closes the edit screen.
5 [Edit Folder] button Opens the [Edit Settings] screen so that you can change [Name 1], [Name 2],
and [Notification]. You can delete the folder itself.
6 [Delete] button Deletes the registered template.
Item name Description
1 Button Icon Displays the button icon.
2 Type Displays the job type.
3 Date Time Displays the date and time that a job was performed.
4 [Details] button Displays the job details.
1
2
5 6
43
1 2 3 4
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 309
[Administration]
[Register from URL List] screen
[Register from Recommendation] screen
[Register from Function List] screen
Item name Description
1 Name Displays the name of the connection.
2 URL Displays the URL.
Item name Description
1 Button Icon Displays the button icon.
2 Name Displays the name of the function.
3 [Details] button Displays the details for the function.
Item name Description
1 Button Icon Displays the button icon.
2 Name Displays the name of the function.
1 2
1 2 3
1 2
8.[Administration]
310 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
[Register from Application] screen
Some applications have the button templates and show the [Details] button on the [Register from Application] screen.
When you click this button, you can select one of the buttons for which the button names and icon information are
registered as templates. The selected button template appears on the [Edit Settings] screen.
[Register from Home] screen
You can register from the Public Home or the User Home screen. The content displayed is the same for both.
When you register buttons from Home, you can select and copy the buttons inside folders, but you cannot copy
folders themselves.
Item name Description
1 Button Icon Displays the button icon.
2 Name Displays the name of the function.
Item name Description
1 Button Icon Displays the button icon.
2 Name Displays the name of the function.
1 2
1
2
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 311
[Administration]
Template settings
You can set the following functions according to the agents that you have selected on the [Edit Settings] screen for
templates.
P.306 “[Edit Settings] screen for templates”
Specify how the icon for the template is displayed in the touch panel, and the notification settings for the template.
You can open the [Edit Settings] screen of the registered template to change the settings but you cannot change the
agents.
Item name Description
1 Choose icon from the Gallery This indicates the icon that will be displayed in the touch panel. The icon is
automatically designated according to the agent that you select. You can
click the icon to choose it from the gallery.
2 Name 1 Enter a name 1 (upper position) for the icon that appears on the touch panel.
You can enter up to 20 characters including the following:
" * + , / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] |
3 Name 2 Enter a name 2 (lower position) for the icon that appears on the touch panel.
You can enter up to 20 characters including the following:
" * + , / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] |
4 Automatic Start Select whether the automatic start function is enabled or disabled. When this
check box is selected, pressing the template button registered on the Home
screen of the touch panel starts the operation automatically without pressing
the [START] button or [Scan].
If the user names or passwords of the User Authentication for Scan to E-mail
and the User Management Setting are different, or only the User
Authentication for Scan to E-mail is enabled, you need to enter the user name
and password of the User Authentication for Scan to E-mail also when
recalling the template with the automatic start function enabled.
5 Notification — Send Email
when an error occurs
Select this to send a notification message to the specified E-mail address
when an error occurs.
6 Notification — Send Email
when job is completed
Select this to send a notification message to the specified E-mail address
when a job is completed.
1
2
3
4
567
8
9
8.[Administration]
312 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Destination Setting
In the Recipient List page, you can specify the destinations to which the Fax, Internet Fax, or Scan to E-mail document
will be sent.
When you are setting up the destinations for the Scan to Email agent, you can only specify the E-mail addresses for the
destinations.
When you are setting up the destinations for the Fax/InternetFax agent, you can specify both fax numbers and E-mail
addresses for the destinations.
When Creating a Fax/Internet Fax agent:
When Creating an Email agent:
You can specify the destinations by entering their E-mail addresses or fax numbers manually, selecting destinations
from the address book, selecting destination groups from the address book, or searching for destinations in the LDAP
server.
The Fax Unit must be installed in this equipment to specify the fax numbers of the destinations.
7 Notification — Email to Enter a recipient E-mail address for the notification message. You can either
select an option to send it to the E-mail address set in a private group or
specify an E-mail address.
When you enable the Notification setting, make sure to set up the E-mail
settings in the [Email] submenu of the [Setup] menu in the TopAccess access
policy mode.
P.195 “Email settings”
8 [Save] button Saves the settings.
9 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 313
[Administration]
Entering the destinations manually
You can add a destination manually to the Recipient List.
You cannot enter destinations if [Restriction of Destination Selection Method] > [Prohibit Direct Entry] is enabled.
P.107 “Restriction of Destination Selection Method”
1
Click [Destination Setting] (when creating a Fax/Internet Fax agent) or [TO: Destination Setting] /
[CC: Destination Setting] / [BCC: Destination Setting] (when creating an Email agent) to open the
Recipient List page.
2
Click [New].
The Contact Property page is displayed.
3
Enter the E-mail address or fax number of the destination, in the [Destination] box.
You can specify the fax number for the destination only when the Fax Unit is installed.
When the fax number is entered, select [G3 Fax] in the [Fax Type] box. When the E-mail address is entered, select
[InternetFax] in the [Fax Type] box.
4
Click [OK].
The destination is added to the Recipient List page.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add all additional destinations that you require.
You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings.
P.317 “Removing the contacts from the Recipient List”
6
Click [Save].
The contacts are added as destinations.
8.[Administration]
314 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Selecting the destinations from the address book
You can select destinations from the address book in this equipment.
You cannot select destinations from the address book if [Restriction of Destination Selection Method] > [Prohibit Use
Of Local Address Book] is enabled.
P.107 “Restriction of Destination Selection Method”
1
Click [Destination Setting] to open the Recipient List page.
2
Click [Address Book].
The Address Book page is displayed.
3
Select the [Email] check boxes of users you want to add as the E-mail recipients or Internet Fax
recipients, and select the [Fax] check boxes of users you want to add as the Fax recipients.
When you are creating a Scan to E-mail template, only the [Email] check boxes are displayed in the Address
Book page.
You can specify the fax number for the destination only when the Fax Unit is installed.
If you want to sort the Recipient List by a specific group, select the desired group name in the [Group] box.
4
Click [Add].
The selected destinations are added to the Recipient List page.
You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings.
P.317 “Removing the contacts from the Recipient List”
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 315
[Administration]
5
Click [Save].
The contacts are added as destinations.
Selecting the groups from the address book
You can select groups from the address book.
You cannot select destinations from the address group if [Restriction of Destination Selection Method] > [Prohibit Use
Of Local Address Book] is enabled.
P.107 “Restriction of Destination Selection Method”
1
Click [Destination Setting] to open the Recipient List page.
2
Click [Address Group].
The Address Group page is displayed.
3
Select the [Group] check boxes that contain the desired destinations.
4
Click [Add].
All recipients in the selected groups are added to the Recipient List page.
You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings.
P.317 “Removing the contacts from the Recipient List”
5
Click [Save].
The contacts are added as destinations.
8.[Administration]
316 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Searching for destinations in the LDAP server
You can search for destinations in the registered LDAP server and in the address book.
The LDAP server used for the search must be registered by a user who is granted administrator privileges in access
policy mode.
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
1
Click [Destination Setting] to open the Recipient List page.
2
Click [Search].
The Search Contact page is displayed.
3
Select the directory service name that you want to search for in the [Directory Service Name]
box, and enter the search terms in the boxes that you want to search.
If you select the model name of this equipment at the [Directory Service Name] box, you can search for
destinations in the address book of this equipment.
TopAccess will search for destinations who match the entries.
Leaving the box blank allows wild-card searching. However, you must specify at least one.
4
Click [Search].
TopAccess will start searching for destinations in the LDAP server and the Search Address List page will display
the results.
5
Select the [Email] check boxes of users you want to add as the E-mail recipients or Internet Fax
recipients, and select the [Fax] check boxes of users you want to add as Fax recipients.
Click [Research] to return to step 3 so that you can change the search criteria and execute the search again.
You can specify the fax number for the destination only when the Fax Unit is installed.
The value of [company] and [department] will depend on the settings made by the user who is granted
administrator privileges in the access policy mode.
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 317
[Administration]
6
Click [Add].
The selected destinations are added to the Recipient List page.
You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings.
P.317 “Removing the contacts from the Recipient List”
7
Click [Save].
The contacts are added as destinations.
Removing the contacts from the Recipient List
1
Click [Destination Setting] to open the Recipient List page.
2
Select the check boxes of the destinations that you want to remove from the Recipient List, and
click [Delete].
The selected destinations are removed from the Recipient List.
InternetFax Setting
In the InternetFax Setting page, you can specify the content of the Internet Fax to be sent.
Item name Description
1 Subject This sets the subject of the Internet Faxes. Select [Scanned from (Device
Name) [(Template Name)] (Date) (Time)] to automatically apply the subject,
or enter the desired subject in the box. If you enter manually, the subject will
be [(Subject) (Date) (Time)].
2 From Address Enter the E-mail address of the sender. When the recipient replies to a
received document, the message will be sent to this E-mail address. You can
enter up to 140 alphanumerical characters.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
318 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Fax Setting
In the Fax Setting page, you can specify how the fax will be sent.
3 From Name Select “From Name in Internet fax general setting” or one registered From
Name from the list.
P.181 “From Name Registration”
P.202 “Setting up InternetFax Setting”
4 Body Enter the body message of the Internet Fax. You can enter up to 1000
characters (including spaces).
5 File Format Select the file format of the scanned image. Only [TIFF-S] (TIFF-FX (Profile S))
format can be selected.
6 Fragment Page Size Select the size of the message fragmentation. [No Fragmentation] is set as
the default.
Item name Description
1 Preview Select whether or not to preview before sending a fax.
ON — Select this to preview.
OFF — Select this not to preview.
2 Resolution Select the resolution for sending faxes.
Standard — Select the Standard mode as the normal resolution. This mode
is suitable when you are frequently transmitting text documents with
normal size characters.
Fine — Select the Fine mode as the normal resolution. This mode is suitable
when you are transmitting documents with small size characters or fine
drawings.
Ultra Fine — Select the Ultra Fine mode as the normal resolution. This
mode is suitable when you are transmitting documents with very small size
characters or detailed drawings.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 319
[Administration]
3 Original Mode Select the image quality mode for sending faxes.
Text — Select the Text mode as the normal image quality mode. This mode
is suitable when you are transmitting text documents.
Text/Photo — Select the Text/Photo mode as the normal image quality
mode. This mode is suitable when you are transmitting documents which
contain both texts and photos.
Photo — Select the Photo mode as the normal image quality mode. This
mode is suitable when you are transmitting photo documents.
4 Exposure Select the exposure for sending faxes.
Select [Auto] to automatically apply the ideal contrast, or adjust the contrast
manually in 11 stages.
5 Transmission Type Select the send mode.
Memory Transmit — Select the Memory TX mode to automatically send
the document after it has been temporarily stored to memory. This mode is
useful if you want to return original files immediately. You can also send the
same originals to two or more remote faxes.
Direct Transmit — Select the Direct TX mode to send the original as it is
being scanned. This mode is useful if you want confirmation from the
remote party. Originals are not stored to memory, and you can specify only
one remote fax at a time.
You can select [Direct Transmit] when you have created a template for Fax/
InternetFax (not for Saved as file).
When Fax/InternetFax and [Save as file setting] are combined, this item will
be unselectable and will not be displayed.
6 ECM Enable or disable the ECM (Error Correction Mode) to automatically resend
any portion of the document affected by phone line noise or distortion.
7
Line Select
*1
Select whether specifying the line to be used.
Auto — Select not to specify the line to be used.
Line1 — Select to use Line 1 for this Fax agent.
Line2 — Select to use Line 2 for this Fax agent if installed.
8 Quality Transmit Select this to send a document in the Quality TX mode. This feature sends a
document at a slower speed than normal so the transmission will be less
affected by line conditions.
9 SUB/SEP Enter the SUB number or SEP number if you want to set the mailbox
transmission.
10 SID/PWD Enter the password for SUB or SEP if required.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
320 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
*1 This function is not available for some models.
11 Polling Select this to set Polling communications.
(Blank) — Select the blank box when you do not want to perform polling.
Transmission — Select this to perform Polling Reservation that allows
users to store the document in the memory.
Received — Select this to perform Turnaround Polling that allows users to
poll another fax after transmitting documents to the remote fax on the
same phone call.
You can select [Transmission] when you have created a template for Fax/
InternetFax (not to be Saved as file).
When Fax/InternetFax and [Save as file setting] are combined, this item will
be unselectable and will not be displayed.
12 Password Enter the 4-digit security code for the document to be stored or received.
13 Fax Number(Security) When you select [Transmission] at the [Polling] box, enter the security fax
number that allows polling of stored document.
When you select [Received] at the [Polling] box, enter the security fax number
to poll the documents from remote faxes.
14 Delayed Transmit If you enable the delayed communications for this agent, enter the day and
time to send a document. Delayed transmission is disabled when the date is
set to “0”.
15 Priority Transmit Select whether the document will be sent prior to other jobs.
16 Line Monitor Select this to check the connection with the remote fax by confirming Line
Monitor.
17 From Name Select “Terminal ID” or one registered From Name from the list.
P.176 “Setting up Fax Setting”
P.181 “From Name Registration”
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 321
[Administration]
Email Setting
In the Email Setting page, you can specify the content of the Scan to Email document to be sent.
Item name Description
1 Subject This sets the subject of the E-mail.
Use Email Setting in Administration Setting — Select this to set the subject
specified in [Administration] > [Setup] > [Email] as subject.
Send data from (Device Name)[(Template Name)] — Select this to set the
[(Template Name)] data sent from (Device Name) as subject.
<Entry box> — Enter the text to set as subject.
Add the date and time to the Subject — Select this to append date and time
to the subject selected above.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, you can use a variable as the subject.
For more information on variables, see the reference below:
P.385 “Variables of XML format files”
2 From Address This sets the E-mail address of the sender. When the recipient replies to a
received document, the message will be sent to this E-mail address.
Use From Address Setting set by Administrator — Select this to use the
E-mail address specified in [Administration] > [Setup] > [Email]. When User
Authentication or Email Authentication is enabled, select this to use the
E-mail address specified in [Administration] > [Security] > [Authentication] >
[Email Address Setting].
<Entry box> — Specify the sender address using up to 140 alphanumeric
characters.
3 From Name This sets the sender name of the E-mail document.
Use From Name Setting set by Administrator — Select this to use the
sender name specified in [Administration] > [Setup] > [Email]. When User
Authentication or Email Authentication is enabled, select this to use the
sender name specified in [Administration] > [Security] > [Authentication] >
[Email Address Setting].
<Entry box> — Specify the sender name using up to 64 characters.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8.[Administration]
322 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
4 Body Enter the body message of the Scan to Email documents. You can enter up to
1000 characters (including spaces).
5 File Format Select the file format of the scanned image.
TIFF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page TIFF file.
TIFF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page TIFF files.
PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF file.
PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF files.
Slim PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as Multi-page slim
PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over
the quality of the image.
Slim PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as
Single-page slim PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing
the file size over the quality of the image.
XPS(Multi)— Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page XPS file.
XPS(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page XPS files.
JPEG — Select this to save scanned images as JPEG files.
PDF/A(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF/A
file.
PDF/A(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF/A files.
DOCX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Word file
(DOCX) after OCR processing.
DOCX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Word
file (DOCX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Excel file
(XLSX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Excel
file (XLSX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
You can select whether to enable OCR by [Enable OCR].
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, only the PDF (Multi) and the PDF
(Single) are selectable for a file format. For the Forced Encryption function,
see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 323
[Administration]
6 Encryption Set this for encrypting PDF files if you have selected [PDF (Multi)] or [PDF
(Single)] in the File Format setting.
Encryption — Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files.
User Password — Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files.
Master Password — Enter a password for changing PDF encryption settings.
Encryption Level — Select an encryption level.
40-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 3.0, PDF V1.1.
128-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 5.0, PDF V1.4.
128-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 7.0, PDF V1.6.
256-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 9.0, PDF V1.7.
Authority — Select the desired authority items on encrypted PDF files.
Printing — Select this to authorize users to print documents.
Change of Documents — Select this to authorize users to change
documents.
Content Copying or Extraction — Select this to authorize users to copy
and extract the contents of documents.
Content Extraction for accessibility — Select this to enable the
accessibility feature.
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, you cannot clear the
[Encryption] check box. For the Forced Encryption function, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
The user password and the master password are not set at the factory
shipment.
Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one-byte alphanumerical characters.
The user password must differ from the master password.
These passwords can be re-entered only by an authorized user. Users cannot
change the settings of the [Encryption Level] box and the [Authority] box
noted below if they are not authorized to change the master password. The
setting of the encryption will become available when either the user
password or the master password is entered. For the details of the encryption
setting, see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords.
7 Digital Signature Select whether the addition of the digital signature to PDF is enabled or
disabled.
You cannot select this setting if you have selected a file format except PDF
(Multi), PDF (Single), Slim PDF (Multi), Slim PDF (Single), PDF/A (Multi), and
PDF/A (Single).
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
324 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Save as file Setting
In the Save as file Setting page, you can specify how and where a scanned file will be stored.
8 File Name Select how the scanned file will be named. Select [DocYYMMDD] to name it as
described, or enter the desired file name in the box.
When you want to add the date and time in the file name, select the [Add the
date and time to a file name] check box.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, if you select [Add the date and time to a file
name] in [File Name], it is also applied to the meta data file name.
9 Fragment Message Size Select the size of the message fragmentation. [No Fragmentation] is set as
the default.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 325
[Administration]
Item name Description
1 File Format Select the file format for the scanned file to be stored.
TIFF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page TIFF file.
TIFF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page TIFF files.
PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF file.
PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF files.
Slim PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as Multi-page slim
PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over
the quality of the image.
Slim PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as
Single-page slim PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing
the file size over the quality of the image.
XPS(Multi)— Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page XPS file.
XPS(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page XPS files.
JPEG — Select this to save scanned images as JPEG files.
PDF/A(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF/A
file.
PDF/A(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF/A files.
DOCX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Word file
(DOCX) after OCR processing.
DOCX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Word
file (DOCX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Excel file
(XLSX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Excel
file (XLSX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
You can select whether to enable OCR by [Enable OCR].
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, only the PDF (Multi) and the PDF
(Single) are selectable for a file format. For the Forced Encryption function,
see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
8.[Administration]
326 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
2 Encryption Set this for encrypting PDF files if you have selected [PDF (Multi)] or [PDF
(Single)] in the File Format setting.
Encryption — Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files.
User Password — Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files.
Master Password — Enter a password for changing PDF encryption settings.
Encryption Level — Select an encryption level.
40-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 3.0, PDF V1.1.
128-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 5.0, PDF V1.4.
128-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 7.0, PDF V1.6.
256-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 9.0, PDF V1.7.
Authority — Select the desired authority items on encrypted PDF files.
Printing — Select this to authorize users to print documents.
Change of Documents — Select this to authorize users to change
documents.
Content Copying or Extraction — Select this to authorize users to copy
and extract the contents of documents.
Content Extraction for accessibility — Select this to enable the
accessibility feature.
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, you cannot clear the
[Encryption] check box. For the Forced Encryption function, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
The user password and the master password are not set at the factory
shipment.
Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one-byte alphanumerical characters.
The user password must differ from the master password.
These passwords can be re-entered only by an authorized user. Users cannot
change the settings of the [Encryption Level] box and the [Authority] box
noted below if they are not authorized to change the master password. The
setting of the encryption will become available when either the user
password or the master password is entered. For the details of the encryption
setting, see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords.
3 Digital Signature Select whether the addition of the digital signature to PDF is enabled or
disabled.
You cannot select this setting if you have selected a file format except PDF
(Multi), PDF (Single), PDF/A (Multi), and PDF/A (Single).
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 327
[Administration]
4 Destination — Use local folder Select this to save a scanned file to the “FILE_SHARE” folder.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, you can only specify one destination.
5 Destination — Remote 1 Select this check box to save the scanned file to a network folder. How you
can set this item depends on how the user with administrator privileges
configured Remote 1 in the [Save as file] submenu under the [Setup] menu.
When you select [Allow the following network folder to be used as a
destination], you can only select [Use Administrator Setting]. The protocol
and the network path are displayed below this item.
When you select [Allow user to select network folder to be used as a
destination], you can select [Use User Setting] and enter the following items
to specify where to save the file.
If you are allowed to specify a network folder, select [Use User Setting] and
enter the following items to specify where to save the file.
Protocol
Select the protocol to be used for uploading a scanned file to the network
folder.
SMB — Select this to send a scanned file to the network folder using the
SMB protocol.
FTP — Select this to send a scanned file to the FTP server.
FTPS — Select this to send a scanned file to the FTP server using FTP over
SSL/TLS.
NetWare IPX/SPX — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the IPX/SPX protocol.
NetWare TCP/IP — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the TCP/IP protocol.
Server Name
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the FTP server name or IP
address where a scanned file will be sent. For example, to send a scanned file
to the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP folder in the FTP server, enter
“192.168.1.1” in this box.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] as the protocol, enter the NetWare file
server name or Tree/Context name (when NDS is available).
When you select [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol, enter the IP address of the
NetWare file server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and
symbols.
Port Number(Command)
Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select [FTP] as the
protocol. Generally “-” is entered for the control port. When “-” is entered, the
default port number, that is set for FTP Client by an administrator, will be
used. If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client, ask your
administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number.
You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 65535 using numbers and
hyphens (-). Hyphen (-) is set as the default.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
328 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Destination — Remote 1
(Continued)
Network Path
When you select [SMB] as the protocol, enter the network path to the network
folder. For example, to specify the “users\scanned” folder in the computer
named “Client01”, enter “\\Client01\users\scanned\”.
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the directory in the specified FTP
server. For example, to specify the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP
folder in the FTP server, enter “user/scanned”.
When you select “NetWare IPX/SPX” or “NetWare TCP/IP” as the protocol,
enter the folder path in the NetWare file server. For example, to specify the
“sys\scan” folder in the NetWare file server, enter “\sys\scan”.
You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols.
Login User Name
Enter the login user name to access an SMB server, FTP server, or NetWare file
server, if required. When you select [FTP] as the protocol, an anonymous log
in is assumed if you leave this box blank. You can enter up to 32
alphanumerical characters and symbols other than <, >, “ (double quotation),
: (colon) and ; (semicolon). A user name with only a single space is not
possible.
Password
Enter the password to access an SMB server, FTP server, or NetWare file
server, if required. You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters,
symbols, and spaces. A single space only can also be entered.
Retype Password
Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
[Execute] button
Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, you can only specify one destination.
6 Destination — Remote 2 Select this check box to save the scanned file to a network folder. How you
can set this item depends on how the user with administrator privileges
configured Remote 2 in the [Save as file] submenu under the [Setup] menu.
If the user with administrator privileges specified Remote 2 to use only the
specified network folder, you can only select [Use Administrator Setting]. The
protocol and the network path are displayed below this item.
If the Remote 2 allows you to specify a network folder, you can specify the
network folder settings. See the description of the Remote 1 option for each
item.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, you can only specify one destination.
7 File Name Select how the scanned file will be named. Select [DocYYMMDD] to name it as
described, or enter the desired file name in the box.
When you want to add the date and time in the file name, select the [Add the
date and time to a file name] check box.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, if you select [Add the date and time to a file
name] in [File Name], it is also applied to the meta data file name.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 329
[Administration]
Box Setting
In the Box Setting page, you can specify how scanned images will be stored in the Box.
Store to USB Device Setting
On the Store to USB Device Setting page, you can set the method for saving templates in USB media.
Item name Description
1 Destination Specify the destination box number for e-Filing.
Box Number — Select the box number to store the scanned image.
Password — Enter the password if the specified box is set with a password.
Retype Password — Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
2 Folder Name Enter the name of the folder where scanned images will be stored. If the
specified named folder does not exit, the folder will be created automatically.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
3 Document Name Select how the scanned file will be named. Select [DocYYMMDD] to name it as
described, or enter the desired file name in the box.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
8.[Administration]
330 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Item name Description
1 File Format Select the file format of the scanned image.
TIFF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page TIFF file.
TIFF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page TIFF files.
PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF file.
PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-page
PDF files.
Slim PDF(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as Multi-page slim
PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over
the quality of the image.
Slim PDF(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as
Single-page slim PDF files. Select this when you give priority to minimizing
the file size over the quality of the image.
XPS(Multi)— Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page XPS file.
XPS(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-page
XPS files.
JPEG — Select this to save scanned images as JPEG files.
PDF/A(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF/A
file.
PDF/A(Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF/A files.
DOCX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Word file
(DOCX) after OCR processing.
DOCX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Word
file (DOCX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page Excel file
(XLSX) after OCR processing.
XLSX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page Excel
file (XLSX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
PPTX(Single) — Select this to save scanned images as a Single-page
PowerPoint file (PPTX) after OCR processing.
You can select whether to enable OCR by [Enable OCR].
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, only the PDF (Multi) and the PDF
(Single) are selectable for a file format. For the Forced Encryption function,
see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 331
[Administration]
2 Encryption Set this for encrypting PDF files if you have selected [PDF (Multi)] or [PDF
(Single)] in the File Format setting.
Encryption — Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files.
User Password — Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files.
Master Password — Enter a password for changing PDF encryption settings.
Encryption Level — Select an encryption level.
40-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 3.0, PDF V1.1.
128-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 5.0, PDF V1.4.
128-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 7.0, PDF V1.6.
256-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible
with Acrobat 9.0, PDF V1.7.
Authority — Select the desired authority items on encrypted PDF files.
Printing — Select this to authorize users to print documents.
Change of Documents — Select this to authorize users to change
documents.
Content Copying or Extraction — Select this to authorize users to copy and
extract the contents of documents.
Content Extraction for accessibility — Select this to enable the
accessibility feature.
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, you cannot clear the
[Encryption] check box. For the Forced Encryption function, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
The user password and the master password are not set at the factory
shipment.
Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one-byte alphanumerical characters.
The user password must differ from the master password.
These passwords can be re-entered only by an authorized user. Users cannot
change the settings of the [Encryption Level] box and the [Authority] box
noted below if they are not authorized to change the master password. The
setting of the encryption will become available when either the user password
or the master password is entered. For the details of the encryption setting,
see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords.
3 Digital Signature Select whether the addition of the digital signature to PDF is enabled or
disabled.
You cannot select this setting if you have selected a file format except PDF
(Multi), PDF (Single), Slim PDF (Multi), Slim PDF (Single), PDF/A (Multi), and
PDF/A (Single).
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
332 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Scan Setting
In the Scan Setting page, you can specify how originals are scanned for the Scan to File, Scan to Email, and Scan to
e-Filing agent.
4 File Name Select how the scanned file will be named. Select [DocYYMMDD] to name it as
described, or enter the desired file name in the box.
When you want to add the date and time in the file name, select the [Add the
date and time to a file name] check box.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, if you select [Add the date and time to a file
name] in [File Name], it is also applied to the meta data file name.
Item name Description
1 Preview Select whether to display the scanned image on the touch panel after the
scanning an original.
OFF — Select this not to display the scanned image.
ON — Select this to display the scanned image.
Item name Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
22
26
25
24
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 333
[Administration]
2 Single/2-Sided Scan Select whether to scan one side or both sides of an original. You cannot select
this when [Book Original Scan] is enabled. Available only when the Reversing
Automatic Document Feeder is installed.
Single — Select this to scan one side of an original.
Duplex Book — Select this to scan both sides of originals when the pages
are printed vertically in the same direction and bound along the vertical
side of the paper.
Duplex Tablet — Select this to scan both sides of originals with a vertical
reversal to be bound along the horizontal side of the paper.
3 Rotation Select how the scanned images will be rotated. You cannot select the 180-
degree and 270-degree rotations (right two options) when [Book Original
Scan] is enabled.
4 Book Original Scan Specify whether to scan two facing pages of book-type originals separately.
You cannot specify this when [Omit Blank Page] is set to [ON].
Disable — Disables the Book Original Scan function.
Enable — Enables the Book Original Scan function. You can set [Book Start
Page], [Book Layout], [Book Image Shift], and [Book Image Shift Margin].
5 Color Mode Select the color mode for scanning.
Black — Select this to scan in the black mode.
Gray — Select this to scan in the gray scale mode.
Full Color — Select this to scan in the full color mode.
Auto Color — Select this to scan in the auto color mode.
The [Color Mode] option cannot be set when [Slim PDF (Multi)] or [Slim PDF
(Single)] is selected in the [File Format] option in the Save as File Settings
and that in the Email Setting.
When [Auto Color] is selected, you cannot select JPEG or TIFF (Multi) for the
file format. Also when [Black] is selected, JPEG is not allowed.
6 Resolution Select the resolution for scanning.
The [Resolution] option cannot be set when [Slim PDF (Multi)] or [Slim PDF
(Single)] is selected in the [File Format] option in the Save as File Settings and
that in the Email Setting.
7 Book Start Page Select a starting page of the book-type originals. You can select this only
when [Book Original Scan] is enabled.
Right — Select this to scan two facing pages separately for the book-type
originals which start from the right page.
Left — Select this to scan two facing pages separately for the book-type
originals which start from the left page.
8 Book Layout Select how to open the book-type originals. You can select this only when
[Book Original Scan] is enabled.
Open from right — Select this to scan two facing pages separately for the
book-type originals which you open from the right.
Open from left — Select this to scan two facing pages separately for the
book-type originals which you open from the left.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
334 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
9 Book Image Shift Select whether to shift the images of two facing pages that have been
scanned separately, considering the margins for binding the book-type
originals. You can select this only when [Book Original Scan] is enabled.
Enable — Select this to scan two facing pages separately and shift the page
images, considering the margins.
Disable — Select this to scan two facing pages separately as they are
without considering the margins.
10 Book Image Shift Margin Set the margin of the book-type originals from 0 to 30 mm to shift the page
images of two facing pages that have been scanned separately. You can set
the margin only when [Book Original Scan] and [Book Image Shift] are
enabled.
11 Compression Select the compression for scanning.
This cannot be set when [Black] is selected at the [Color Mode] box.
The [Compression] option cannot be set when [Slim PDF (Multi)] or [Slim
PDF (Single)] is selected in the [File Format] option in the Save as File
Settings and that in the Email Setting.
12 Original Mode Select the document type of the originals.
Text — Select this to set the Text mode as the default original mode.
Text/Photo — Select this to set the Text/Photo mode as the default original
mode. Depending on the model, this can be selected only when [Black] is
selected in the [Color Mode] box.
*1
Photo — Select this to set the Photo mode as the default original mode.
This cannot be set when [Gray] is selected in the [Color Mode] box.
13 Exposure Select the exposure for scanning.
Select [Auto] to automatically apply the best contrast for the document. You
can also manually adjust the exposure in 11 stages. The farther to the right
that you set the value, the darker the density of the scanned image will
become.
[Auto] is not available when [Gray], [Full Color], or [Auto Color] is selected at
the [Color Mode] box. In that case, set the exposure manually.
14 Original Size Select the original size.
If this is set to [Auto], the size is automatically detected. Select [Mixed
Original Sizes] to scan a document with mixed sizes. You can also specify the
original size. If this is set to [Custom], you can specify the custom original size
for scanning.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 335
[Administration]
15 Custom Size Select the custom original size for scanning. You can set [Skew Correction] for
the following settings.
Registered Size — Select this to select the custom original size that has
been registered on the control panel.
Auto Cut of Print Area — Select this to set the custom size by cutting the
print area of the original. You can enter a value in [Expand Size] to expand
the area.
Auto Detected — Select this to set the custom size by detecting the original
size automatically. This function is available only when the Dual Scan
Document Feeder (DSDF) has been installed.
16 Background Select the density level of the background of the scanned image. Density can
be adjusted in 9 levels. The farther to the right that you set the value, the
darker the density of the background will become.
17 Contrast Select the contrast level of the scanned image. Contrast can be adjusted in 9
levels. The farther to the right that you set the value, the higher the contrast
level will become.
This is not available when [Black] or [Gray] is selected at the [Color Mode]
box.
18 Sharpness Select the sharpness level of the scanned image. Sharpness can be adjusted
in 9 levels. The farther to the right that you set the value, the sharper the
scanned image will become.
19 Saturation Select the saturation level of the scanned image. Saturation can be adjusted
in 7 levels. The farther to the right you set the value, the more vivid the
scanned image will become.
This is not available when [Black] or [Gray] is selected at the [Color Mode]
box.
20 RGB Adjustment Select the RGB density level of the scanned image. RGB density can be
adjusted in 9 levels for each color. The farther to the right you set the value,
the darker the density of the selected color will become.
This is not available when [Black] or [Gray] is selected at the [Color Mode]
box.
21 Omit Blank Page Select whether to automatically omit a blank page in the scanned image if it
is included in originals. You cannot select this when [Book Original Scan] is
enabled.
OFF — The blank page is not omitted.
ON — The blank page is omitted.
22 Outside Erase Select whether to erase a shade that appears outside of the scanned image
when an original is placed on the original glass while the Original Cover is left
open. The erased shade will be whitened.
If you want to erase it, you can select the criteria in 7 levels for judging if it is
an area to be erased. The farther to the right you select, the larger the area
that will be erased. [OFF] is selected by default.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
336 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
23 Scanner Streaks Reduction Use this setting if streaks are conspicuous on images when originals are
scanned.
OFF — Select this not to perform streak reduction.
ON — Select this to perform streak reduction.
If this function is used, the scanning speed will be slower than usual.
24 OCR You can specify the prioritized language and auto rotation for OCR
processing.
Language — Select the primary and secondary languages.
Auto Rotation — Specify whether or not to automatically rotate.
25 Drop Out Color Select the drop out level of colors eliminated from the scanned original. Drop
out can be adjusted in 7 levels. Select [OFF] to disable this function.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 337
[Administration]
26 Multiple Annotation Set the multiple annotation function that allows you to add specified
information as annotations when the scanned originals are saved as PDF
files.
ON/OFF — Tun on or off the multiple annotation function. When you select
[ON], you can specify the following information to add it as annotations.
Setting Items — As you select [String1], [String2], [Serial Number], [Date],
and [Page] arbitrarily, they appear in order of selection. They are added as
annotations.
String1, Space — Select the check box so that you can enter up to 32
characters as a string 1. Select [Space] to add a space after the string 1.
String2, Space — Select the check box so that you can enter up to 32
characters as a string 2. Select [Space] to add a space after the string 2.
Serial Number, Digits, Space — Select the check box so that you can enter
the first serial number and the number of digits (1 - 10). Select [Space] to
add a space after the serial number.
Date, Space — Select the check box so that you can select the date format
(YYYY-MM-DD, DD-MM-YYYY, or MM-DD-YYYY) and specify the date. When you
select [User Setting], you can enter an arbitrary date. When you select
[Auto], the date of the file creation is automatically set. Select [Space] to
add a space after the date.
Page, Start Page, Space — Select the page format (page number only,
page number enclosed with hyphens, or page number/total page number)
and specify the starting page number (1 - 30,000). Select [Space] to add a
space after the page number.
Position — Select the annotation position (Top Left, Top Center, Top Right,
Middle Left, Middle Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Center, or Bottom Right).
Start Page — Enter the first page number (1 - 1,000) to start adding
annotations.
End Page, Last — Because [Last] is selected as a default, annotations are
added up to the last page: you cannot enter the end page number. To end
adding annotations before the last page, clear the [Last] selection and
enter the end page number (1 - 1,000).
Background — Select the background (None or White) of the annotation
characters.
Stamp Direction — Select the direction (Horizontal or Vertical) of the
annotation characters.
Font Size — Select the font size (8 - 16) of annotation characters.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
338 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
*1 Available only for models that support color printing.
Extended Field settings
You can set extended fields for meta data.
Set the field you have registered in [Administration] > [Registration] > [Extended Field Definition].
Extended Field Properties
[Extended Field Properties] set under the selected extended field definition are displayed.
Values set in this screen are used as the default values for [Extended Field Properties] displayed on the touch panel
when using Meta Scan.
Items with an asterisk (*) attached at the beginning of the [Extended Field Properties] name are mandatory entry
fields.
Multiple Annotation
(Continued)
The multiple annotation function is disabled when scanned originals are
saved in the file formats other than PDF.
The appearance order of annotations in the [Annotation] box might
change. Even if you have selected [String2] and [String1] in this order and
saved them, the order changes to [String1] and [String2] and the specified
strings are replaced with each other.
When you select [User Setting] at [Date], the entered date is added as it is
for an annotation. Do not enter an impossible date.
If you select [Space] for the last selected annotation, the last space is
ignored.
The annotation is not added if you enter the number at [Start Page] which
is greater than the real number of scanned originals. You cannot enter the
number which is greater than the one entered at [End Page].
The annotation is added up to the last page if you enter the number at [End
Page] which is greater than the real number of scanned originals. You
cannot enter the number which is smaller than the one set entered at [Start
Page].
When you select [Vertical] at [Stamp Direction], the whole annotation is
rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise and characters are arranged
upward. And you cannot select [Top Center] and [Bottom Center] at
[Position].
Item name Description
1 Extended Field Definition No. Allows you to select a registered extended field definition.
Item name Description
1
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 339
[Administration]
Public Theme Settings
You can specify the theme of the shared home screen.
Item name Description
1 Save Saves the changed settings.
2 Cancel Cancels the operation.
3 Home Screen Specify the theme for Home screen.
You can select the theme from a list if you select [Choose Theme from the
Gallery].
4 Common Screen Specify the theme for common screens.
You can select the theme from a list if you select [Choose Theme from the
Gallery].
General users cannot change this setting.
21
3
4
8.[Administration]
340 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Public Home Settings
You can specify the background, button size, and transparency of the shared home screen.
Item name Description
1 Save Saves the changed settings.
2 Cancel Cancels the operation.
3 Background Settings Specify the background of the home screen.
You can select the background design from a list if you select [Choose
Background Image from Gallery] at [Current Background].
General users cannot change this setting.
4 Button Size Settings Specify the button size.
You can select the button size from a list if you select [Choose Button Size
from Gallery] at [Current Button Size].
5 Transparency Settings Specify the transparency of the home screen.
Title — You can specify the transparency of the title bar.
Panel Button — You can specify the transparency of the buttons.
6 Font Settings Specify the font used on the public home screen.
Font Size — You can specify the font size.
Font Color — You can specify the font color.
21
3
4
5
6
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 341
[Administration]
Default Home
You can use Default Home to specify the default status of the home screen that is displayed when you press the
[Home] button on the control panel.
The [Default Home] submenu can be accessed from the [Registration] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Registration] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
Default Home Settings
You can specify the background, button size, and transparency of the initial home screen.
Setting items are the same as [Public Home Settings].
P.340 “Public Home Settings”
Item name Description
1 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
2 [Delete] button Deletes the selected panel button.
3 Panel button list Displays a list of panel buttons you can select for the shared home. Select the
panel buttons you want to use.
Click the link to edit the home type.
P.306 “[Select Home Type] screen”
2
1
3
3
8.[Administration]
342 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Simple Screen Settings
You can select the background of the simple screen.
The [Simple Screen Settings] submenu can be accessed from the [Registration] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Registration] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
Item name Description
1 Save Saves the changed settings.
2 Cancel Cancels the operation.
3 Current Background Shows the name of the current background.
4 Choose Theme from the
Gallery
Click this to show the list, so that you can select the background.
21
3
4
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 343
[Administration]
Image/Icon Management
You can manage background and icon images.
Panel Background Image
You can import images in the following format.
Image size: 1024 x 600 pixels (recommended size)
Image format: png
Color: 24 bits
Maximum file size: 1.5MB
Panel Icon Image
Item name Description
1 Import Background Image Imports a background image.
[Choose File] button — You can select an image file.
[Import] button — You can import the selected image file.
2 Current Background Image
List
Displays the list of the registered images and allows you to manage them.
[Delete] button — You can delete the selected image file.
[Export] button — You can export the selected image file.
3 Exported Background Image
Information
Displays information on the selected image file.
Item name Description
1 Import Panel Icon Image Imports an icon image.
[Choose File] button — You can select an image file.
[Import] button — You can import the selected image file.
1
2
3
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
344 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
You can import images in the following format.
Image size: 193 x 128 pixels
Image format: png
Color: 24 bits
Maximum file size: 50KB
Card Authentication Guidance Image
You can import images in the following format.
Image size: 500 x 320 pixels
Image format: png, gif
Maximum file size: 2MB
2 Current Icon Image List Displays the list of the registered images and allows you to manage them.
[Delete] button — You can delete the selected image file.
[Export] button — You can export the selected image file.
3 Exported Icon Image
Information
Displays information on the exported image file.
Item name Description
1 Import Card Authentication
Guidance Image
Imports a image for the card authentication guidance.
[Choose File] button — You can select an image file.
[Import] button — You can import the selected image file.
2 Card Authentication
Guidance Image List
Displays the list of the registered images and allows you to manage them.
[Delete] button — You can delete the selected image file.
[Export] button — You can export the selected image file.
3 Export Card Authentication
Guidance Information
Displays information on the exported image file.
Item name Description
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 345
[Administration]
Home Data List
You can use Home Data List to display a list of all saved home screens and manage them.
The [Home Data List] submenu can be accessed from the [Registration] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Registration] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received Forward settings
You can forward received faxes and Internet Faxes to a specified address using fax received forward and Internet Fax
received forward functions. You can check all faxes and Internet Faxes received by this equipment using these
functions.
The [Fax Received Forward]/[InternetFAX Received Forward] submenu can be accessed from the [Registration] menu
on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Registration] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
To forward received faxes, you need to set differently on two screens [Fax Received Forward] and [InternetFAX
Received Forward] according to the reception method. The settings are common except the selection of fax lines via
the telephone lines.
Item name Description
1 [Delete] button Deletes the selected home screen.
2 [Delete All] button Deletes all home screens.
3 Home screen list Displays a list of registered home screens.
1
2
3
2
3
1
8.[Administration]
346 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
You can also forward using the F-code communications function on this equipment when communicating with a
fax which supports the F-code communications function. You need to create a mailbox in advance. Also, you can
use the TSI (sender information) forwarding function by making the counterpart fax number as a box number and
forwarding documents in the box (mailbox) to a specified saving location.
[Fax Received Forward] is available only when the Fax Unit is installed on this equipment.
Two lines become available in [Fax Received Forward] by installing the 2nd Line for FAX Unit in the FAX Unit. It is
possible to set the reception setting in each line. The received faxes are forwarded to the specified destinations
according to the settings regardless of whether the faxes are received through line 1 or line 2.
The image quality of the file that is stored by Save as file, E-mail, and Store to e-Filing is different from the output of
the received fax when it is printed.
The received fax and Internet Faxes can be transmitted to the following destinations:
Other Internet Fax devices
Local folder in this equipment or network folders
E-mail addresses
Box in this equipment
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Click this button to save the settings after you have set them.
2 Line1/Line2 Select a fax line [Line1] or [Line2] because you can set up two lines differently
for faxes via the telephone lines. If you have set up for the line 1 and want to
apply the settings for the line 1 to the line 2, select [Apply Line1 settings to
Line2 settings].
3 [Select Agent] button Select [Forward] and other agents from among the following options to
forward received faxes. To stop forwarding faxes, clear the [Forward] check
box.
Internet/Fax(Relay) — Forwards received faxes to another Internet Fax
device. This agent can be combined with the [Save as file] or [Store to e-
Filing] agent.
Save as file — Forwards received faxes to a shared folder on the equipment
or a network folder. This agent can be combined with another one.
Email — Forwards received faxes to E-mail addresses. This agent can be
combined with the [Save as file] or [Store to e-Filing] agent.
Store to e-Filing — Forwards received faxes to e-Filing on the equipment.
This agent can be combined with another one.
When you click the [Select Agent] button, the screen shows the necessary
settings and the function lists for the selected agents. When you click the
button located above each list, another window appears so that you can set
the necessary functions.
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 347
[Administration]
Setting up Document Print (Fax/InternetFax Received Forward)
Select when to print received fax documents that are forwarded.
Setting up Destination Setting (Fax/Internet Fax Received Forward)
When you have selected the [Internet/Fax(Relay)] or [Email] agent, you can specify the E-mail address to which
received faxes are forwarded. Click the [Destination Setting], [TO: Destination Setting], [CC: Destination Setting], or
[BCC: Destination Setting] button to open the following window for setup.
Recipient List
Item name Description
1 Document Print
Always — Select this to always print forwarded document.
ON ERROR — Select this to print the received document when an error
occurred on all forwarding destinations. (For example, the document is not
printed when the E-mail transmission only failed in a combined setting of
Save as File and E-mail.)
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves recipient settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 [New] button Displays a screen where you can register an E-mail address as the recipient.
P.50 “[Create Destination information]/[Edit Destination information]
screen”
4 [Address Book] button Allows you to select a recipient from the address book.
5 [Address Group] button Allows you to select an address book group as a destination.
6 [Search] button Allows you to search a recipient from the address book.
P.52 “[Search Contact] screen”
7 [Delete] button Deletes the selected recipient.
8 Name Displays the names registered to the address book.
You can remove destinations that you have added to the Recipient List before
saving the destination settings.
9 Destination Displays the E-mail addresses.
1
3
1
4 5 6 7
8 9
2
8.[Administration]
348 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
[Contact Property] screen
You can specify an E-mail address as the recipient.
Setting up InternetFax Setting (Fax/Internet Fax Received Forward)
When you have selected the [Internet/Fax(Relay)] agent, you can set how to forward received faxes. Click the
[Internet/Fax(Relay)] button to open the following window for setup.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Saves the recipient.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 [Reset] button Deletes the entered E-mail address.
4 Destination Enter the E-mail address.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Subject This sets the subject of the Internet Faxes. Select [Scanned from (Device
Name) [(Template Name)] (Date) (Time)] to automatically apply the subject,
or enter the desired subject in the box. If you manually enter the subject, the
subject will be “(Subject) (Date)” by automatically adding the date.
4 From Address Enter the E-mail address of the sender. When the recipient replies to a
received document, the message will be sent to this E-mail address.
5 From Name Enter the sender name of the Internet Fax.
6 Body Enter the body message of the Internet Fax. You can enter up to 1000
characters (including spaces).
7 File Format Select the file format of the scanned image. Only [TIFF-S] (TIFF-FX (Profile S))
format can be selected.
8 Fragment Page Size Select the size of the message fragmentation.
3
4
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 2
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 349
[Administration]
Setting up Save as file Setting (Fax/InternetFAX Received Forward)
When you have selected the [Save as file] agent, you can set how and where to store received faxes. Click the [Save as
file] button to open the following window for setup.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 2
8.[Administration]
350 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
3 File Format Select the file format to which the received document will be saved.
TIFF (Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page TIFF file.
TIFF (Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page TIFF files.
PDF (Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF file.
PDF (Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF files.
XPS (Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page XPS file.
XPS (Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page XPS files.
You can select whether to enable OCR by [Enable OCR].
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, only PDF (Multi) and PDF (Single)
are selectable for a file format. For the Forced Encryption function, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 351
[Administration]
4 Encryption Set this to encrypt PDF files if you have selected [PDF (Multi)] or [PDF (Single)]
in the File Format setting.
Encryption
Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files.
User Password
Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files.
Master Password
Enter a password for changing the Encrypt PDF setting.
Encryption Level
Select the desired encryption level.
40-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 3.0, PDF V1.1.
128-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 5.0, PDF V1.4.
128-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 7.0, PDF V1.6.
256-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 9.0, PDF V1.7.
Authority
Select the desired types of authority for Encrypt PDF.
Printing — Select this to authorize users to print documents.
Change of Documents — Select this to authorize users to change
documents.
Content Copying or Extraction — Select this to authorize users to copy and
extract the contents of documents.
Content Extraction for accessibility — Select this to enable the
accessibility feature.
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, you cannot clear the
[Encryption] check box. For the Forced Encryption function, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
The user password and the master password are not set at the factory
shipment.
Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one-byte alphanumerical characters.
The user password must differ from the master password.
These passwords can be re-entered only by an authorized user. Users cannot
change the settings of the [Encryption Level] box and the [Authority] box if
they are not authorized to change the master password. The setting of the
encryption will become available when either the user password or the master
password is entered. For the details of the encryption setting, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
352 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
5 Digital Signature Select whether the addition of the digital signature to PDF is enabled or
disabled.
You cannot select this setting if you have selected a file format except PDF
(Multi) and PDF (Single).
6 Destination — Use local folder Select this to save a received document to the “FILE_SHARE” folder.
7 Destination — Remote 1 Select this check box to save a received document to Remote 1. How you can
set this item depends on how you have set Remote 1 up in the [Save as file]
submenu under the [Setup] menu.
If you have selected [Allow the following network folder to be used as a
destination], you can only select [Use Administrator Setting]. The protocol
and the network path are displayed below this item.
If you have selected [Allow user to select network folder to be used as a
destination], select [Use User Setting] and enter the following items to
configure the destination to save files.
Protocol
Select the protocol to be used for uploading a received document to the
network folder.
SMB — Select this to send a received document to the network folder using
the SMB protocol.
FTP — Select this to send a received document to the FTP server.
FTPS — Select this to send a scanned file to the FTP server using FTP over
SSL/TLS.
NetWare IPX/SPX — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the IPX/SPX protocol.
NetWare TCP/IP — Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file
server using the TCP/IP protocol.
Server Name
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the FTP server name or IP
address to which a received document will be sent. For example, to send a
received document to the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP folder in the
FTP server, enter “192.168.1.1” in this box.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] as the protocol, enter the NetWare file
server name or Tree/Context name (when NDS is available).
When you select [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol, enter the IP address of the
NetWare file server.
Port Number(Command)
Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select [FTP] as the
protocol. Generally “-” is entered for the control port. When “-” is entered, the
default port number, that is set for FTP Client by an administrator, will be
used. If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client, ask your
administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number.
Network Path
When you select [SMB] as the protocol, enter the network path to the network
folder. For example, to specify the “users/scanned” folder in the computer
named “Client01”, enter “\\Client01\users\scanned”.
When you select [FTP] as the protocol, enter the directory in the specified FTP
server. For example, to specify the “ftp://192.168.1.1/user/scanned” FTP
folder in the FTP server, enter “user/scanned”.
When you select [NetWare IPX/SPX] or [NetWare TCP/IP] as the protocol, enter
the folder path in the NetWare file server. For example, to specify the
“sys\scan” folder in the NetWare file server, enter “\sys\scan”.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 353
[Administration]
Destination — Remote 1
(Continues)
Login User Name
Enter the login user name to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a
NetWare server, if required. When you select [FTP] as the protocol, an
anonymous login is assumed if you leave this box blank. You can enter up to
32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than <, >, “ (double
quotation), : (colon) and ; (semicolon). A user name with only a single space is
not possible.
Password
Enter the password to access an SMB server, an FTP server, or a NetWare
server, if required.
Retype Password
Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
[Execute] button
Tests the connection using the specified network settings to check if the
communications can be established.
8 Destination — Remote 2 Select this check box to save a received document to Remote 2. How you can
set this item depends on how the 2nd Folder has been set up in the [Save as
file] submenu in the [Setup] menu. If Remote 2 does not allow you to specify a
network folder, you can only select [Use Administrator Setting]. The protocol
and the network path are displayed below this item. If the Remote 2 allows
you to specify a network folder, you can specify the network folder settings.
See the description of the Remote 1 option for each item.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
354 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
*1 The 2nd line information is not available for the models without the 2nd line for FAX Unit.
Up to 999 files that are sent from the same sender can be stored in the same destination. If 999 files that are sent from
the same sender have already been stored in the specified destination, this equipment will print the received
document from the same sender instead of storing them as files.
9 File Name Format
Select the format of the file name. Information such as file name, date and
time or page number is added according to the selected format.
[FileName]-[Date]-[Page]
[FileName]-[Page]-[Date]
[Date]-[FileName]-[Page]
[Date]-[Page]-[Filename]
[Page]-[FileName]-[Date]
[Page]-[Date]-[FileName]
[FileName]_[Date]-[Page]
Comment
Enter the comment on the file.
Date
Select how you add “date and time” of the file name selected in [Format].
[YYYY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS] — Year (4 digits), month, day, hour, minute
and second are added.
[YY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS] — Year (2 digits), month, day, hour, minute
and second are added.
[YYYY][MM][DD] — Year (4 digits), month, and day are added.
[YY][MM][DD] — Year (2 digits), month, and day are added.
[HH][mm][SS] — Hour, minute and second are added.
[YYYY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS][mm0] — Year (4 digits), month, day, hour,
minute, second and random number (2 digits and “0”) are added.
[None] — Date is not added.
Page
Select the number of digits of a page number applied to “Page” of the file
name selected in [Format] from 3 to 6. [4digits] is set as the default.
Sub ID
This equipment automatically adds a sub ID (identification number) to the
name of a file that you are saving the same file name exists. You can select the
number of digits of this sub ID from 4 to 6 or [Auto]. [Auto] is selected by
default. If [Auto] is selected, a sub ID (4 to 6 digits, selected randomly) is added
according to the status of the file name.
Add line information to File Name
Select this check box to add the incoming line information (Line 1, Line 2
*1
,
and Internet Fax) to the file name. The “Add line information to File Name”
check box is [ON] as the default.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 355
[Administration]
Setting up Email Setting (Fax/InternetFAX Received Forward)
When you have selected the [Email] agent, you can set the contents of E-mail to be sent. Click the [Email] button to
open the following window for setup.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Subject This sets the subject of the E-mail documents. Select [Scanned from (Device
Name) [(Template Name)](Date)(Time)] to automatically apply the subject, or
enter the desired subject in the box. If you manually enter the subject, the
subject will be “(Subject) (Date)” by automatically adding the date.
4 From Address Enter the E-mail address of the sender. When the recipient replies, the
message will be sent to this E-mail address.
5 From Name Enter the sender name of the E-mail document.
6 Body Enter the body message of the E-mail document. You can enter up to 1000
characters (including spaces).
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 2
8.[Administration]
356 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
7 File Format Select the file format to which the received document will be converted.
TIFF (Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page TIFF file.
TIFF (Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page TIFF files.
PDF (Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page PDF file.
PDF (Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page PDF files.
XPS (Multi) — Select this to save scanned images as a Multi-page XPS file.
XPS (Single) — Select this to save scanned images separately as Single-
page XPS files.
You can select whether to enable OCR by [Enable OCR].
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, only the PDF (Multi) and the PDF
(Single) are selectable for a file format. For the Forced Encryption function,
see the reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 357
[Administration]
8 Encryption Set this to encrypt PDF files if you have selected [PDF (Multi)] or [PDF (Single)]
in the File Format setting.
Encryption
Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files.
User Password
Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files.
Master Password
Enter a password for changing the Encrypt PDF setting.
Encryption Level
Select the desired encryption level.
40-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 3.0, PDF V1.1.
128-bit RC4 — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 5.0, PDF V1.4.
128-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 7.0, PDF V1.6.
256-bit AES — Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with
Acrobat 9.0, PDF V1.7.
Authority
Select the desired types of authority for Encrypt PDF.
Printing — Select this to authorize users to print documents.
Change of Documents — Select this to authorize users to change
documents.
Content Copying or Extraction — Select this to authorize users to copy and
extract the contents of documents.
Content Extraction for accessibility — Select this to enable the
accessibility feature.
If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled, you cannot clear the
[Encryption] check box. For the Forced Encryption function, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
The user password and the master password are not set at the factory
shipment.
Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one-byte alphanumerical characters.
The user password must differ from the master password.
These passwords can be re-entered only by an authorized user. Users cannot
change the settings of the [Encryption Level] box and the [Authority] box if
they are not authorized to change the master password. The setting of the
encryption will become available when either the user password or the master
password is entered. For the details of the encryption setting, see the
reference below:
User Functions - SETTING ITEMS (Admin) - Security - Setting secure PDF
Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
358 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
*1 The 2nd line information is not available for the models without the 2nd line for FAX Unit.
9 Digital Signature Select whether the addition of the digital signature to PDF is enabled or
disabled.
You cannot select this setting if you have selected a file format except PDF
(Multi) and PDF (Single).
10 File Name Format
Select the format of the file name. Information such as file name, date and
time or page number is added according to the selected format.
[FileName]-[Date]-[Page]
[FileName]-[Page]-[Date]
[Date]-[FileName]-[Page]
[Date]-[Page]-[Filename]
[Page]-[FileName]-[Date]
[Page]-[Date]-[FileName]
[FileName]_[Date]-[Page]
Comment
Enter the comment on the file.
Date
Select how you add “date and time” of the file name selected in [Format].
[YYYY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS] — Year (4 digits), month, day, hour, minute
and second are added.
[YY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS] — Year (2 digits), month, day, hour, minute
and second are added.
[YYYY][MM][DD] — Year (4 digits), month, and day are added.
[YY][MM][DD] — Year (2 digits), month, and day are added.
[HH][mm][SS] — Hour, minute and second are added.
[YYYY][MM][DD][HH][mm][SS][mm0] — Year (4 digits), month, day, hour,
minute, second and random number (2 digits and “0”) are added.
[None] — Date is not added.
Page
Select the number of digits of a page number applied to “Page” of the file
name selected in [Format] from 3 to 6. [4digits] is set as the default.
Sub ID
This equipment automatically adds a sub ID (identification number) to the
name of a file that you are saving the same file name exists. You can select the
number of digits of this sub ID from 4 to 6 or [Auto]. [Auto] is selected by
default. If [Auto] is selected, a sub ID (4 to 6 digits, selected randomly) is added
according to the status of the file name.
Add line information to File Name
Select this check box to add the incoming line information (Line 1, Line 2
*1
,
and Internet Fax) to the file name. The “Add line information to File Name”
check box is [ON] as the default.
11 Fragment Message Size Select the size of the message fragmentation.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 359
[Administration]
Setting up Box Setting (Fax/InternetFAX Received Forward)
When you have selected the [Store to e-Filing] agent, you can set how to store received faxes in the e-Filing box. Click
the [Store to e-Filing] button to open the following window for setup.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Destination Specify the destination box number for e-Filing.
Box Number
Enter the Box number where a received document will be stored.
Password
Enter the password if the specified Box number requires a password.
Retype Password
Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
4 Folder Name Enter the name of the folder where a received document will be stored.
5 Document Name Display how the received document will be named. You cannot change the
document name.
3
4
5
1 2
8.[Administration]
360 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Meta Scan
The images scanned with the Meta Scan function can have meta data. You can define and register up to 100 extended
fields for the meta data.
The [Extended Field Definition] submenu can be accessed from the [Registration] menu on the [Administration] page.
For how to access it and information on the [Registration] menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.305 “[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List”
The Meta Scan Enabler is required to use the Meta Scan function. For details, contact your service technician or
representative.
[Extended Fields] screen
You can set the information entered from the touch panel when using meta scan.
P.389 “Registering Extended Field Definition”
Setting up Definition Information
Item name Description
1 No. Displays the extended field definition number.
2 Name Displays the extended field definition name.
Click a registered name to check and edit the existing extended field
definition.
P.360 “[Extended Fields] screen”
Click [Undefined] to register a new extended field definition.
P.364 “Definition Properties”
Item name Description
1 [Edit] button Allows you to edit the extended field definition.
P.364 “Definition Properties”
2 [Reset] button Allows you to delete the extended field definition.
3 No. Displays the extended field definition number.
4 Name Displays the extended field definition name.
21
43
1
2
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 361
[Administration]
Setting up Extended Field settings
Item name Description
1 [New] button Allows you to add a extended field property.
P.362 “[Extended Fields Properties] screen”
2 Field Number Displays the extended field property number.
3 Field Name Displays the extended field property name.
4 Display Name Displays the caption of the extended field property for the display on the
touch panel.
5 Mandatory Input Displays whether the extended field property is a mandatory entry or not.
6 Hidden Attribute Displays whether the extended field property is a hidden item on the touch
panel.
7 Input Method Displays the type of the extended field property.
8 Minimum Value Displays the minimum value for the extended field property.
9 Maximum Value Displays the maximum value for the extended field property.
10 Default Value Displays the default value for the extended field property.
11 Date Displays the default date for the extended field property.
6 7 8 9 10 112 3 4 5
1
8.[Administration]
362 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
[Extended Fields Properties] screen
You can register up to 25 extended field properties.
P.392 “Registering templates for Meta Scan”
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Creates an extended field property with the entered data.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the settings.
3 Field Name Specify the extended field name.
4 Display Specify how to display the extended field on the touch panel.
Name
Enter the caption of the extended field name for the display on the touch
panel. You can enter up to 256 characters. Enter the Box number where a
received document will be stored.
Mandatory Input
Select this check box if the extended field is a mandatory entry item.
Hidden Attribute
Select this check box if the extended field is a hidden item on the touch panel.
5 Input Method * Select the type of an extended field.
Numerical — Select this to create an extended field as an integer value.
Decimal — Select this to create an extended field as a decimal value.
Text — Select this to create an extended field as a character string.
List — Select this to create an extended field as a list selection.
Address — Select this to create an extended field as an address.
Password — Select this to create an extended field as a password.
Date — Select this to create an extended field as a date.
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1 2
8.[Administration]
[Registration] ([Administration]) Item List 363
[Administration]
* The following shows the types and settable items of an extended field for each [Input Method]. (*) is displayed for mandatory setting items.
6 List Items Specify list items to be selected for the extended field. The registered list
items are listed in the List items. When you register a list item, enter [Name]
and [Value], and then click [Add]. If you select an item and click [Move Up],
the selected item moves up in the list. Click [Move Down] to move it down.
Select an item and click [Delete] to delete an unnecessary item from the list.
Name
Enter the name of the item.
Value
Enter a value or text to be applied for the selected item.
You cannot exceed the total number of characters displayable in the List
Items (127).
You cannot use a semicolon in [Name] or [Value].
7 Minimum Length Specify the minimum number of characters that can be entered in the
extended field if the field is a character string.
8 Maximum Length Specify the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the
extended field if the field is a character string.
9 Minimum Value Specify the minimum numerical value that can be entered in the extended
field if the field is a numerical value.
10 Maximum Value Specify the maximum numerical value that can be entered in the extended
field if the field is a numerical value.
11 Default Value Specify the default value for the extended field.
12 Password Specify the default password for the extended field if the field is a password.
13 Date Specify the default date for the extended field if the field is a date.
Input method
(Extended field
type)
Mandatory setting items Optional setting items
Numerical value [Maximum Value], [Minimum Value]
Settable value: -999,999,999,999 to 999,999,999,999
[Default Value]
Decimal value [Maximum Value], [Minimum Value]
Settable value: -999,999,999,999.999999 to
999,999,999,999.999999
Contact your service technician if you want to input a
value with more than two decimal places.
[Default Value]
Text [Maximum Length], [Minimum Length]
Settable value: 0 to 256
[Default Value]
List [List Items]
You can register up to 30 [List Items].
You can set from 1 to 126 characters in [Name].
You can set from 1 to 126 characters in [Value].
However, the total number of characters set in [Name]
and [Value] must be from 2 to 127.
[Default Value]
Select from the registered
selection items.
Address None [Default Value]
Password None
Settable value: 0 to 256
[Default Value]
Date None [Default Value]
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
364 [Registration] ([Administration]) Item List
Definition Properties
XML Format File
You can import and delete the XML format file.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Creates an extended field definition with the entered data.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels adding new.
3 Number Displays the extended field definition number.
4 Name Specify the extended field definition name.
5 XML Format File Select the XML format file for meta data.
Item name Description
1 Import XML Format File Import the XML format file.
[Choose File] — Select the XML format file.
[Import] — Import the selected XML format file.
2 Delete XML Format File The list shows the name, size, and date of the imported XML format file.
[Delete] — Delete the XML format file selected in the list.
21
3
4
5
1
2
[Administration]
[Application] Item List 365
0.[Application] Item List
Users who have been granted administrator authority in access policy mode can access the [Application] menu from
the [Administration] page.
See the following for details on accessing.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
Application List
Displays the list of installed applications.
You can manage operations for each embedded application such as opening/closing, setting the startup method, and
uninstalling/installing. You can also install the system application so that you can check information about it and roll
it back to the previous one.
Item name Description
1 [Install] button Installs the embedded application and the system application.
Click this button to display the installation page for the application. You can
specify the file name for the distribution package on this page, and then
install.
When you install the system application, follow instructions to select one that
you want to install and agree to the end user license agreement.
Only one application which uses the received document can be installed per
MFP.
Installing or using application(s) constitutes your acceptance of the terms
and conditions.
If you do not accept those terms and conditions, uninstall the
application(s). Terms and conditions for each application is available
through application details link.
You need to acquire the application’s distribution package in advance.
When installing multiple application packages, install them one at a time.
If a message appears to tell the framework version is old when you install an
application, update the system of this equipment. For details, contact your
service technician.
2 Application Icon Displays the application icon.
6 7 8 9 10
12
43
13
2
3
4 5
1
11
8.[Administration]
366 [Application] Item List
3 Application Name Displays the application name.
You can click the name if the application allows you to change the settings.
When you click it, the setting page opens.
4 Version Displays the application version.
5 Manual Operation Allows you to start and stop the application manually.
This is displayed only when the application package includes the background
application.
Start — Select this to start the application.
Stop — Select this to close the application.
6 Start Type Changes the applications startup method.
This is displayed only when the application package includes the background
application.
Auto — Select this to start the application automatically after it has been
installed or the MFP starts.
Manual — Select this to start the application manually.
7 Uninstall Uninstalls the application.
Click this button to display the uninstallation page for the application.
8 License Displays the installation status of license files to utilize applications.
- — Installation of a license file is not necessary.
Invalid — An application cannot be used since its license file is not installed.
Contact your service technician if you want to use an application with an
invalid license.
Valid — An application can be used since its license file is installed.
9 Special Function Contact your service technician or representative for details on Special
Function.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
[Application] Item List 367
[Administration]
10 Details Opens the screen that shows detailed information and settings of the
application.
You can set the department or user authentication at the startup of each
application. Click [Details] to open [Details] screen, select [Enable] at
[Authentication], and click [Save], so that the authentication screen appears
at the startup of the application. Select [Disable] and click [Save] not to
show the authentication screen. Click [Cancel] to cancel the setting. This
[Authentication] setting works at the next startup of the application. It does
not appear for the background application.
You can enable or disable the connection to the external devices for the
embedded application that has the communication function. When
[Enable] is selected at [External Device Connection], the embedded
application is ready to connect to the external devices. When [Disable] is
selected, it is not ready for connection. Click [Save] after changing the
setting or [Cancel] to discard it.
[Use of external USB Device] shows whether the embedded application can
use external USB devices.
At [Display Setting] under [Status Message] you can select whether to
enable or disable the appearance of the status message and icon that the
embedded application shows. At [Display Position] you can select the
position where the status message and icon appear on the touch panel.
These settings take priority over the settings common to the status
messages that you set under [Administration] > [Setup] > [General]. When
you select [Common] here, the common settings take over these ones you
set here.
P.118 “Status Message”
If the application can make use the received fax images, [Use Received
Document] reads “Used”. If not possible, nothing appears for this function.
P.183 “Received Forward Setting for Application”
To authenticate users at the startup of the embedded application, enable
“User Authentication According To Function”.
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
You cannot change [Authentication] for embedded applications that require
the authentication and embedded applications that do not have the
authentication setting.
The contents of the license agreement are displayed by clicking “Display” in
License Agreement.
“Language” is displayed when the embedded application contains the
language pack.
Item name Description
8.[Administration]
368 [Application] Item List
Application Settings
You can perform operations such as application settings, proxy settings, and debugging levels for all of the
applications that are installed.
General
You can check the framework version.
11 System Application Displays the system applications installed in the equipment.
You need to set up [Cloud Authentication for Email] at [Administration] >
[Setup] > [Network] > [SMTP Client] or [POP3 Client] > [Authentication] to use
it. You can open the setting screen by clicking its name that appears at
[Authentication] or the [System Application] list.
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
12 Rollback Rolls back the installed system application to the previous one. When you
click the button, the confirmation messages appear. Follow instructions and
click the button.
13 Details Opens the screen that shows detailed information and settings of the system
application.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves changes made to the settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels changes made to the settings.
Item name Description
1 Framework Version Displays the framework version.
Item name Description
21
1
8.[Administration]
[Application] Item List 369
[Administration]
Embedded Application Setting
You can enable or disable embedded application functions.
Proxy Setting
You can set a proxy for the application.
The proxy settings are basically common to the Embedded Web Browser, Idle Screen, and Application functions. If
you change them for one function, they change accordingly for others.
P.236 “Setting up Proxy Setting”
P.290 “Proxy Setting”
Item name Description
1 Enable Application Sets the application to enable/disable.
Enable — Select this to enable application.
Disable — You cannot install, uninstall, start, or make settings for the
application on the [Application List] screen. Also, you cannot start the
application from the MFP’s touch panel.
You can always install, roll back and make settings of the system applications
without being affected by this setting.
2 Enforcement automatic
screen change
When a warning occurs during the Home application, set whether or not to
automatically switch to the [JOB STATUS] screen.
3 Home Button Auto
Registration
Sets whether or not automatically to register a button of an application on the
Home screen when it is installed.
Item name Description
1 Host Name Enter a host name for the proxy server.
2 Port Number Enter a port number for the proxy server.
3 Bypass proxy settings for
these addresses
Enter URLs that proxy server is not used by dividing them using semicolons (;).
4 Account ID Enter the account ID of the proxy server.
5 Password Enter the password of the proxy server.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
8.[Administration]
370 [Application] Item List
Install Language Pack
You can install the language packs for the applications.
Import Application Data
You can deliver the application data files.
Application Data
You can collect and check the data files of the applications, and collect the debug logs of the applications.
Item name Description
1 File Name Select the language pack file that you install.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the language pack file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected language pack file.
Item name Description
1 File Name Select the application data file that you deliver.
[Choose File] button — Allows you to select the application data file.
[Import] button — Imports the selected application data file for delivery.
Item name Description
1 Application Name Shows the application name.
2 Data Collects the data files of the application so that you can check them.
[View] button — Shows information of the application data files.
[Export] button — Exports the application data files.
3 Debug Log Collects the debug log files of the applications.
[Download] — Downloads the debug log files.
4 Debug Level Select the debug level of the applications. When you click [Save], the
confirmation message appears.
1
1
3 421
8.[Administration]
[Application] Item List 371
[Administration]
Available USB Device List
You can check information about external USB devices that can work with applications.
USB hubs do not work stably.
User Extended Information
You can check and delete the user extended information file of the application.
Item name Description
1 Device Kind Displays the kind of the USB device.
2 Vendor ID Displays the vendor ID of the USB device.
3 Product ID Displays the product ID of the USB device.
4 Vendor Name Displays the vendor name of the USB device.
5 Product Name Displays the product name of the USB device.
Item name Description
1 Application Icon Shows the icon of the application.
2 Application Name Shows the name of the application.
3 Size(byte) Shows the size (byte) of the user extended information file.
4 Shared Shows whether the user extended information includes the shared
information.
[Yes] — Shows the message when you delete the file that Includes the
shared information.
[No] — Shows the message when you delete the file that Includes no shared
information.
5 Delete Deletes the user extended information file.
3 4 521
3 4 521
8.[Administration]
372 [Application] Item List
Resource Management
You can monitor the resources of the running applications. When you click a resource name [CPU], [Memory], or [Disk
Usage], the clicked resource is sorted and displayed in ascending or descending order. When you click [REFRESH], the
list shows the latest information.
If any applications use the resources extremely, you can restart the equipment with all applications disabled, so that
you can cope with the extreme resource usage.
Item name Description
1 Safe Start Restarts the equipment with all applications disabled. When you click [Safe
Start], the confirmation message appears, so that you can click [OK] to
execute the safe start operation. Click [Cancel] to stop the operation.
2 Application Name Shows the icon and name of the application.
3 Type Shows the type of the application.
4 CPU Shows the CPU usage of the application.
5 Memory Shows the memory usage of the application.
6 Disk Usage Shows the disk usage of the application.
3 4 5 62
1
[Administration]
[License] Item List 373
0.[License] Item List
Before you install licenses, make sure that the equipment is not in operation.
If you have any unclear issues about licenses, contact your service technician or representative.
Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the [License] menu from the
[Administration] page. For how to access it, see the reference below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
License List
You can check the list of the installed licenses.
Activate
You can activate the license with the activation key or the license file.
Item name Description
1 License Name Displays the license name.
2 Enable/Disable Displays the status (Enable or Disable) of the license.
3 Period Displays the validation period of the license.
4 Details Displays the details on the license.
5 Export Exports the license file.
6 Deactivate Deactivates the license.
Item name Description
1 Activation Key Enter the acquired activation key to activate the license.
2 License File Click [Choose File] and select the license file to activate the license.
3 Import Imports the selected license file.
3 4 6521
1
2
3
8.[Administration]
374 [License] Item List
9.[My Account]
[My Account] Overview ................................................................................................... 376
[My Account] Item list ........................................................................................................................................376
376 [My Account] Overview
0.[My Account] Overview
The [My Account] page is displayed if [User Authentication] is enabled on the [Administration] page under [Security] >
[Authentication] > [User Authentication Setting].
It displays the account information of the user who is accessing TopAccess. Also, you can change the display language
and keyboard layout on the touch panel.
[My Account] Item list
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the content of the account.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
3 [Change Password] button Changes the password of the user who is accessing TopAccess.
P.378 “[Change Password] screen”
4 [Home Screen] button Click the [Home] button on the control panel and perform the settings on the
Home screen. On the [My Account] page, set the Home screen of the user who
is accessing TopAccess.
P.378 “[Home Screen setting] screen”
5 [Delete Fingerprint] button Contact your service technician for details.
6 [Sync] button When this printer is set as the primary MFP in [Shared Setting] from [Setting
up User Authentication Setting], you can synchronize the user information on
the printer with other secondary MFPs.
P.99 “[Shared Settings] Item list <access policy mode>”
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
3 1
9
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
20
2
7 8
4
5
9.[My Account]
[My Account] Overview 377
[My Account]
7 [Delete Account] button Deletes user’s own account if a user has logged in successfully. This button is
not available in the following situations:
Built-in users
External users who are not registered locally
When users are prohibited from deleting their own account: [Delete Own
Account] is set to [Disable] at [User Authentication Setting].
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
When this equipment is configured as a secondary device for the shared
user management: [Shared User Management] is set to
[Enable(Secondary)] at [User Authentication Setting].
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
8 [Delete EWB History] button Deletes user’s own EWB history if a user has logged in successfully. This
function is not available for built-in users.
9 User Name Displays the name of the user who is accessing TopAccess.
10 Domain Name/LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user who is accessing
TopAccess.
11 Role Assignment Displays the role assigned to the user who is accessing TopAccess.
Click the [Confirm Permission] button to display the [Confirm Permission]
screen and check the detailed role information.
P.382 “[Confirm Permission] screen”
12 Group Assignment Displays the group assigned to the user who is accessing TopAccess.
13 Email Address This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Enter the Email address of the user or select it from the address book. You can
enter up to 192 half-width alphanumerical characters and symbols.
14 Home Directory This can be configured when [MFP Local Authentication] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Enter the network path to the home directory. You can enter up to 128 half-
width alphanumerical characters and symbols.
For example, enter “\192.168.1.1\users\name” to specify the folder called
“users\name” on the computer whose server address is “192.168.1.1”.
15 Department Number Displays the department number registered by the user who is accessing
TopAccess.
16 PanelUI Language Select the display language for the touch panel.
17 PanelUI Keyboard Display Select whether to display the soft-keyboard when entering characters with
the touch panel.
18 PanelUI Keyboard Layout Select the keyboard layout on the touch panel.
19 Quota Setting You can specify this item if you have selected “Job Quota” for “Quota
Setting”.
OFF — Not setting quota.
ON — Setting quota.
P.73 “[Quota Setting] screen <access policy mode>”
Quota Displays the quota amount. This value decreases according to the weight in
[Quota Setting], and output is restricted when the value becomes 0.00. The
quota can be manually modified to any amount.
Default Quota Enter the default amount to assign to users. You can enter a value up to
99,999,999.99.
20 Total Counter Displays the total counter of the user who is accessing TopAccess.
Item name Description
9.[My Account]
378 [My Account] Overview
[Change Password] screen
Changes the password of the user who is accessing TopAccess. You can change the password only if [MFP Local
Authentication] is selected for the authentication method.
The changed password will be valid from the next log-in on.
[Home Screen setting] screen
You can set the Home screen of the user who is accessing TopAccess.
The Home screen is displayed by pressing the [Home] button on the control panel. You can register frequently used
templates and folders, and External Interface Enabler shortcuts.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Saves the password changes.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
3 Old Password Enter the current password.
4 New Password Enter the new password.
5 Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation.
Item name Description
1 View Home Displays the settings for the home screen.
P.379 “[View Home] screen”
3
4
5
1
2
5
4
6
2
1
3
7
9.[My Account]
[My Account] Overview 379
[My Account]
[View Home] screen
You can edit the settings for the home screen.
[Edit Settings] screen
2 Theme Settings Specify the theme of the home screen.
P.380 “[Theme Settings] screen”
3 Settings Specify the background, button size, and transparency of the home screen.
P.381 “[Settings] screen”
4 [Close] button Closes the [Menu Setting] screen.
5 [Reset] button Deletes the current settings.
6 Panel button list Displays a list of panel buttons you can select for the home.
Select the panel buttons you want to use.
In the Home settings, you can register 64 types.
7 [Delete] button Deletes the selected menu settings.
Item name Description
1 Button Icon Displays button icons. You can register new buttons when you click the
Undefined icon.
2 Name Displays the function names.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Stores the icon settings.
Item name Description
1
2
5
3
4
6
1
2
9.[My Account]
380 [My Account] Overview
[Select Image] screen
[Theme Settings] screen
You can specify the theme of the home screen.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
3 [Delete] button Deletes the icon settings.
4 [Move to] button Moves the icon to another position.
5 Choose icon from the Gallery Select the icon for the image.
P.380 “[Select Image] screen”
6 Name1/Name2 Enter the button name.
Item name Description
1 [Save] button Stores the icon settings.
2 [Cancel] button Cancels the operation.
3 Select Image Select the icon for the image.
Item name Description
1 Save Saves the theme settings.
2 Cancel Cancels the operation.
3 Choose Theme from the
Gallery
Specify the theme.
Item name Description
3
1
2
3
1 2
9.[My Account]
[My Account] Overview 381
[My Account]
[Settings] screen
You can specify the background, button size, and transparency of the home screen.
Item name Description
1 Save Saves the settings.
2 Cancel Cancels the operation.
3 Background Settings Specify the background of the home screen.
You can select the background design from a list if you select [Edit
Background Image from Gallery] at [Current Background].
4 Button Size Settings Specify the button size.
You can select the button size from a list if you select [Edit Button Size from
Gallery] at [Current Button Size].
5 Transparency Settings Specify the transparency of the home screen.
Title — You can specify the transparency of the title bar.
Panel Button — You can specify the transparency of the buttons.
6 Font Settings Specify the font used on the home screen.
Font Size — You can specify the font size.
Font Color — You can specify the font color.
5
6
4
3
1 2
9.[My Account]
382 [My Account] Overview
[Confirm Permission] screen
You can display granted permissions of the user who is accessing TopAccess.
Item name Description
1 [OK] button Closes the [Confirm Permission] screen.
2 Role Information The role information assigned to the user who is accessing TopAccess is
displayed.
2
1
10.Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function ........................................................................................ 384
Procedure for using Meta Scan .........................................................................................................................384
Checking Meta Scan Enabler .............................................................................................................................385
Editing XML format file ......................................................................................................................................385
Registering XML format file ...............................................................................................................................389
Registering Extended Field Definition ..............................................................................................................389
Registering templates for Meta Scan................................................................................................................392
Meta Scan ...........................................................................................................................................................395
Checking logs of Meta Scan...............................................................................................................................395
Setting Multi Station Print .............................................................................................. 396
Procedure for Multi Station Print ......................................................................................................................396
Procedure for Multi Station Print (Only in One Equipment Unit)....................................................................397
Checking the Multi Station Print Enabler .........................................................................................................397
Setting Home Data Synchronization ................................................................................ 398
Procedure for Home Data Synchronization .....................................................................................................398
Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP .............................. 400
Exporting the role information setting file .......................................................................................................400
Defining the role information setting file .........................................................................................................400
Importing the role information setting file.......................................................................................................401
Enabling the role base access setting...............................................................................................................401
Setting up Email............................................................................................................. 402
Procedure for Email Setting ..............................................................................................................................402
Installing Certificates ..................................................................................................... 403
Installing a device certificate ............................................................................................................................403
Creating/Exporting a client certificate..............................................................................................................410
Installing CA certificate......................................................................................................................................412
384 Setting up Meta Scan Function
0.Setting up Meta Scan Function
The Meta Scan is a function to attach information (meta data) generated within the device to scanned images. The
attached meta data can be processed by workflow servers or other means to supplement the scanned image.
To use Meta Scan, select [E-MAIL], [Save as file] and [Save to USB Media] agents of Meta Scan for templates and
register them.
Meta data is managed by an XML file which defines the scheme to store the information.
This section describes the data structure using the XML file <defaultForm3.xml> registered as the default as an
example.
The default XML file consists of two data areas; the “basic data area” and “extended data area”.
The “basic data area” records device information, scan parameters, and user information, while the “extended data
area” records information entered by the user on the touch panel (maximum 25 items) when running Meta Scan.
The user can create fields in “extended data area” to store information entered from the touch panel under [Extended
Field Definition] > [Extended Field Properties].
When using applications that interact with Meta Scan, follow the instructions of the application vendor to set the XML
format file and the extended field.
Procedure for using Meta Scan
Setup
Operation
Operation Description Reference
1 Checking the Meta Scan option Check whether the Meta Scan
option can be used with your
equipment.
P.385 “Checking Meta Scan Enabler”
2 Editing the XML format file If necessary, edit the XML
format file for meta data.
P.385 “Editing XML format file”
3 Registering an XML format file Register an XML format file for
meta data.
P.389 “Registering XML format file”
4 Registering an extended field
definition
If necessary, register an
extended field definition.
P.389 “Registering Extended Field
Definition”
5 Registering a template for Meta
Scan
Register a template for Meta
Scan.
P.392 “Registering templates for Meta
Scan”
Operation Description Reference
1 Meta Scan Perform a meta scan using a
template for Meta Scan.
Template - USING TEMPLATE BUTTONS
- Recalling Templates - Using templates
2 Checking Meta Scan logs Check the scan log to confirm if
meta data has been correctly
created.
P.395 “Checking logs of Meta Scan”
Information About Equipment -
Information About Equipment -
Confirming Job Statuses of Printing/
Copying/Scanning/Faxing - Confirming
job history
10.Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function 385
Functional Setups
Checking Meta Scan Enabler
The Meta Scan Enabler is required to use the Meta Scan function. For the details, contact your service technician or
representative.
You can check whether the Meta Scan option is set on your equipment as follows.
Meta Scan function is available if [Meta scan enabler] is registered under [Admin] > [General] > [License Management].
This function is available only for some models.
Editing XML format file
Edit XML format files in accordance with the applications that interact with Meta Scan. You can define variables in the
XML format file and the variables are replaced with the corresponding information (meta scan) during the Meta Scan
operation.
Enter variables in XML format files using the ${variable name} format.
Variables of XML format files
Variables that can be defined in XML format files are shown below.
You can use variables for the subject of E-mail, the file name of Meta Scan image files, and the file name of meta data.
Variable (${variable name}) Data to be stored Value
${MANUFACT} Manufacturer name TOSHIBA
${MODEL} Model name string
${FWVER} Firmware version string
${SERIAL} Serial number for machine string
${LOCATION} Location set from TopAccess string
${CONTACT} Contact information set from TopAccess string
${CONTACTTEL} Contact telephone number set from TopAccess string
${IP} IP address string
${IPV6} IPv6 address string
${NETBIOSNAME} NetBIOS name string
${FQDN} Fully Qualified Domain Name string
${RESOLUTION} Scan resolution HHHxVVVdpi
${FILEFORMAT} File format MultipleTIFF
singleTIFF
MultiplePDF
singlePDF
MultipleSLIMPDF
singleSLIMPDF
MultipleXPS
singleXPS
JPEG
MultiplePDF/A
singlePDF/A
10.Functional Setups
386 Setting up Meta Scan Function
*1 It cannot be used for the subject of E-mail.
*2 It cannot be used for the file name of image files or the file name of meta data.
*3 TZD is Time zone.
*4 A field number (from 1 to 25) comes at “n”. For details, refer to the next chapter.
Default XML file format
Contents of the default XML format file <defaultForm3.xml> registered in this equipment are shown below. XML
format files must be in the UTF-8 XML format. During the Meta Scan operation, the equipment stores information
corresponding to the variable in each field of the XML format file and attaches it as meta data in the XML format.
<?xml version=“1.0” encoding=“UTF-8”?>
<!-- metadata version 3.1 -->
<mfp_metadata>
<metadata_version>
<major>3</major>
<minor>1</minor>
</metadata_version>
<device_info>
<ip_address>${IP}</ip_address>
<ipv6_address>${IPV6}</ipv6_address>
<fqdn>${FQDN}</fqdn>
${COLORMODE} Color mode BLACK
GRAY SCALE
FULLCOLOR
AUTOCOLOR
${NUMFILE} Number of image files string
${PAGES} Number of pages string
${PATH}
*1 *2
Save path of the image file string
${FILE}
*2
Image file name string
${MYEMAIL} Sender email address string
${DATE} Scanned date YYYY-MM-DD
${YEAR} Scanned year YYYY
${MONTH} Scanned month MM
${DAY} Scanned day DD
${TIME} Scanned time HH:MM:DD.mmmTZ
D
*3
${USER} Login user name string
${DOMAIN} Login user‘s domain name string
${DEPTCODE} Login department code string
${DEPTNAME} Login department name string
${TEMPGROUPNO} Folder number where the template buttons are
registered
string
${TEMPGROUPNAME} Folder name where the template buttons are registered string
${TEMPNO} Template number string
${TEMPNAME} Template name string
${FIELDNAMEn}
*4
Extended field name string
${FIELDNAMEn}
*4
Extended field name string
Variable (${variable name}) Data to be stored Value
10.Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function 387
Functional Setups
<netbios_name>${NETBIOSNAME}</netbios_name>
<location>${LOCATION}</location>
<contact>${CONTACT}</contact>
<contact_tel>${CONTACTTEL}</contact_tel>
<FW_version>${FWVER}</FW_version>
<manufacture>${MANUFACT}</manufacture>
<model>${MODEL}</model>
<serial>${SERIAL}</serial>
<!-- deprecated tag start -->
<host_name>${NETBIOSNAME}</host_name>
<tempt_file_ver>1.0</tempt_file_ver>
<!-- deprecated tag end -->
</device_info>
<scan_info>
<template >
<template_group_no>${TEMPGROUPNO}</template_group_no>
<template_group_name>${TEMPGROUPNAME}</template_group_name>
<template_group_user></template_group_user>
<template_no>${TEMPNO}</template_no>
<template_name>${TEMPNAME}</template_name>
<template_user></template_user>
</template >
<scanned_date>${YEAR}-${MONTH}-${DAY}</scanned_date>
<scanned_time>${DATE}T${TIME}</scanned_time>
<color_mode>${COLORMODE}</color_mode>
<resolution>${RESOLUTION}</resolution>
<file_format>${FILEFORMAT}</file_format>
<no_of_files>${NUMFILE}</no_of_files>
<no_of_pages>${PAGES}</no_of_pages>
<file_path>${PATH}</file_path>
<file_name>${FILE}</file_name>
<sender_email>${MYEMAIL}</sender_email>
<!-- deprecated tag start -->
<workflow>${TEMPGROUPNAME} ${TEMPNAME}</workflow>
<!-- deprecated tag end -->
</scan_info>
<user_info>
<user_id>${USER}</user_id>
<user_domain>${DOMAIN}</user_domain>
<dept_code>${DEPTCODE}</dept_code>
<dept_name>${DEPTNAME}</dept_name>
<!-- deprecated tag start -->
<user_email>${MYEMAIL}</user_email>
<!-- deprecated tag end -->
</user_info>
<user_input>
<field1 name="${FIELDNAME1}">${VALUE1}</field1>
<field2 name="${FIELDNAME2}">${VALUE2}</field2>
<field3 name="${FIELDNAME3}">${VALUE3}</field3>
<field4 name="${FIELDNAME4}">${VALUE4}</field4>
<field5 name="${FIELDNAME5}">${VALUE5}</field5>
<field6 name="${FIELDNAME6}">${VALUE6}</field6>
<field7 name="${FIELDNAME7}">${VALUE7}</field7>
<field8 name="${FIELDNAME8}">${VALUE8}</field8>
<field9 name="${FIELDNAME9}">${VALUE9}</field9>
<field10 name="${FIELDNAME10}">${VALUE10}</field10>
<field11 name="${FIELDNAME11}">${VALUE11}</field11>
<field12 name="${FIELDNAME12}">${VALUE12}</field12>
<field13 name="${FIELDNAME13}">${VALUE13}</field13>
<field14 name="${FIELDNAME14}">${VALUE14}</field14>
10.Functional Setups
388 Setting up Meta Scan Function
<field15 name="${FIELDNAME15}">${VALUE15}</field15>
<field16 name="${FIELDNAME16}">${VALUE16}</field16>
<field17 name="${FIELDNAME17}">${VALUE17}</field17>
<field18 name="${FIELDNAME18}">${VALUE18}</field18>
<field19 name="${FIELDNAME19}">${VALUE19}</field19>
<field20 name="${FIELDNAME20}">${VALUE20}</field20>
<field21 name="${FIELDNAME21}">${VALUE21}</field21>
<field22 name="${FIELDNAME22}">${VALUE22}</field22>
<field23 name="${FIELDNAME23}">${VALUE23}</field23>
<field24 name="${FIELDNAME24}">${VALUE24}</field24>
<field25 name="${FIELDNAME25}">${VALUE25}</field25>
</user_input>
</mfp_metadata>
Setting for saving meta data
You can specify the location to save meta data and the file name by adding the following elements to the XML file.
Specifying the location to save meta data
Example:
Protocol: SMB
External server: 192.168.1.1
Save folder: metadata
Format: <metadata_file_path>file://192.168.1.1/metadata/</metadata_file_path>
Ensure that the protocol is the same as the protocol for saving the Meta Scan image file.
You can check the protocol for saving the Meta Scan image file in [Destination] of Save as file Setting, which is set for
the template.
Specifying a meta data file name
<metadata_file_name>file name.xml</metadata_file_name>
Example:
File name: Sample_MetaData.xml
Format: <metadata_file_name>Sample_MetaData.xml </metadata_file_name>
You can use an XML format file variable for the file name of the meta data.
Example using the date variables (${DATE}):
<metadata_file_name>Sample_MetaData_${DATE}.xml </metadata_file_name>
P.389 “Registering Extended Field Definition”
For more information on variables, see the following:
P.385 “Variables of XML format files”
Protocol Format
SMB <metadata_file_path>file://server name/path/</metadata_file_path>
FTP <metadata_file_path>ftp://server name/path/</metadata_file_path>
FTPS <metadata_file_path>ftps://server name/path/</metadata_file_path>
NetWare (Binary mode) <metadata_file_path>server name/path/</metadata_file_path>
NetWare (NDS mode) <metadata_file_path>Tree/Context/file_share/</metadata_file_path>
10.Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function 389
Functional Setups
Registering XML format file
You can select the XML format file when registering the definitions of extended fields.
P.389 “Registering Extended Field Definition”
When using applications that interact with Meta Scan, follow the instructions of the application vendor to set the XML
format file and the extended field.
You can register up to 99 XML format files.
Registering Extended Field Definition
You can register up to 100 “extended field definitions”, select an “XML format file” for each of them, and set “extended
field properties” as necessary.
When using applications that interact with Meta Scan, follow the instructions of the application vendor to set the XML
format file and the extended field.
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Registration] > [Extended Field Definition].
3
Click [Undefined] to register an extended field definition.
Click a registered extended field name to display the edit screen for the extended field. Skip to step 6.
10.Functional Setups
390 Setting up Meta Scan Function
4
Enter the field name, select an XML format file, and click [Save].
Click [Edit] on the right of the XML format file to select it when you want to use a customized XML format file.
Select “defaultForm3.xml” if you do not have any customized XML format file.
5
Click [New] under Extended Field settings when setting extended field properties.
Click [Extended Field Definitions] in the upper part of the screen if you are not setting extended field properties.
6
Set the extended field properties.
Field Name Specify the extended field name.
Display Specify how to display the extended field on the touch panel.
Name
Enter the caption of the extended field name for the display on the touch
panel. You can enter up to 20 characters. Enter the Box number where a
received document will be stored.
Mandatory Input
Select this check box if the extended field is a mandatory entry item.
Hidden Attribute
Select this check box if the extended field is a hidden item on the touch
panel.
10.Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function 391
Functional Setups
* The following shows the types and settable items of an extended field for each [Input Method]. (*) is displayed for mandatory setting items.
Input Method * Select the type of an extended field.
Numerical — Select this to create an extended field as an integer value.
Decimal — Select this to create an extended field as a decimal value.
Text — Select this to create an extended field as a character string.
List — Select this to create an extended field as a list selection.
Address — Select this to create an extended field as an address.
Password — Select this to create an extended field as a password.
Date — Select this to create an extended field as a date.
List Items Specify list items to be selected for the extended field. The registered list
items are listed in the List Items. When you register a list item, enter [Name]
and [Value], and then click [Add]. If you select an item and click [Move Up],
the selected item moves up in the list. Click [Move Down] to move it down.
Select an item and click [Delete] to delete an unnecessary item from the
list.
Name
Enter the name of the item.
Value
Enter a value or text to be applied for the selected item.
You cannot exceed the total number of characters displayable in the List
Items (127).
You cannot use a semicolon in [Name] or [Value].
Minimum Length Specify the minimum number of characters that can be entered in the
extended field if the field is a character string.
Maximum Length Specify the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the
extended field if the field is a character string.
Minimum Value Specify the minimum numerical value that can be entered in the extended
field if the field is a numerical value.
Maximum Value Specify the maximum numerical value that can be entered in the extended
field if the field is a numerical value.
Default Value Specify the default value for the extended field.
Password Specify the default password for the extended field if the field is a
password.
Date Specify the default date for the extended field if the field is a date.
Input method
(Extended field type)
Mandatory setting items Optional setting items
Numerical value [Maximum Value], [Minimum Value]
Settable value: -999,999,999,999 to 999,999,999,999
[Default Value]
Decimal value [Maximum Value], [Minimum Value]
Settable value: -999,999,999,999.999999 to
999,999,999,999.999999
Contact your service technician if you want to input
a value with more than two decimal places.
[Default Value]
Text [Maximum Length], [Minimum Length]
Settable value: 0 to 256
[Default Value]
10.Functional Setups
392 Setting up Meta Scan Function
7
Click [Save] to register the extended field properties.
You can register up to 25 extended field properties.
The extended field properties are registered.
Registering templates for Meta Scan
You must register a template for Meta Scan before using the Meta Scan function.
Only if the administrator has enabled [Public Home change from User] at [Home Setting], general users can register
templates at the [Registration] > [Public Home] submenu. The following procedure explains the steps with the screens
for the administrator.
P.115 “Home Setting”
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Registration] > [Public Home].
General users click [Registration] > [Public Home].
List [List Items]
You can register up to 30 [List Items].
You can set from 1 to 126 characters in [Name].
You can set from 1 to 126 characters in [Value].
However, the total number of characters set in
[Name] and [Value] must be from 2 to 127.
[Default Value]
Select from the
registered selection
items
Address None [Default Value]
Password None
Settable value: 0 to 256
[Default Value]
Date None [Default Value]
Input method
(Extended field type)
Mandatory setting items Optional setting items
10.Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function 393
Functional Setups
3
Click the [+] icon that represents an empty position at the Panel Button list.
4
Click [Create Template].
5
Select the check box for the [Meta Scan], and then select the agent and click [Select Agent].
To select [Meta Scan], the Meta Scan Enabler must be set up for use.
If it is not set up, you cannot select [Meta Scan].
For [Meta Scan], [Email], [Save as file], and [Store to USB Media] are to be selected individually, except for [Email]
and [Save as file], which can be selected simultaneously.
Email You can transmit the document as an Email attachment.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, you can use a variable as the subject
Addresses specified in [From Address] are included in the meta data.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, if you select [Add the date and time to a
file name] in [File Name], it is also applied to the meta data file name.
P.321 “Email Setting”
10.Functional Setups
394 Setting up Meta Scan Function
6
Set the agent.
Setting operations are the same as for normal templates.
P.311 “Template settings”
The following describes how to set “Extended Field settings”. Be sure to set the settings for the Meta Scan
templates.
7
Click [Extended Field settings] to set extended fields.
8
Select a registered extended field definition using [Extended Field Definition No.].
Save as file You can save the document in a shared folder.
When [Meta Scan] is selected, you can only specify one destination.
Protocols and network paths specified in the destination are included
in the meta data.
Example:
Protocol: SMB
Network Path: \\192.168.1.1\ImageFolder
<file_path>file: //192.168.1.1/ImageFolder/</file_path>
When [Meta Scan] is selected, if you select [Add the date and time to a
file name] in [File Name], it is also applied to the meta data file name.
P.324 “Save as file Setting”
Store to USB Media You can save the document in USB media.
10.Functional Setups
Setting up Meta Scan Function 395
Functional Setups
9
Enter the default value for the [Extended Field Properties].
This is displayed if [Extended Field Properties] are set for the selected extended field definition.
Values set in this screen are used as the default values for [Extended Field Properties] displayed on the touch
panel when using Meta Scan.
Items with an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the [Extended Field Properties] name are mandatory entry fields.
10
Click [Save] to save the extended field settings.
11
Click [Save] to register the template.
The template for Meta Scan is registered.
Meta Scan
You can run Meta Scan using a Meta Scan template.
For the operational procedure, see the reference below:
Template - USING TEMPLATE BUTTONS - Recalling Templates - Using templates
If [Extended Field Definition] set in [Extended Field Settings] in the Meta Scan template is deleted, the default XML
format file <defaultForm3.xml> is used.
Checking logs of Meta Scan
You can check the scan log to confirm if meta data has been correctly created.
Check the following items in the scan log.
See the following for details of the scan log:
P.35 “Scan Log”
Check Item Description
Mode Displays “MSxxxx” (xxxx is in the code format) to indicate Meta Scan.
Status Meta data is correctly created if no errors are displayed.
396 Setting Multi Station Print
0.Setting Multi Station Print
Multi Station Print is the function to enable printing from any of the registered MFPs when a job is sent from a client
computer, by adding multiple MFPs as a cooperative device in advance. Up to 10 MFPs can be registered.
Operating with only one equipment unit is possible if the purpose is to use the output setting change function when
printing. You can connect up to 10 MFPs in a group and connect up to 5 groups including a group to which this MFP
belongs: you can add 4 groups for the connection.
Procedure for Multi Station Print
When the Multi Station Print function is used, it is necessary to set all MFPs to be connected. There are two methods to
set the 2nd or later MFPs to be connected: by manual means and by copying the settings of the 1st MFP using a clone
file.
Setup
Operation
Operation Description Reference
1 Checking the Multi Station
Print Enabler
Check whether the Multi Station Print
Enabler can be used with your MFP.
P.397 “Checking the Multi Station
Print Enabler”
2 Enabling user
authentication
Enable user authentication. P.243 “Setting up User
Authentication Setting”
P.228 “Shared User Management”
3 Enabling the Multi Station
Print function
Enable the Multi Station Print function. P.233 “Multi Station Print”
P.220 “Setting up Multi Station
Print”
4 Setting the connection MFP
(1st device/no group
connection)
Select and register the 1st MFP (no
group connection) from among MFPs
for collaboration.
P.233 “Multi Station Print”
P.220 “Setting up Multi Station
Print”
5 Setting the connection MFP
(2nd or later devices/
groups)
Register the 2nd or later MFPs by
manual means.
P.233 “Multi Station Print”
P.220 “Setting up Multi Station
Print”
When registering the 2nd or later MFPs
by copying the settings for the 1st MFP,
create a clone file and install it in them.
P.273 “Create Clone File settings”
P.275 “Install Clone File settings”
Operation Description Reference
1 Performing Multi Station
Print
Print a job from the MFP connected by
the network.
Print - PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
APPLICATIONS - Outputting a Job
Saved to the Equipment - Printing
from Another MFP (Multi Station
Print)
10.Functional Setups
Setting Multi Station Print 397
Functional Setups
Procedure for Multi Station Print (Only in One Equipment Unit)
When an attempt is made to use the Multi Station Print function only in one equipment unit, register only the MFP to
be used since no MFP connection is carried out.
Setup
Operation
Checking the Multi Station Print Enabler
The Multi Station Printer Enabler is required for the use of the Multi Station Print function. For details, contact your
service technician or representative.
The setting of the Multi Station Print Enabler in your MFP can be confirmed as below.
[User Functions -User-] > [Admin] > [General] > [License Management]
If [Multi Station Print] is registered in [License Management], the Multi Station Print function can be used.
Operation Description Reference
1 Checking the Multi Station
Print Enabler
Check whether the Multi Station Print
Enabler can be used with your MFP.
P.397 “Checking the Multi Station
Print Enabler”
2 Enabling the Multi Station
Print function
Enable the Multi Station Print function. P.233 “Multi Station Print”
P.220 “Setting up Multi Station
Print”
3 Setting the MFP Register the MFP (this equipment)
which is being connected with
TopAccess.
P.233 “Multi Station Print”
P.220 “Setting up Multi Station
Print”
Operation Description Reference
1 Performing Multi Station
Print
Print a job from the registered MFP. Print - PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
APPLICATIONS - Outputting a Job
Saved to the Equipment - Printing
from Another MFP (Multi Station
Print)
398 Setting Home Data Synchronization
0.Setting Home Data Synchronization
Once you have registered multiple MFPs for connection, you can use the common HOME screen when you log in to any
one of the registered MFPs that are connected to the network. If MFP is used to synchronize the HOME screens, up to
10 MFPs can be connected.
If you change the default settings on any of the connected MFPs after you start the home data synchronization, you
need to set the same changes for all of the connected MFPs or you need to create a clone file except User
Management and Address Book on the MFP where you have changed the settings and install it into all the other
connected MFPs.
The Home data synchronization can only be used between the following MFPs.
- e-STUDIO6525AC Series
- e-STUDIO6528A Series
- e-STUDIO7527AC Series
- e-STUDIO9029A Series
Procedure for Home Data Synchronization
The following table explains the procedure to synchronize the HOME screens by means of MFP.
Operation Description Reference
1 Setting the first MFP for
connection
Select one MFP as a primary server
from among MFPs for collaboration.
Make several settings such as user
information, address book, default
settings for jobs, installation of
applications, EWB function settings,
and others.
P.76 “[User Management]
Overview”
P.44 “[Address Book] Item list”
P.365 “[Application] Item List”
P.236 “Embedded Web Browser
settings”
Make sure that [Enable FTP Server] is enabled.
P.152 “Setting up FTP Server”
2 Creating a clone file Create a clone file to copy the settings
of the first MFP and install it into the
second or later MFPs.
Include the following categories in the
clone file:
Default Settings
User Management
Network/Print Service
Address Book
Application
P.273 “Create Clone File settings”
3 Setting the second or later
MFPs for connection
Install the created clone file into the
second or later MFPs.
P.275 “Install Clone File settings”
Execute [Delete All Shared Data] before you install the clone file.
P.231 “Shared Home”
P.115 “Home Setting”
4 Setting the primary server Select one MFP as the primary server
for connection and configure the
shared user management and the
shared address book.
P.228 “Shared User Management”
P.243 “Setting up User
Authentication Setting”
P.47 “Shared Setting”
10.Functional Setups
Setting Home Data Synchronization 399
Functional Setups
5 Setting the home data
synchronization
Set the home data synchronization on
all MFPs for connection.
P.231 “Shared Home”
P.115 “Home Setting”
To disconnect MFP, select [Disable] from [Public Home] or [Sync Setting] on
the MFP concerned.
Select [Assume this MFP is the Primary Server] on the MFP that you use as the
primary server.
Operation Description Reference
400 Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP
0.Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP
When the external authentication (Windows domain authentication and LDAP authentication) is enabled, associating
the role defined in this equipment with the attribute of the external authentication server is required in order to log in
the equipment from an external authentication server as an administrator. The role can be associated with the
equipment by importing the role information setting file in this equipment. The role information setting file is a file in
which the attributes of the external authentication server and corresponding MFP are defined in XML. You can edit the
role information setting file exported from the equipment and import it back to the equipment.
Exporting the role information setting file
For how to export the role information setting file, see the reference below:
P.97 “Export”
Defining the role information setting file
The role information setting file is written in XML format. The role of this equipment can be assigned to the attribute
set in the external server by defining the role information setting file in accordance with the external authentication
server setting. The three examples of the major definition method for this file are explained here. Alphanumeric
characters can be used for the content of each element. An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard for the
<attributeValue> element.
The role of the user that does not correspond to the <RoleSet> element is defined in the <AnyOtherUser> element.
This element can only be used once.
When setting one role to one attribute
<RoleSetting>
<RoleSet>
<Condition>
<AttributeName>department</AttributeName>
<AttributeValue>ITDept</AttributeValue>
</Condition>
<Role>Administrator</Role>
</RoleSet>
<AnyOtherUser>User</AnyOtherUser>
</RoleSetting>
When setting multiple roles to one attribute
Attribute name set in the external authentication
server
Department
Attribute value set in the external authentication
server
ITDept
Role name to be set Administrator
Attribute name set in the external authentication
server
Department
Attribute value set in the external authentication
server
ITDept
Role name to be set [1] Administrator
Role name to be set [2] PrintOperator
10.Functional Setups
Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP 401
Functional Setups
<RoleSetting>
<RoleSet>
<Condition>
<AttributeName>department</AttributeName>
<AttributeValue>ITDept</AttributeValue>
</Condition>
<Role>Administrator</Role>
</RoleSet>
<RoleSet>
<Condition>
<AttributeName>department</AttributeName>
<AttributeValue>ITDept</AttributeValue>
</Condition>
<Role>PrintOperator</Role>
</RoleSet>
<AnyOtherUser>User</AnyOtherUser>
</RoleSetting>
When setting one role to multiple attributes
<RoleSetting>
<RoleSet>
<Condition>
<AttributeName>department</AttributeName>
<AttributeValue>Sales</AttributeValue>
</Condition>
<Condition>
<AttributeName>title</AttributeName>
<AttributeValue>SeniorManager</AttributeValue>
</Condition>
<Role>Print</Role>
</RoleSet>
<AnyOtherUser>User</AnyOtherUser>
</RoleSetting>
Importing the role information setting file
For how to import the role information setting file, see the reference below:
P.98 “Import”
To change the setting, import the role information setting file again.
Enabling the role base access setting
In order to use the imported role information setting file, enabling the role base access setting is required. For the
procedure, see the reference below:
P.243 “Setting up User Authentication Setting”
Attribute name set in the external authentication
server [1]
Department
Attribute value set in the external authentication
server [1]
Sales
Attribute name set in the external authentication
server [2]
Title
Attribute value set in the external authentication
server [2]
SeniorManager
Role name to be set Print
402 Setting up Email
0.Setting up Email
Set the necessary settings for the email transmission, reception and operation from the [Administration] page
displayed by logging in by means of the access policy mode.
When Email is used, setting up of the basic settings of the network is necessary. The [Network] submenu can be
accessed from the [Setup] menu on the [Administration] page. For how to access it and information on the [Setup]
menu, see the references below:
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
P.103 “[Setup] Item List”
Procedure for Email Setting
Operation Description Reference
1 Email transmission function
confirmation
Check whether [Enable] is set for the
Email transmission function from
[Setup] > [General] > [Setting up
Functions].
P.103 “General settings”
P.105 “Setting up Functions”
2 Setting up SMTP Client Set [Enable] for SMTP transmission of
Email.
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
3 Email Settings Set the necessary settings for the Email
transmission operation.
P.195 “Email settings”
4 Setting up URL Transmission
Settings
Set to apply to an Email the URL where
scanned images are stored, instead of
attaching themselves.
P.200 “Setting up URL
Transmission Settings”
5 Setting up Email
Authentication
Set to require the entry of a user name
and a password when Email
transmission is attempted from the
scanning screen.
P.241 “Authentication settings”
P.256 “Setting up Email
Authentication”
6 Setting up Email Address
Setting
Set to enable Email transmission to a
sender’s e-mail address when [Enable]
is set for Email authentication or user
authentication.
P.241 “Authentication settings”
P.243 “Setting up User
Authentication Setting”
P.256 “Setting up Email
Authentication”
P.257 “Setting up Email Address
Setting”
7 Setting up Single Sign On
Setting
Set to apply the user name and the
password, which are entered from the
control panel, for logging into the
equipment to the SMTP
communication, when an
authentication method for connecting
an SMTP server is selected in [SMTP
Client] and [Enable] is set for [User
Authentication] or [Email
Authentication].
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
P.241 “Authentication settings”
P.243 “Setting up User
Authentication Setting”
P.256 “Setting up Email
Authentication”
P.259 “Setting up Single Sign On
Setting”
Functional Setups
Installing Certificates 403
0.Installing Certificates
In the Security Service page, you can install a wireless LAN certificate for authentication with the RADIUS server, install
and export a device certificate to enable SSL/TLS and set up its SCEP (automatic installation), install CA certificate,
and install certificates for IEEE 802.1X authentication and set up its SCEP.
Installing a device certificate
To enable SSL/TLS for HTTP setting, FTP server setting, IPP Print Service, Web Services Print, or Off Device
Customization Architecture settings, you must install a device certificate for each.
To install these device certificates, you need to create a self-signed certificate, install them from an authentication
agency or the CA server. You can also install them automatically from the CA server using SCEP.
When you want to enable SSL/TLS for HTTP setting, FTP Server, IPP Print, Web Services Print, or Off Device
Customization Architecture settings, the certificates required to install to the equipment and the client computer are
as follows:
* In the HTTP Network Service, FTP Server, IPP Print, and Off Device Customization Architecture settings, if you create a self-signed
certificate for the equipment, you need to install the self-signed certificate to the client computer. If you select to install an imported
device certificate to the equipment, also install the CA certificate to the client computer.
P.412 “Installing CA certificate”
When you install the User Certificate in this equipment, it is recommended to connect this equipment and a client
computer using a crossing cable for ensuring security.
Creating/exporting a self-signed certificate
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
Use SSL/TLS
for...
Required Certificate for this equipment Required Certificate for Client computer
Device Certificate CA
Certificate
Self-signed
Certificate
Client
Certificate
CA
Certificate
Self-signed
Certificate
Device certificates
installed from
authentication
agency / CA server
HTTP, FTP, IPP
Print, Off
Device
Customization
Architecture
*
Required - - (Required) - -
- Required - - - (Required)
Web Service
Print
- Required Required - Required Required
Required - - Required - -
10.Functional Setups
404 Installing Certificates
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
3
Select [self-signed certificate] under [Device Certificate] and click [Create].
The Create self-signed certificate page is displayed.
4
Enter the following items and click [Save].
You can set the following in this page.
P.262 “[Create self-signed certificate] screen”
5
Click [OK].
10.Functional Setups
Installing Certificates 405
Functional Setups
6
A self-signed certificate is created. Click [Export] if you are exporting.
7
Click the link for the file name of the certificate to be exported.
The file is downloaded.
8
Then you can enable SSL/TLS for the following network settings.
P.148 “Setting up HTTP”
P.150 “Setting up WSD”
P.152 “Setting up FTP Server”
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
P.216 “Setting up IPP Print”
P.239 “Off Device Customization Architecture settings”
10.Functional Setups
406 Installing Certificates
Installing an imported device certificate
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
3
Click [Choose File] of [Import] in [Device Certificate] to select a device certificate file, and then
click [Upload].
The alert message dialog box appears.
4
Enter the password for the device certificate, and then click [OK].
The device certificate is imported.
5
Click [Save] on the [Certificate Management] submenu.
10.Functional Setups
Installing Certificates 407
Functional Setups
6
Then you can enable SSL/TLS for the following network settings.
P.148 “Setting up HTTP”
P.150 “Setting up WSD”
P.152 “Setting up FTP Server”
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
P.216 “Setting up IPP Print”
P.239 “Off Device Customization Architecture settings”
Deleting an imported device certificate
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
3
Click [Delete] of [Import] in [Device Certificate].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
If no device certificate has been imported, you cannot delete it.
4
Click [OK].
The device certificate is deleted.
5
Click [Save] on the [Certificate Management] submenu.
10.Functional Setups
408 Installing Certificates
Installing a device certificate automatically
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
3
Enter the following items in [SCEP(Automatic)] of [Device Certificate], and then click [Request].
CA Server Address (Primary) Enter the IP address or FQDN of the CA server. You can enter up to 128
characters.
CA Server Address
(Secondary)
Enter the IP address or FQDN of the CA server. You can enter up to 128
characters.
MFP’s Address in Common
Name in the Certificate
Select whether to use the IP address or FQDN as the address of this
equipment to be entered in the [Common Name] box of the certificate.
Timeout Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no response is
received from the CA server.
CA Challenge Enter the CA challenge.
Signature Algorithm Select SHA1 or MD5 as the signature algorithm.
Poll Interval Specify the polling interval.
Maximum Poll Duration Specify the polling duration.
10.Functional Setups
Installing Certificates 409
Functional Setups
If FQDN is used in [CA Server address], you need to configure a DNS server and enable DNS settings.
If [FQDN] is selected in [MFP’s Address in Common Name in the Certificate], the IP address of this equipment
must be registered in the DNS server.
A device certificate is installed.
A CA certificate is installed automatically as well as a device certificate. If a CA certificate is already installed,
delete the existing one by clicking [DELETE] of SCEP in [Device Certificate]. Then click [Request] to install a new
CA certificate.
4
Click [Save] on the [Certificate Management] submenu.
5
Then you can enable SSL/TLS for the following network settings.
P.148 “Setting up HTTP”
P.150 “Setting up WSD”
P.152 “Setting up FTP Server”
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
P.216 “Setting up IPP Print”
P.239 “Off Device Customization Architecture settings”
Deleting a device certificate installed automatically
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
10.Functional Setups
410 Installing Certificates
3
Select [SCEP(Automatic)] in [Device Certificate], and then click [Delete].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
A CA certificate already installed automatically will be deleted as well as the device certificate.
Deleting is disabled when no device certificate has been installed automatically.
4
Click [OK].
The device certificate is deleted.
5
Click [Save] on the [Certificate Management] submenu.
Creating/Exporting a client certificate
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
10.Functional Setups
Installing Certificates 411
Functional Setups
3
Click [Create] under [Client Certificate].
The Create Client Certificate page is displayed.
4
Enter the following items and click [Save].
You can set the following in this page.
P.263 “[Create Client Certificate] screen”
5
Click [OK].
6
Click the link for the file name of the certificate to be exported.
The file is downloaded.
If you have not installed a client certificate, enter the password in [Password] and click [Create] to create a
certificate.
10.Functional Setups
412 Installing Certificates
Installing CA certificate
When you want to enable SSL/TLS and verify with a CA certificate for the SMTP Client, POP3 Network Service, FTP
Client, Directory Service, or Syslog Setting, you must install the CA certificate. You can install up to 30 CA certificates in
this equipment.
Installing CA certificate
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
3
Select the encryption of CA certificate and click [Choose File] to select a CA certificate file. Then
click [Upload].
The CA certificate is installed.
4
Click [Save] on the [Certificate management] submenu.
5
Then you can enable SSL/TLS by selecting [Verify with imported CA certification(s)] for the
following network settings.
P.150 “Setting up WSD”
P.153 “LDAP Client settings”
P.157 “Setting up SMTP Client”
P.161 “Setting up POP3 Client”
P.163 “Setting up FTP Client”
P.169 “Syslog Setting”
P.239 “Off Device Customization Architecture settings”
10.Functional Setups
Installing Certificates 413
Functional Setups
Deleting CA certificate
1
Start TopAccess access policy mode.
P.14 “Access Policy Mode”
2
Click [Administration] > [Security] > [Certificate Management].
The Certificate Management page is displayed.
3
Select the CA certificate file that you want to delete in the [Certificate Files] list, and click
[Delete].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
4
Click [OK].
The CA certificate is deleted.
5
Click [Save] on the [Certificate Management] submenu.
10.Functional Setups
414 Installing Certificates
INDEX 415
INDEX
A
Access policy mode.................................................... 10, 14
Accessing TopAccess ...................................................... 12
Accessing TopAccess by entering URL........................... 12
Activate.......................................................................... 373
Add Filter ....................................................................... 134
Add IKE .......................................................................... 137
Add Manual Key............................................................. 136
Add New LPR Queue ..................................................... 213
Add New URL................................................................. 238
Add Policy...................................................................... 143
Add Profile..................................................................... 141
Address Book................................................................... 44
Address Book Item list .................................................... 44
Administration .............................................................. 101
Application Data............................................................ 370
Application Item List..................................................... 365
Application List ............................................................. 365
Application Log ............................................................... 38
Application Settings...................................................... 368
Apply Remote Command File....................................... 298
Assignment for Programmable button........................ 116
Authentication settings ................................................ 241
Available USB Device List ............................................. 371
B
Basic Setting.................................................................. 120
Box Setting .................................................................... 329
Box Setting (Mailbox)...................................................... 60
Box Setting
(Received Forward Setting for Application) ............. 184
C
Card Authentication Guidance Image.......................... 344
Certificate Management settings ................................. 260
Change Password.......................................................... 378
Checking logs of Meta Scan .......................................... 395
Checking Meta Scan Enabler ........................................ 385
Close Button Setting..................................................... 286
Common Settings ......................................................... 226
Configuration settings .................................................. 269
Confirm Permission ...................................................... 382
Contact Property........................................................... 348
Contacts .......................................................................... 44
Contents Setting ........................................................... 288
Copier settings .............................................................. 172
Counter............................................................................ 61
Counter Item list ............................................................. 62
Counter Overview ........................................................... 62
Create Client Certificate................................................ 263
Create Clone File settings............................................. 273
Create Destination information ..................................... 50
Create Group Information .............................................. 85
Create Group information .............................................. 54
Create LDAP Information.............................................. 154
Create New Role.............................................................. 89
Create self-signed certificate........................................ 262
Create SNMP V3 User Information ............................... 167
Create User Information ................................................. 77
Creating/Exporting a client certificate......................... 410
Creating/exporting a self-signed certificate................ 403
Custom Keyboard Setting............................................. 297
D
Data Backup .................................................................. 300
DDNS .............................................................................. 128
Default Home................................................................. 341
Default Home Settings .................................................. 341
Default roles and privileges ............................................ 87
Default XML file format.................................................. 386
Defining the role information setting file..................... 400
Definition Properties ..................................................... 364
Delete Shared Files settings.......................................... 291
Deleting a device certificate installed
automatically ............................................................. 409
Deleting an imported device certificate....................... 407
Deleting CA certificate................................................... 413
Department Counter ....................................................... 65
Department Information........................................... 66, 93
Department Management Item list ................................ 92
Destination Setting ....................................................... 312
Destination Setting (Mailbox) ......................................... 59
Device............................................................................... 17
Device Item list ................................................................ 18
Display Timing ............................................................... 286
Displayed icons................................................................ 20
DNS................................................................................. 127
DNS (Secondary) ........................................................... 127
E
Edit Department Information ......................................... 94
Edit Destination information .......................................... 50
Edit Group Information................................................... 85
Edit Group information ................................................... 54
Edit LDAP Information................................................... 154
Edit Role........................................................................... 91
Edit Settings................................................................... 379
Edit Settings for folders................................................. 307
Edit Settings for templates ........................................... 306
Edit User Information...................................................... 80
Editing XML format file.................................................. 385
Email Setting ................................................................. 321
Email Setting (Mailbox) ................................................... 60
Email settings ................................................................ 195
Embedded Application Setting..................................... 369
Embedded Web Browser settings ................................ 236
Enabling the role base access setting .......................... 401
End-user mode ................................................................ 10
Enter Password................................................................ 79
Entering the destinations manually ............................. 313
Export......................................................................... 49, 97
Export Logs Item list........................................................ 40
Export settings............................................................... 281
Export/Import Item list ................................................... 97
Exporting the role information setting file................... 400
Extended Field Properties............................................. 338
Extended Field settings................................................. 338
Extended Fields ............................................................. 360
Extended Fields Properties........................................... 362
F
Favorite Contact.............................................................. 45
416 INDEX
Favorite Groups............................................................... 46
Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received
Forward settings ....................................................... 345
Fax Setting................................................................ 51, 318
Fax settings.................................................................... 176
Fax/InternetFax Job Item list ......................................... 27
From Name Registration........................................ 181, 204
G
General .......................................................................... 368
General Setting ...................................................... 121, 285
General Setting (Secondary) ........................................ 121
General settings ............................................................ 103
Group ............................................................................... 46
Group Assignment........................................................... 84
Group Management Item list.......................................... 84
H
Home Data List.............................................................. 345
Home Screen setting..................................................... 378
Home Setting ................................................................ 115
I
ICC Profile settings........................................................ 223
Idle Screen..................................................................... 285
Image/Icon Management ............................................. 343
Import......................................................................... 48, 98
Import Application Data ............................................... 370
Import settings.............................................................. 278
Importing the role information setting file.................. 401
Inbound FAX routing ....................................................... 55
Inbound FAX routing Item list......................................... 55
Install Card Reader Firmware....................................... 304
Install Clone File settings.............................................. 275
Install Language Pack................................................... 370
Installing a device certificate........................................ 403
Installing a device certificate automatically................ 408
Installing an imported device certificate..................... 406
Installing CA certificate................................................. 412
Installing Certificates .................................................... 403
InternetFax Setting ....................................................... 317
InternetFax Setting (Mailbox)......................................... 59
InternetFax settings...................................................... 202
IPv4 ................................................................................ 122
IPv4 (Secondary) ........................................................... 122
IPv6 ................................................................................ 125
IPv6 (Secondary) ........................................................... 125
J
Job Status........................................................................ 23
Job Status Overview ....................................................... 24
L
Languages settings ....................................................... 295
LDAP Authentication..................................................... 254
LDAP Client settings...................................................... 153
License Item List ........................................................... 373
License List .................................................................... 373
LLMNR............................................................................ 130
LLMNR (Secondary)....................................................... 130
Log Settings Item list ...................................................... 42
Log size ............................................................................ 42
Logs.................................................................................. 31
Logs Overview ................................................................. 32
Long File Name Setting ................................................. 106
M
MailBox Setting (Mailbox) ............................................... 57
MailBoxes Properties....................................................... 56
Maintenance Item list.................................................... 270
Message Log .................................................................... 39
Meta Scan .............................................................. 360, 395
MFP Collaboration......................................................... 226
MFP Local Authentication ............................................. 247
Modify Filter................................................................... 134
Modify IKE ...................................................................... 137
Modify Manual Key ........................................................ 136
Modify Policy ................................................................. 143
Modify Profile................................................................. 141
Multi Station Print ......................................................... 233
Multi Station Print Job Item list...................................... 29
My Account .................................................................... 375
My Account Item list ...................................................... 376
My Account Overview .................................................... 376
N
Network Composition ................................................... 120
Network settings ........................................................... 119
Notification Events........................................................ 239
Notification settings...................................................... 292
O
OCR Setting.................................................................... 117
Off Device Customization Architecture settings.......... 239
P
Panel Background Image.............................................. 343
Panel Icon Image ........................................................... 343
Panel View...................................................................... 284
Password Policy settings .............................................. 265
PDF/A Fileformat Setting .............................................. 118
Preparing a driver file for uploading ............................ 271
Preset Print Setting ....................................................... 290
Print Counter ................................................................... 64
Print Data Converter settings ....................................... 225
Print Job Item list ............................................................ 24
Print Service settings .................................................... 215
Printer settings .............................................................. 208
Printer/e-Filing settings ................................................ 207
Procedure for Email Setting.......................................... 402
Procedure for Home Data Synchronization................. 398
Procedure for using Meta Scan..................................... 384
Project Management Item list ........................................ 96
Proxy Setting ......................................................... 290, 369
Public Box Authentication ............................................ 260
Public Home ............................................................ 44, 305
Public Home Settings.............................................. 44, 340
Public Theme Settings ............................................ 44, 339
Q
Quota Setting .................................................................. 73
R
Reboot settings ............................................................. 304
INDEX 417
Received Forward Setting for Application................... 183
Reception Journal........................................................... 34
Recovery Information ..................................................... 26
Register from Application............................................. 310
Register from Function List .......................................... 309
Register from Home...................................................... 310
Register from Job History............................................. 308
Register from Recommendation.................................. 309
Register from URL List .................................................. 309
Registering Extended Field Definition ......................... 389
Registering templates for Meta Scan ........................... 392
Registering XML format file........................................... 389
Registration..................................................................... 43
Registration Item list..................................................... 305
Registration Overview .................................................... 44
Relay End Terminal Report (Mailbox) ............................ 59
Remote Command........................................................ 298
Remote Command Execution History.......................... 299
Remote Setting List....................................................... 191
Remote Setting screen.................................................. 192
Remove Software settings............................................ 272
Removing the contacts from the Recipient List .......... 317
Report Settings ...................................................... 182, 205
Resource Management ................................................. 372
Restriction of Destination Selection Method............... 107
Role Assignment ............................................................. 83
Role Management Item list............................................. 86
S
Save as file Setting ........................................................ 324
Save as file Setting (Mailbox).......................................... 60
Save as File settings ...................................................... 185
Scan Counter................................................................... 64
Scan Job Item list............................................................ 28
Scan Log .......................................................................... 35
Scan Setting .................................................................. 332
Search Address List......................................................... 53
Search Contact................................................................ 52
Search User Account....................................................... 77
Searching for destinations in the LDAP server ............ 316
Security Item list ........................................................... 241
Security Stamp setting ................................................. 268
Select Home Type ......................................................... 306
Select Image.................................................................. 380
Selecting the destinations from the address book
.................................................................................... 314
Selecting the groups from the address book .............. 315
Server Assignment screen ............................................ 156
Setting for saving meta data ........................................ 388
Setting Home Data Synchronization............................ 398
Setting up Address Book ....................................... 278, 281
Setting up Application .................................................. 295
Setting up Bonjour........................................................ 164
Setting up Box Setting
(Fax/InternetFAX Received Forward)........................ 359
Setting up CA Certificate............................................... 264
Setting up Category Setting ......................................... 274
Setting up Certificate Files ........................................... 264
Setting up Certificate Setting ................................ 237, 264
Setting up Client Certificate ......................................... 263
Setting up Clone File..................................................... 274
Setting up Clone File Information ................................ 276
Setting up CMYK Source Profile.................................... 224
Setting up Combined ............................................ 279, 282
Setting up Confidentiality Setting ................................ 108
Setting up Configuration............................................... 239
Setting up Copy Job Enforcement Continue ............... 175
Setting up Current Language Pack List........................ 296
Setting up Current Software List .................................. 304
Setting up Customized RGB Profile .............................. 225
Setting up Date & Time ................................................. 113
Setting up Daylight Savings Time Setting.................... 114
Setting up Default Direct Print Setting......................... 209
Setting up Default Raw Job Setting ............................. 211
Setting up Default setting ............................................. 172
Setting up Default Setting for PanelUI ......................... 297
Setting up Definition Information ................................ 360
Setting up Department Setting .................................... 241
Setting up Destination .................................................. 186
Setting up Destination Profile ...................................... 224
Setting up Destination Setting
(Fax/Internet Fax Received Forward)........................ 347
Setting up Device Certificate ........................................ 260
Setting up Device Information...................................... 104
Setting up Document Print
(Fax/InternetFax Received Forward) ........................ 347
Setting up Driver Customization Packages Setting..... 210
Setting up e-Filing Notification Events......................... 106
Setting up Email ............................................................ 402
Setting up Email Address Setting ................................. 257
Setting up Email Authentication .................................. 256
Setting up Email Print ................................................... 219
Setting up Email Setting ....................................... 195, 292
Setting up Email Setting
(Fax/InternetFAX Received Forward)........................ 355
Setting up Energy Save ................................................. 109
Setting up EWB History Setting .................................... 237
Setting up Extended Field settings............................... 361
Setting up Fax Setting ................................................... 176
Setting up File Composition ......................................... 188
Setting up File Upload................................................... 276
Setting up Filtering........................................................ 130
Setting up Folder Name ................................................ 186
Setting up Format ......................................................... 187
Setting up FTP Client..................................................... 163
Setting up FTP Print ...................................................... 218
Setting up FTP Server.................................................... 152
Setting up Functions ..................................................... 105
Setting up General Setting............................................ 208
Setting up Home Data........................................... 280, 283
Setting up Home Directory Setting .............................. 259
Setting up Home Page Setting...................................... 236
Setting up HTTP ............................................................ 148
Setting up Install Language Pack ................................. 296
Setting up Install Software Package ............................ 303
Setting up InternetFax Setting ..................................... 202
Setting up InternetFax Setting
(Fax/Internet Fax Received Forward)........................ 348
Setting up IP Security.................................................... 132
Setting up IPP Print ....................................................... 216
Setting up IPX/SPX ........................................................ 170
418 INDEX
Setting up Job Control.................................................. 106
Setting up Job Notification Events .............................. 294
Setting up License......................................................... 295
Setting up Local Storage Path...................................... 185
Setting up LPD Print...................................................... 215
Setting up MailBoxes ............................................. 279, 282
Setting up Meta Scan Function .................................... 384
Setting up Mobile Scan(eSCL) ...................................... 164
Setting up Multi Station Print....................................... 220
Setting up N/W-Fax Destination................................... 193
Setting up N/W-Fax Folder............................................ 193
Setting up NetWare....................................................... 170
Setting up NetWare Print.............................................. 218
Setting up Network....................................................... 239
Setting up Policy ........................................................... 267
Setting up Policy for Administrator, Auditor ............... 266
Setting up Policy for Users ........................................... 265
Setting up POP3 Client ................................................. 161
Setting up Printer/e-Filing Job
Enforcement Continue .............................................. 207
Setting up Proxy Setting............................................... 236
Setting up Raw Job Setting .......................................... 212
Setting up Raw TCP Print.............................................. 215
Setting up Remote 1 and Remote 2 ............................. 189
Setting up Restriction on
Address Book Operation by Administrator .............. 107
Setting up RGB Source Profile...................................... 223
Setting up Save as file Setting
(Fax/InternetFAX Received Forward)........................ 349
Setting up Searching Interval....................................... 189
Setting up Server Registration Setting ........................ 238
Setting up Setting data included in Clone File ............ 276
Setting up Single Page Data Saving Directory............. 188
Setting up Single Sign On Setting ................................ 259
Setting up SLP ............................................................... 168
Setting up SMB.............................................................. 144
Setting up SMTP Client ................................................. 157
Setting up SMTP Server ................................................ 151
Setting up SNMP ........................................................... 165
Setting up SNTP Service ............................................... 113
Setting up System Message Notification Events ......... 293
Setting up URL List for Menu Screen............................ 238
Setting up URL Transmission Settings......................... 200
Setting up USB Cable Print........................................... 219
Setting up User Authentication Setting....................... 243
Setting up User Name and Password
at User Authentication for Save as File..................... 188
Setting up WEB General Setting ................................... 114
Setting up WSD.............................................................. 150
Settings.......................................................................... 381
Setup Item list ............................................................... 103
Shared Address Book.................................................... 227
Shared Home................................................................. 231
Shared Setting................................................................. 47
Shared Settings Item list................................................. 99
Shared User Management ............................................ 228
Shutdown Setting ......................................................... 112
Simple Screen Settings................................................. 342
SSL/TLS Settings ........................................................... 132
Status Message.............................................................. 118
Store to USB Device Setting.......................................... 329
Supported browsers........................................................ 11
Syslog Setting ................................................................ 169
System Protection......................................................... 269
System Updates settings .............................................. 303
T
Template Data Conversion ........................................... 279
Template settings.......................................................... 311
Theme Settings.............................................................. 380
TopAccess Conditions ..................................................... 11
TopAccess Overview........................................................ 10
TopAccess screen descriptions....................................... 13
Total Count ...................................................................... 62
Transmission Journal...................................................... 33
U
Upload Software settings ............................................. 270
User Accounts Item list ................................................... 76
User Counter.................................................................... 69
User Extended Information........................................... 371
User Information ............................................................. 70
User Management ........................................................... 75
User Management Overview........................................... 76
User Paper Type ............................................................ 302
Using the attribute of the external authentication
as a role of the MFP.................................................... 400
V
Variables of XML format files......................................... 385
Version ........................................................................... 240
View Home ..................................................................... 379
View Logs Item list........................................................... 32
VNC Setting .................................................................... 171
W
When setting multiple roles to one attribute............... 400
When setting one role to multiple attributes............... 401
When setting one role to one attribute ........................ 400
Windows Domain Authentication................................. 251
X
XML Format File............................................................. 364
FC-2020AC/2520AC/2021AC/2521AC
FC-2525AC/3025AC/3525AC/4525AC/5525AC/6525AC
DP-2528A/3028A/3528A/4528A/5528A/6528A
FC-6526AC/6527AC/7527AC
DP-6529A/7529A/9029A
1-11-1, OSAKI, SHINAGAWA-KU, TOKYO, 141-8562, JAPAN
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS /
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
TopAccess
© 2021 - 2024 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
Patent; https://www.toshibatec.com/en/patent/
OME210036D0
R210220X7204-TTEC
Ver04 F Issued in Sep. 2024
